Home

1404-UM001F-EN-P, Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 User Manual

1. Data Table Name and Description sze Applies to nuu sts S 2 L age g 8 glleg 85 872 5 lg E un s 3 lsz E gSEISES 26 52 ead Sg zogms as xox Zu SEE Ss Oscillograph Results Parameters R N40 61 48 29 or 59 4 e 244 Load Factor Log Configuration Read back Select R W N41 16 49 50 6 e 247 Parameters Load Factor Log Results Parameters R e H2 43 51 14 ele 248 Transient Analysis Configuration Read back Select R W F43 44 5253 13 249 Parameters Transient Analysis Metering Results Parameters R e F44 32 54 14 250 Transient Capture Clear Read back Data Select R W N45 17 55 56 13 e 251 Parameters Transient Capture Results Parameters R e N46 60 57 29 or 5914 252 Advanced Metering Configuration Parameters R W N47 19 58 59 10 e 255 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 43 63 R e F48 45 60 14 256 Parameters Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 42 62 R F49 46 61 14 257 Parameters Catalog Number and WIN Parameters R N51 50 64 32301 29 e o o 258 Network Demand Sync and Time Configuration R W N52 65 66 41901 20 e eje 260 Parameters Controller Command Parameters W N53 67 42001 1 m e e 261 Daylight Saving Time Configuration Parameters R W N54 47 68 69 42101 10 e eje 261 Time of Use Register Configuration Parameters R W N55 49 70 71 4220 10 ej e e 262 Time of Use Records Real Energy and
2. Initialize N12 0 word counter Copy F13 configuration float data to N11 temporary file SBR MOV 0000 Subroutine Move Source 0 0 lt Dest N12 0 30 lt COP Copy File Source F13 0 Dest N11 0 Length 32 Continue to swap words until 32 floats have been converted This is enough to handle all power monitor files Q4 1 LES ADD 0001 LBL Less Than A lt B Add Source A N12 0 Source A 1 30 lt 1 lt Source B 62 Source B N12 0 62 lt 30 lt Dest N12 1 29 lt MOV Move Source N11 N12 1 0 lt Dest N12 2 0 lt MOV Move Source N11 N12 0 0 lt Dest N11 N12 1 0 lt MOV Move Source N12 2 0 lt Dest N11 N12 0 0 lt ADD Add Source A 2 2 Source B N12 0 30 lt Dest N12 0 30 lt Q4 1 JMP gt 330 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C When the swap operation is complete copy the temp file to the designated WR TRANSFR file EQU COP 0002 Equal Copy File Source A N12 0 Source N11 0 30 lt Dest N14 0 Source B 62 Length 64 62 lt RET 0003 Return 0004 END PanelView Component HMI and EtherNet IP Communication Network Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 This example demonstrates reading and writing power monitor date time and other configuration parameters by using a PanelView Component HMI terminal the single el
3. Element Modbus Element Name Range No Address 0 Peak Demand W 0 0 999 9x10 1 Average Demand W 0 0 999 9x102 2 Load Factor W 0 100 0 3 Peak Demand VAR 0 0 999 9x102 4 Average Demand VAR 0 0 999 9x102 5 Load Factor VAR 0 100 0 6 Peak Demand VA 0 0 999 9x10 7 Average Demand VA 0 0 999 9x10 8 Load Factor VA 0 100 0 9 Peak Demand 0 0 999 9x10 10 Average Demand 0 0 999 9x10 11 Load Factor 0 100 0 12 Elapsed time 0 0 999 9x10 13 Ending month day year 0 123199 248 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Transient Analysis Configuration Read back Select Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No F43 Remote 1 0 BT 44 CIP Assy Inst 52 Write 53 Read No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M8 only Applies to Transient analysis metering results Transient Analysis Configuration Read back Select Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 DeviceNet unique write 32 768 32 767 0 Refer to DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier on identifier page 103 2 Capture 0 6 1 Refer to Transient Analysis Configuration on 3 Cycle WELT 1 page 180 4 Read back
4. Level 3 Native Optional Network DST Setpoint Min Max Event Basic ABI Sd Comm Comm Demand Time 1 n Log Log iri New Password Protocol Input Mode Enable Type Enable Disable Log Status Pree Demand Period Length Delay ee Broadcast Port Start Month Evaluat ion Mns Log ne Changes PT Secondary Of Demand Periods Baud options Time IP Addr Start Day High Limit CT Primary Forced Demand Delay Address see Chapter 4 World Time Zone Start Day Inst Low Limit CT Secondary es emand Type Format Time Set Interval Start Hour Pickup Del M Primary ie P Sale SNTP Addr 2 End Month Dropout Del A Secondary km Pis wi SNTP Addr 3 End Day Output Arion Nominal Sys Voltage Relay Control Source i 2 n Accumu Time Relay Pulse Scale mE Status Relay Pulse Width RMS Resolution RMS Averaging Frequency Averaging Date Format Date ime Relay State on Comms Loss KYZ State on Comms Loss 8 Watch Dog Action DM Scroll Rate Level 2 Energy Digits J H yp Display Display Program Uu Program 2 1 Configuration Status Commands N Configuration 5 4 sali mL mE See Config Catalog Number Force Relay __ 12 __ See Config Menu Accuracy Class Force KYZ s UN Menu WIN Number Clear Min Max Loo Hardware Revision Clear kWH tune Master Module FRN Clear kVARH Counter Device ID Clear kVAH Counter Selftest Status Clear Amp H Counter Code Flash Clear All Energy Counters RAM Clear S1 Counter Data Flash Clear S2 Counter NVRAM Restor
5. 1 Meets ANSI IEEE C37 90 1989 standards for trip duty 338 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 General Specifications Technical Specifications Appendix D Dielectric Withstand Control Power 2000V Voltage Inputs 2000V Current Inputs 2000V Status Inputs 500V Control Relays 1600V Terminal Blocks Power Supply and Voltage input 4 mm 12 AWG max Terminals 1 02 Nm 8 Ib in Torque 75 C 167 F or Higher Copper Wire only Relay KYZ outputs Current input 2 5 mm 14 AWG max 1 18 Nm 10 4 Ib in Torque terminals 75 C 167 F or Higher Copper Wire only Status inputs RS485 2 5 mm 14 AWG max 0 56 Nm 5 Ib in Torque RIO DNT When present 2 5 mm 14 AWG max 0 56 Nm 5 Ib in Torque Temperature Operating 20 60 C 40 140 F Cat No 1404 DM 1404 Mxxxx 000 0 55 C 32 131 F 1404 Mxxxx 232 RIO ENT CNT 1404 Mxxxx DNT Temperature Storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Humidity 5 95 Noncondensing Vibration 10 500 Hz 2 g Operational 0 012 in Shock 1 2 Sine Pulse 11 ms duration 30 g Operational and 30 g Nonoperational 1 Recommended Ring lug AMP part 320634 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 339 Appendix D Technical Specifications 340 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Appendix E Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Frequently Asked Questions Q C
6. CIP Assy Inst 75 76 No of Elements User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All except Remote 1 0 units Single Password Write Element Modbus Element Name Range Default No Address Value n 266 Comment On a write the correct password is required to change configuration data Ona read 1 is returned Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Single Parameter Read Parameters CSP File No Remote 1 0 BT CIP Assy Inst 80 102 No of Elements 1 each User Configurable No Data Type Floating point little endian fixed configuration or integer see listing Data Access Read only PM3000 Type DeviceNet units only Single Parameter Read CIP Assy Parameter Name Data Type Range Comment Instance 80 Ave L L Volts Float 0 0 999 9x102 81 L1 L2 Volts Float 0 0 999 9x102 82 L2 L3 Volts Float 0 0 999 9x102 83 L3 L1 Volts Float 0 0 999 9x102 84 L1 Amps Float 0 0 999 9x10 85 L2 Amps Float 0 0 999 9x107 86 L3 Amps Float 0 0 999 9x102 87 L4 Amps Float 0 0 999 9x10 88 Demand Power Float 0 0 999 9x102 89 Demand VARs Float 0 0 999 9x102 30 3 Ph PF Float 0 0 999 9x10 31 Ave Amps Float 0 0 999 9x10 92 Ave L N Volts Float 0 0 999 9x102 93 Frequency Float 0 40 75 999 94 Total Watts Fl
7. Configure this parameter to determine how the power monitor responds if an internal watchdog timeout has occurred This may occur due to extreme environmental condition or internal operational error Choices include the following e Halt Restart the firmware log an event stop metering and disable all functionality except display module and communication Continue Restart the firmware log an event and resume operation Default is Continue Default Qutput Behavior on Communication Loss Refer to Communication Loss Behavior on page 140 Network Demand Time Configuration The Ethernet Powermonitor 3000 unit supports demand period synchronization via the Ethernet network Demand period synchronization makes use of UDP User Datagram ProtocoD messaging a simplified low level protocol that supports broadcasts A power monitor may be configured as a Master or a Slave A Master may be configured to receive an end of interval EOD signal either from a dry contact connected to its Status Input 2 or via a Controller Command write to the Controller Command table see below When a Master receives an EOI input it broadcasts an EOI message to any units configured as Slaves 55 Chapter 3 56 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Ethernet units also support synchronization of their internal clocks from up to three SNTP servers at a configurable synchronization interval Since SNTP servers operate in UTC Universal Coordinated
8. Display module menus and parameter structure e Setup and configuration by using the display module e Data monitoring by using the display module e Issuing commands by using the display module Other power monitor features such as communication setpoint operations I O operations data logging oscillography harmonics sag swell detection load factor calculation and transient detection are covered later in this manual The power monitor performs calculations on scaled digital voltage and current values Signals connected to the voltage and current inputs are sampled and their instantaneous values are converted to digital values in an analog to digital A D converter section These values are scaled according to configured PT Primary PT Secondary CT Primary and CT Secondary parameters and evaluated according to the configured Wiring Mode parameter Metering results are available for display on the display module in the communication data tables and for use in setpoint programming and data logging The table on page 28 provides a summary of measurements produced in each Powermonitor 3000 unit and notes which measurements you may view by using the display module 27 Chapter3 X Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Summary of Measurements M4 M6 M8 py Measurement M5 e Current per phase and neutral e e e Averag
9. Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 263 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Time of Use Records Reactive Energy and Demand Parameters CSP File No F57 Remote 1 0 BT 52 CIP Assy Inst 73 No of Elements 12 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Time of Use Records Reactive Energy and Demand Element Modbus Element Name Range Units Comment No Address 0 32501 02 Off peak reactive 999 999 0 MVARh Refer to Reading Time of use Log Data on energy 999 399 page 158 1 32503 04 Off peak reactive 999 999 999 kVARh energy 999 999 999 2 32505 06 Off peak demand 0 0 999 9 x 10 VAR VARs 3 32507 08 Mid peak reactive 999 999 0 MVARh energy 999 999 0 4 32509 10 Mid peak reactive 999 999 999 kVARh energy 999 999 999 5 32511 12 Mid peak demand 0 0 9999 x 10 VAR VARs 6 32513 14 Peak reactive energy 999 999 0 MVARh 999 999 0 7 32515 16 Peak reactive energy 999 999 999 kVARh 939 999 999 8 32517 18 Peak demand VARs 0 0 999 9 x 10 VAR 9 32519 20 Record number 0 12 10 32521 22 Start date 000101 991231 YYMMDD Start month day for data stored in this record inclusive 11 33523 24 End date 000101 991231 YYMMDD End month day for data stored in this record inclusive 264 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Time of Use Recor
10. Pulsed Control Many electric energy meters provide a dry contact output that changes state at intervals determined by a metered parameter Pulsed control lets the power monitor emulate this function You may select the following options for the Control source parameter 1 Watt hours forward 2 Watt hours reverse 3 VAR hours forward 4 VAR hours reverse 5 VA hours 6 Ampere hours Set the Output width to the desired pulse duration in milliseconds Set this parameter to zero 0 if you want the output to toggle instead of pulse This operation emulates the KYZ operation of electromechanical energy meters For a two wire KYZ connection use only one side of the relay For a three wire KYZ connection use both sides of the Form C output In a two wire interface KY connection an output event occurs only when the output contact closes In a three wire connection an event occurs when either the KY or KZ contact closes Therefore twice as many output events occur in a three wire connection as in a two wire connection for the same number of relay transitions Calculate Output Scale Set the Output scale for the number of increments of the Control source parameter it takes to pulse or toggle the selected output Follow these steps to calculate the output scale 1 Determine the maximum value of the selected parameter expected in an hour period This is related to the feeder capacity For example a 480V 1200 A three phas
11. Refer to How to Clear or Preset Energy Counters by Using Communication on page 120 Increments by 1 32 767 rolls over to 0 211 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Selftest Diagnostic Results Parameters CSP File No N22 Remote 0 BT 36 CIP Assy Inst 23 No of Elements 2 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Selftest Diagnostic Results Element Modbus Element name Range Comment No Address 0 30601 Bulletin number 1404 1 30602 Series 0 8 0 A 1 B 2 30603 Overall status 0 2 OK 3 30604 Data Acquisition status 0 2 OK bit 0 overall status 0 pass 1 fail bit 1 reserved bit 2 data bus connection failure bit 3 address test failure 4 30605 Data FLASH status 0 2 OK 5 30606 Real time clock status 0 2 OK 6 30607 RTC NVRAM status 0 2 OK Non zero indicates corruption of nonvolatile memory This does not cause product to shutdown The error is cleared on a reset power cycle If this error is detected date time and energy values are reset 7 30608 Option communication status 0 OK or no optional communication present 8 30609 Display module status 0 OK or no DM connected 9 30610 Watchdog status 0 0K 10 30611 Code FLASH status 0 0K bit 0 overall status 0 pass 1 fail bit 1 boot code checksum failure bit 2 application code checksum failure bit 3 calibrat
12. S f Maximum Excursion p 0 Time s Setpoint Activated Setpoint Deactivated Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Setpoint Programming and Operation Chapter 5 Under Reverse Setpoint An under reverse setpoint is the mirror image of an under forward setpoint The magnitude and all limits are negative numbers An under reverse setpoint activates when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored defined by the Setpoint Type decreases below the Setpoint Low Limit in the negative direction and remains below the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay The setpoint releases when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored increases above the Setpoint High Limit and stays above the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay Under Reverse Setpoint Operation Setpoint Activated Setpoint Deactivated Time s 0 gt Maximum Excursion ry Setpoint High Limit D gt Setpoint Action Delay Mee Setpoint Low Limit lt Setpoint Release Delay 2Setpoint Parameter Value Y oe Equal Setpoint An equal setpoint activates when the monitored parameter equals the Setpoint High Limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay An equal setpoint releases when the monitored parameter does not equal the Setpoint High Limit for a period of time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay The Setpoint Low Limit is not used for equal and not equal set
13. Sample Applications 328 SBR 0000 Subroutine Perpare to swap words by copying source to N11 temp file Initialize the word counter N12 0 03 1 0001 LBL Perform this task until all the words have been swapped A size of 32 was selected to handle all power monitor files LES Less Than A B Source A N12 0 30 Source B 30 30 COP Copy File Source N10 0 Dest N11 0 Length 64 MOV Move Source 0 0 lt Dest N12 0 30 lt ADD Add Source A 1 1 Source B N12 0 30 Dest N12 1 29 lt MOV Move Source N11 N12 1 0 lt Dest N12 2 0 lt MOV Move Source N11 N12 0 0 lt Dest N11 N12 1 0 lt MOV Move Source N12 2 0 lt Dest N11 N12 0 0 lt ADD Add Source A 2 2 lt Source B N12 0 30 lt Dest N12 0 30 lt 03 1 C JMP gt Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C When the word swapping is complete transfer the results into F8 FLT DATA file EQU COP 0002 Equal Copy File Source A N12 0 Source N11 0 30 lt Dest F8 0 Source B 30 Length 32 30 lt RET 0003 Return 0004 CEND gt Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 329 Appendix C Sample Applications
14. Scope PM3000 RIO TEST Show E TagName v Vale E PM3K Date T HEN PM3K_Date HE PM3K Date PM3K_Date HE PM3K Date PM3K_Date PM3K_Date PM3K_Date PM3K_Date im E L E Es E IE CE Read Tine lE ni E E i Ii HH Set date ti H Set date ti H Set date ti HH Set date ti H Set date ti HH Set date ti HH Set date ti HH Set date ti 281 Appendix C Sample Applications Ladder Diagram Read clock from PM3K MSG 0 JE Type PLC5 Typed Read EN Message Control Read Time CDN 5 L CER gt Read_Time DN Read_clock_from_PM3K Mie UD Read Time ER Set time from CLX MSG 1 JE Type PLC5 Typed Write EN Message Control Set time CDN gt CER 5 Set_time DN Set time from CLX dL UD s p Set_time ER d s jc End Message Setup Dialogs The example uses PLC 5 Typed read and write message types The setup dialogs are similar to those found on page 107 and page 108 ControlNet and ControlLogix The fourth example reads and writes the power monitor date and time by using a ControlLogix controller and ControlNet communication Tags The example uses two ControlLogix tags as shown below The tags are IN
15. Transient Capture Data Points The results table contains 20 data points for optional DeviceNet communication or 50 data points for all other communication options Data points are numbered 1 20 or 1 50 in each block The block number ranges from 1 70 for the DeviceNet network and 1 28 for all other communication options The client calculates each data point s place in the transient capture by using the following formula N datapoint_capture N block 1 N datapoint this read Ndatapoint capture the sequence number of the data point in the capture channel Nblock the block number Ndatapoint_this_read the data point number 1 20 or 1 50 in the current read The total number of data points is 1400 Each data point is expressed in calibrated analog to digital A D converter counts with a resolution of 8192 13 bit w sign A client may calculate the primary side instantaneous voltage or current magnitude of each data point by using the following formula M max rms i 42 Mi E I ME i N e Maata max Mi instantaneous value of the voltage or current data point M max rms max rms magnitude 399 0 line to neutral volts for channels 1 3 and 5 691 1 line to line volts for channels 1 3 and 5 10 6 amperes for channels 2 4 6 and 7 Rmax maximum resolution 8192 for 13 bit w sign N PT or CT ratio PT or CT primary PT or CT secondary Maata Value of the data point from Transient Capture Results Parameters
16. e RIO Last Rack If you are using a PLC 2 based system set this flag for the highest numbered rack group addressed device on the channel Range 0 or 1 default 0 e RIO Communication Rate Sets the communication rate Range 57 6 115 or 230 Kbps default 57 6 All devices on the channel must be set to the same communication rate TIP For a logical rack address of 63 decimal do not use group number 2 4 or 6 Power monitor logical rack addresses are expressed in decimal You may need to convert addresses to octal range 0 77 for some PLC applications Optional Remote 1 0 Port Configuration Summary Parameter Description Range Default User Setting RIO Rack Logical rack address 0 63 decimal 1 Address as configured in the scanner RIO Group Logical group number 0 1st quarter 0 1 quarter Number of quarter rack 2 pnd quarter 4 3 quarter 6 4 quarter RIO Last Rack Indicates 0 No 0 No highest numbered Yes logical rack group address PLC 2 based systems only RIO Specifies the remote 0 57 6 Kbps 0 57 6 Kbps Communication 1 0 communication 12115 Kbps Rate rate 2 230 Kbps Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Optional DeviceNet Communication Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in DNT are equipped with an optional DeviceNet communication port in addition to the native port Bot
17. gt 8 00 8 59 gt 9 00 9 59 2E x lt x lt x lt c Configuring the Time of use Log Perform a table write to the Time of Use Register Configuration table to set up the user selectable options This read write table of 10 integer elements contains the following configuration and read back selection parameters e Password required for configuration Use a valid password or 1 for read back select Range 0 9999 default 0 returns 1 e Record to read back selects the record to be returned in the next read of the Tables Time of Use Records Real Energy and Demand Time of Use Records Reactive Energy and Demand and Time of Use Records Apparent Energy and Demand Range 0 12 default 0 e Write command stores record 0 to record 1 and shifts remaining records down Range 0 no action 1 execute write command default 0 e Log day selects the day of the month to automatically store the in process record and shift the remaining records down Range 0 to 31 0 disables automatic store 1 28 select the day of month 29 31 select last day of month e Off peak day selects day s of week during which all hours are off peak Bitfield bit 0 Sunday bit 1 Monday and so on Range 0 127 0 FF Hex default 65 41 Hex Saturday and Sunday e Mid peak AM selects morning mid peak time of use hours Bitfield range 0 4095 0 to OFFF hex See
18. r Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO D To be retried NR 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Continuous Run COT n For FR 0 Message done DN Messaye Trorrsmilliry ST p Message Enabled EN D Waiting lor Queue Space U o Error Coda Hex 0 Error Description No errors Target Device Message Tien E Data T able Address E Write Message Setup F IMSG N11 0 14 Elements olx This Controller Communication Command 500CPU Write Data Table Address N211 0 Size in Elements Channel Local Node Addr dec Local Nemote cota r Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO 1 To be retried NR o Awaiting Execution EW 0 Continuous Run COT n Front FRI Message done DN o Messaye Trorrsiilliryy ST p Message Enabled EN 0 Waiting lor Queue Space U o Error Code Hex 37 Error Description Message limedout in local processor Target Device Message Timana E Data T able Address PLC 5 Controller by Using Remote 1 0 The second example also reads and writes the power monitor date and time but uses a PLC 5 controller and remote I O In this example a power monitor has a logical address of Rack 1 Group 0 The PLC 5 data table files used are the same as in the previous example The main difference is t
19. 1 1 CIP Assy Inst 10 Write 11 Read No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Native Communication Configuration Element Modbus Element name Range Units Default Comment No Address Value 0 40301 Password 0 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 40302 Protocol 0 3 0 Communication protocol for the native communication port 0 DF1 half duplex slave 1 Modbus RTU slave 2 Auto Sense Selects the protocol based on the incoming communication packets 3 DF full duplex 2 40303 Delay 0 15 ams 2 Specifies the delay before responding to an external request 10ms useful with slow external devices such as RF modems 3 40304 Baud rate 0 6 3 0 1 2 Kbps 122 Kbps 2 4 8 Kbps 3 9 6 Kbps 4 192 Kbps 5 38 4 Kbps 6 57 6 Kbps 4 40305 Device address 1 247 1 Identifies the device on a multi drop network DF1 master typically uses 0 The broadcast address is 255 5 40306 Data format 0 2 0 Parity number of data bits number of stop bits 0 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 1 Odd parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 2 Even parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 6 40307 Inter Character 0 6553 ms 0 Specifies the minimum delay between characters that Timeout indicates the end of a message packet 0 3 5 character times 7 40308 Error checking 0 1 0
20. 900s 10 Predicted Demand Type Instantaneous Instantaneous 1st Order 2nd Order KYZ Control Source 0 None 5 Vah 7 Setpoint 1 Wh Forward 6 Ah 2 Wh Reverse 7 Setpoint 3 VARh Forward 8 Comms 4 VARh Reverse KYZ Pulse Output Scale 1 30000 10 KYZ Pulse Output Width 0 40 2000 0 Relay Control Source Same as KYZ 7 Setpoint 5 Relay Pulse Output Scale 1 30000 10 Relay Pulse Output Width 0 40 2000 100 RMS Resolution Nominal High High S RMS Averaging On Off On S Frequency Averaging On Off On s Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY lt Date Year 1998 2097 1998 Date Month 1 12 1 Date Day 1 31 1 Time Hour 0 23 0 Time Minutes 0 59 0 Time Seconds 0 59 0 Default relay state on comms loss 0 Last state resume 2 De energize resume 0 Default KYZ state on comms loss 1 Last state freeze 3 De energize freeze 0 Wdog action 0 Halt 0 Halt 1 Continue Display Module Scroll Speed Fast Slow Fast Energy counter rollover point 4 15 digits 15 Metering Result Set M8 only 0 All results 0 All results 1 Transducer mode 2 Energy meter mode f Me ering result set parameter may only be configured by using communication 2 Factory default for RMS Resolution is Nominal for the M4 and High for the M5 M6 and M8 Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 51 Chapter 3 52 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Demand Setup You may configure the demand perio
21. Accum 55 SQO 0003 Sequencer Output 15 File 1 10 0 1747 SDN Mask OFFFFh Dest N9 0 Control R6 0 Length 7 Position 6 lt Dest MO 1 224 Length 6 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 311 Appendix C Sample Applications Il PT 0004 Compute 15 Dest M0 1 224 1747 SDN Expression M1 1 224 AND 256 0004h OP Copy File Source M1 1 224 Dest amp N11 1 Length 32 Compute Dest N11 0 25 Expression Nl11 1 256 Read the Voltage Curent dataa aa EQU OP 0005 Equal Copy File EQU 0006 Equal Source N11 0 25 Source B 21 21 312 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C 0007 0008 Equal Source A N11 0 25 Source B 23 23 EQU 0009 Equal Source N11 0 25 Source B 24 24 0010 EQU OP 0011 Equal Copy File Source A N11 0 Source amp H11 4 25 Dest amp H36 1 Source B 26 Length 27 26 0012 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 313 Appendix C Sample Applications User configured Data Table Setup by Using ControlLogix and EtherNet IP Networks 314 This example shows a ladder program designed to customize the User configured Data Table in a power monitor by using a ControlLogix controller via its EtherNet IP Bridge 1756 ENET B Use of the user configured data table to consolidate parameters from different power monitor data tables can increase the efficiency of communication The fo
22. Length 26 MSG Type PLC 5 Typed Read EN Message Control msgReadOld E CDN LER 5 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C The message configuration for the ReadOld message is shown below Message Configuration msgReadOld x Configuration Communication Tag l Message Type PLC5 Typed Read bd Source Element n 30 0 Number Of Elements p a Destination Tag oo New Tag O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 26 Error Code I Timed Out Extended Error Code Cancel y Help This rung inserts a brief time delay before enabling the WriteNew message instruction Start msgReadOld DN TON 1 4 E 4 F EN Timer On Delay Timer Timer DN2 Preset 100 Accum 0 After clearing the flags from the previous write this rung performs a data table write to transfer the selected user configured data table setup to the Powermonitor 3000 unit If the number of paramaters in the User Configurable Data Table is changed the Powermonitor 3000 unit resets Timer1 DN Oneshot_2 Success Failed J E ons U T MSG Type PLC 5 Typed Write EN Message Control msgWriteNew E lt DNy L C ER gt msgWriteNew DN Counter1 CU TON 1E iE Timer On Del E imer On Delay Timer Timer2 DN2 Preset 4000 Accum 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 20
23. November 2009 277 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name Comment No 273 V1 96 IEEE THD Refer to Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More Parameters 274 I1 96 IEEE THD 215 V2 IEEE THD 276 I2 96 IEEE THD 27 V3 IEEE THD 278 I3 96 IEEE THD 279 14 IEEE THD 280 V1 IEC THD DIN 281 I1 96 IEC THD DIN 282 V2 IEC THD DIN 283 I2 96 IEC THD DIN 284 V3 IEC THD DIN 285 I3 IEC THD DIN 286 I4 96 IEC THD DIN 287 V1 Crest Factor 288 I1 Crest Factor 289 V2 Crest Factor 290 I2 Crest Factor 291 V3 Crest Factor 292 3 Crest Factor 293 14 Crest Factor 294 THD amp Crest iteration 295 DeviceNet instance 1 data type Referto User configured Table Setup Parameters 296 Avg IEEE THD V Referto Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More Parameters 297 Avg IEEE THD 298 Avg IEC THD V 299 Avg IEC THD 300 Avg Crest Factor V 301 Avg Crest Factor 278 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Appendix B Catalog Number Explanation Master Module 1404 M4 05 A ENT 02 Bulletin Number 1404 Power Monitoring and Management Products Type of Device M4 Master module with three phase metering pulse input conversion setpoints 1 0 and data logging M5 M4 functionality firmware
24. 1231 9 30819 20 sec hsec 0000 2359 10 30821 22 0000 5999 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 22 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Event Log Configuration Read back Record Select Parameters CSP File No N28 Remote 1 0 BT 9 CIP Assy Inst 32 Write 33 Read No of Elements 6 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Applies to Event Log Results Parameters on page 229 Event Log Configuration Read back Record Select Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 41001 Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 41002 DeviceNet unique write identifier 32 768 32 767 0 Refer to DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier on page 103 2 41003 Read back mode 0 6 2 Refer to Configuring the Event Log by Using 3 41004 Enable disable logging status 0 1 0 ammini at page TA input changes 4 41005 events in the event log 1 50 M4 M5 1 100 M6 M8 5 41006 Enable disable logging of 0 1 1 time date set 228 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Event Log Results Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No N29 Remote 1 0 BT 21 CIP Assy Inst 34 No of Elements 14 17 or 18 se
25. 15 40816 Parameter 6 selection 16 40817 Parameter 7 selection 17 40818 Parameter 8 selection 220 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select Element Modbus Element Name Range No Address 18 40819 Parameter 9 selection 0 301 19 40820 Parameter 10 selection 20 40821 Parameter 11 selection 21 40822 Parameter 12 selection 22 40823 Parameter 13 selection 23 40824 Parameter 14 selection 24 40825 Parameter 15 selection 25 40826 Parameter 16 selection Default Value 0 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Comment For DeviceNet Powermonitor units you may configure parameters 9 16 but the Trend Log Results Parameters tabke returns only the first eight parameters Trend Log Results Parameters CSP File No F25 Remote 1 0 BT 48 CIP Assy Inst 28 No of Elements 14 DeviceNet network only 22 All other communication types User Configurable Yes Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Trend Log Results Element Modbus Element Name Range Comment No Address 0 30701 02 Reserved 0 Returns 0 1 30703 04 Internal Identifier 0 15 Increment from 1 15 for each record rolls to 0 2 30705 06 Timestamp Year 1998 2097 Date and time record was recorded Refer to Expressing Data in 3 30707
26. Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Write Error Status Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 31101 File instance or BT Identifies data table written to last value depends on comms number type For Modbus starting address of table written to last 1 31102 Offending Element 1 Last write was successful 0 26 first unacceptable element of unsuccessful write For Remote 1 0 Only 0 Last write was successful 1 27 First unacceptable word of unsuccessful write For Modbus Only 1 Last write was successful 40 001 42 001 first unacceptable address of unsuccessful write 236 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Harmonic Analysis Configuration Read back Select Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No N33 Remote 1 0 BT 14 CIP Assy Inst 39 Write 40 Read No of Elements 9 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type See table Applies to Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More Parameters on page 238 All models Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 1 21 Parameters on page 239 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 41 Parameters on page 240 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 20 Parameters on page 241 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 40 Parameters on page 242 M6 amp M8 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 43 63 Parameters
27. EtherNet IP and R W 0 1 2 I elelo i 191 ControlNet 1 0 Messaging Parameters Discrete Data Parameters R N9 10 3 30001 6 ejlele 193 Basic Device Configuration Parameters RAN F10 20 4 5 40001 8 or 98 e e e 194 Date and Time Parameters RAN N11 12 6 7 40101 8 ejlele 195 Advanced Device Configuration Parameters R W N12 26 8 9 40201 26 e o o 196 Native Communication Configuration Parameters R W N13 11 10 111 40301 o9 ejlele 198 Optional Communication Configuration Parameters R W N14 24 243 40401 20 e o o 198 Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result R F15 38 14 30101 4 e jeje 205 Parameters Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results R FI6 27 15 30201 1 e jeje 206 Parameters Metering Power Results Parameters R F7 31 6 30301 3 e o o 207 Metering Demand Results Parameters R F18 25 7 30401 10 e o o 208 Metering Power Factor Results Parameters R F19 33 8 30501 13 e o o 209 Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results R W N20 29 9 20 40501 23 e jeje 210 Parameters Metering Reactive Energy and Amp hour Results RAV N21 30 21 22 40601 23 e jeje 211 Parameters Selftest Diagnostic Results Parameters R N22 36 23 30601 27 ejlele 212 DF1 PCCC Diagnostic Status Reply Parameters R 5 e o o 213 Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status R W e N23 22 24 25 40701 16 e o o 215 Parameters Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select R W N24 34 26 27 40801 26 e jeje 220 Parameters Trend Log Results Parameters
28. Event Log Data Logging Its inherent data logging capability makes the power monitor a versatile component in a number of power and energy applications Cost allocation applications can read billing variables like energy usage and demand from the configurable Trend Log making the accuracy of reports less dependent on a continuous network connection The Event Log captures time stamped records of important power system occurrences that can be aligned with corresponding production or environmental effects to better understand and optimize your energy use and costs This chapter describes in detail the data logging functions in the power monitor The Event Log contains records stored in nonvolatile memory of the 50 M4 and M5 or 100 M6 and M8 most recent events that occurred in the power monitor Event records may include the following e changes in the unit configuration e setpoint activation and release e relay or KYZ output forcing e status input change of state e power up and power down e clearing or presetting of an energy counter e setting the unit time and date e clearing of the trend or min max log e clearing of setpoint timers detection of a sag swell or transient Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 143 Chapter 7 Data Logging Event Codes Event Log Configuration Options There are two options in the Event Log setup e You may choose to log or ignore ignore is default status input chan
29. Execute transaction block Use this command first to start the explicit message e 4 hex Delete transaction from response queue Use this command after you copy the response from the scanner to remove the response from the scanner and enable further explicit messages Word 1 contains the DeviceNet scanner port number and the transaction body size in bytes The SLC 500 scanner module uses only port 0 a PLC 5 DeviceNet scanner module has two ports 0 and 1 For a read request the transaction body size is 3 words therefore 6 bytes See the Explicit Messaging table on page 98 for more information For a write the body size is the data size in bytes plus the 6 byte path class instance attribute Word 2 contains the DeviceNet service code and the MAC ID or node number of the server device in this case the power monitor Valid service codes for use on Class 4 assembly instances include the following e OE hesx 14 decimal Get Attribute Single Requests a read of the entire assembly instance defined in the transaction body e 10 hex 16 decimal Set Attribute Single Writes the data contained in the message to the assembly instance defined in the transaction body TIP A convenient way to build Words 0 1 and 2 is to multiply the high byte value by 256 and add the low byte value using decimal values for each parameter Example TXID 121 Command 1 Word 0 121 256 1 30977 Words 3 5 comprise the DeviceNet path
30. IEEE THD Total harmonic distortion in per cent based on the IEEE definition Range 0 0 1000 0 e IEC THD DIN Total harmonic distortion in per cent based on the IEC definition Range 0 0 1000 0 e Crest factor Range 0 10 e THD amp Crest iteration each new calculation increments by one from 0 32 767 and rolls back to 0 TIP The remaining elements are reserved in the M4 and M5 models and return values of 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 e TIF Telephone influence factor Range 0 0 999 9 107 e K factor Range 0 0 999 9 1074 e IEEE 519 TDD Total demand distortion Range 0 0 999 9 10 e EEE 519 Pass fail 1 unknown 0 fail 1 pass e FFT iteration each new FFT calculation used in the previous four parameters increments by one from 0 32 767 and rolls back to 0 A data client may determine the relative freshness of data by comparing the THD amp crest iteration or FFT iteration parameters in repeated reads of this table Reading Individual Harmonic Values The M6 and M8 models provide several data tables containing individual harmonic results Individual harmonic value data is not available via Modbus communication Write to the Harmonic Analysis Configuration Read back Select table to select the Read back mode data type magnitude or distortion per cent and or channel number of harmonic data A data clien
31. M4 M M Element Name Range No Address M5 6 8 0 31201 02 e e e Channel number 1 9 1 31203 04 e e e IEEE THD 0 0 1000 0 2 31205 06 e e e IEC thd DIN 0 0 1000 0 3 31207 08 e e e Crest Factor 0 0 10 0 4 31209 10 e e e THD amp Crest iteration 0 32 767 5 31211 12 e Reserved 0 e e EL 0 0 999 9x107 6 31213 14 e Reserved 0 e K Factor 0 0 999 9x107 7 31215 16 e Reserved 0 e o IEEE 519 TDD 0 0 999 9x107 8 31217 18 e Reserved 0 e e EEE 519 Pass Fail 1 1 9 31219 20 e Reserved 0 e e FFT iteration 0 32 767 238 Comment Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on page 172 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 1 21 Parameters CSP File No F35 Remote 1 0 BT 39 CIP Assy Inst 42 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 1 21 Element Modbus Element Name Range Comment No Address 0 Channel returned Tiset Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on page 172 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0 1 2 2 13 Harmonic Fundamental 0 0 3 3 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 4 i 5 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x1024 5 7 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 6 i g Harmonic 0 0 999 9x1
32. MicroLogix controller and Modbus communication network 301 PLC 5 controller using Remote 1 0 285 RSLinx DDE OPC and MicroSoft Excel 291 SLC 500 controller and RS 485 communication 282 use OPC for single element password write 295 T theory of setpoint operation 123 tif 168 time of use 156 configuring the log 157 hours selection 156 reading the log 158 transient analysis configuration 190 transient detection metering and capture 179 clear command 185 configuration 180 reading capture data 182 reading metering data 181 U under reverse setpoint 127 underforward setpoint 126 user configured data table setup using ControlLogix and EtherNet IP 314 sample program operation 314 V viewing metered data 29 voltage current and frequency results 30 W writing data 83 writing setpoint configuration using comms 134 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and applicationnotes samplecodeandlinkstosoftwareservice packs andaMySupportfeaturethatyoucancustomizetomakethe best use of these tools Foranadditionalleveloftechnical phone supportfor installation configuration and troubleshooting we offerTechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or
33. Password or 1 Element 0 Readback select controls index pointer to large data structure Segment or Channel 1 Data selects Segment 3 Readback Source Location Select Table Segment or Channel 1 2 Results Table Client verifies 3 correct data segment or channel n Large data structure e g log oscillogram etc Refer to Chapter 5 Setpoint Programming and Operation Chapter 7 Data Logging and Chapter 8 Advanced Features for details of indexed mode data reads for each of these functions Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 89 Chapter4 Communication Data Messaging application Considerations 90 1 0 Type Communication Powermonitor 3000 units with optional remote I O EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet communication provide I O type implicit messaging Remote I O units emulate a logical quarter rack on the I O channel The corresponding two word output and input image table elements are automatically scanned by the I O scanner and the data points they contain are available for use in the logic program of the controller associated with the I O scanner In DeviceNet units Instances 1 and 2 comprise the DeviceNet polled change of state or cyclic connections The default input table contains 6 integer typed elements and the output table contains two integer typed elements You may configure instance 1 Refer to the User configured I O Table discussion on page
34. Projected Demand Amps 0 0 999 9x102 Refer to Projected Demand Calculation on 5 30411 12 Projected Demand W Watts 0 0 999 9x102 mr 6 30413 14 Projected Demand VAR VAR 0 0 999 9x102 7 30415 16 Projected Demand VA VA 0 0 999 9x102 8 30417 18 Elapsed demand period time Minutes Q 9 999 9x102 The a elapsed within the current demand period 9 30419 20 Metering iteration 0 32 767 Increments by 1 32 767 rolls over to 0 208 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Metering Power Factor Results Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No F19 Remote 1 0 BT 33 CIP Assy Inst 18 No of Elements 13 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Metering Power Factor Results Element Modbus Element name Units Range Comment No Address 0 30501 02 L1 True Power Factor Percent 100 100 Ratio between power and apparent power 1 30503 04 L2 True Power Factor 100 100 jd 2 30505 06 13 True Power Factor 100 100 3 30507 08 Three phase True PF 100 100 4 30509 10 L1 Displacement Power Factor 100 100 Cosine of the phase angle between the fundamental 5 30511 12 L2 Displacement Power Factor 100 100 dn current 6 30513 14 L3 Displacement Power Factor 100 100 Lag 7 30515 16 Three p
35. e Trigger position data point corresponding with the trigger position See below Oscillograph data points See below 162 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 The data client sets up the read back configuration with a table write to the Oscillograph Configuration Read back Data Select table the content of which is described above As with other indexed reads DeviceNet and Ethernet optional communication support only manual increment read back mode so that the client must write a read back select message before each read of the results table For all other communication options auto increment all channels or auto increment current channel read back mode provides the highest communication throughput Waveform Data Points The results table contains 20 data points for optional DeviceNet communication or 50 data points for all other communication options Data points are numbered 1 20 or 1 50 in each read The client calculates each data point s place in the waveform by using the following formula N datapoint_oscillogram N block l N datapoint this read Ndatapoint_oscillogram the sequence number of the data point in the oscillogram channel Nolock the block number Naatapoint this read the data point number 1 20 or 1 50 in the current read The total number of data points is 4600 for capture type 0 1 and 2 and 9200 for
36. increases beyond the Setpoint High Limit in the negative direction and remains over the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay The setpoint releases when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored decreases below the Setpoint Low Limit and stays below the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay Over Reverse Setpoint Operation Setpoint Activated Setpoint Deactivated Time s gt lt Setpoint gt Setpoint gt Setpoint Action Delay Release Delay Release Delay E V Setpoint Action Delay 125 Chapter 5 126 Setpoint Programming and Operation Parameter Value Setpoint High Limit Under Forward Setpoint An under forward setpoint is similar to an over forward setpoint except the Setpoint High Limit and the Setpoint Low Limit are reversed An under forward setpoint activates when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored defined by the Setpoint Type decreases below the Setpoint Low Limit and remains below the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay The setpoint releases when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored increases above the Setpoint High Limit and stays above the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay Under Forward Setpoint Operation gt Setpoint lt Setpoint Release W N Release Delay of Pi gt Setpoint Action Delay Setpoint Low Limit uui a ucc
37. ler d eic 642k Ok FES OE ERES CHEER RS 280 Appendix C Iniroduct n MR rmn 281 System Clock Sample Applications 282 Multiple Data Table Reads by Using DeviceNet 305 User configured Data Table Setup by Using ControlLogix and EtherNet IP Networks 314 Communicating with a SLC 5 05 1747 L552 Controller and ControlNet Scanner 1747 SCNR Unscheduled IMeSSa e TTC oc quif aede ert Nest te ass doa tones Ge Metas de es oe m 320 PanelView Component HMI and EtherNet IP Communication Network 2 cae pw Rau Rex Vae ata d ams 331 Appendix D Product Approvals 2 7124 nx pP SEX ppPaqddw des 335 Technical Specifications 29 2 59 ed OS Ter acce e 337 Appendix E TIC ee ee ee ae ee ee ee ee ee eee eee 341 Glossary Index Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Using This User Manual Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Preface You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product What This User Manual Contains Review the table below to familiarize yourself with the topics contained in this User Manual For information about Safety Refer to Chapter 1 Product Description Communication Options 2 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Metering Functionality Display Module Functionality Configuration by Using the Display Module Meter
38. voltage current and frequency results 30 metering update rate 60 min max log 153 accessing using display module 154 interfacing using communications 154 Modbus 64 Modbus RTU slave protocol 92 multiple data table reads using DeviceNet 305 explicit message transfer setup 305 SLC 500 sequencer operation 308 network demand and time configuration 55 broadcast port 56 controller command 57 input mode 56 SNTP address 2 57 SNTP address 3 57 time IP address 56 time set interval 56 world time zone 56 no control operation 140 not equal setpoint 128 0 operation editing a digital parameter 43 oscillography 159 configuring 160 reading data 162 other precautions 12 over forward setpoint 124 over reverse setpoint 125 P PanelView Component HMI and EtherNet IP Communication Network 331 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Index performance features 16 power factor results 33 power results 32 power up 42 Powermonitor 3000 operations 27 Powermonitor 3000 web access 112 product approvals 335 ANSI IEEE tested 337 CE certification 336 ControlNet conformance testing 335 EMC directive 336 EtherNet IP conformance testing 335 IEC529 NEMA UL 508 336 low voltage directive 336 UL CUL 336 product description 13 projected demand calculation 36 first order projection 37 instantaneous 37 second order projection 37 pulsed control 138 reading harmonic analysis data 172 reading individual harmonic values 173 reading time o
39. 0 Data Table Address Message Enabled EN 0 Local Remote MultiHop Routing Information File Rl RI11 Error Error Code Hex 0 No errors Eror Description 4 MSG MG100 2 1 Elements Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To Address Typ This MicroLogie Channel 1 EtheiNet IP Device st 10 90 172 51 300 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C MicroLogix Controller and Modbus Communication Network This example reads and writes the power monitor date and time table by using the MicroLogix 1400 controller using serial RS485 communications and the Modbus RTU protocol Refer to the Powermonitor 3000 Installation Instructions publication 1404 INOO7 for serial communications wiring Serial Port Setup Either MicroLogix 1400 controller serial port may be configured as Modbus master This example uses Channel 2 which is a 9 pin D Shell RS 232 connector Powermonitor 3000 native port configuration Modbus RTU 9600 baud node address 1 CRC MicroLogix 1400 Port Configuration Channel Configuration General Channel O Channel 1 Channel 2 Driver Baud Parity NONE gt Stop Bits 1 Dala Bits 8 Protocol Control Control Line No Handshaking x InterChar Timeout x1 ms jO Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms jo Care Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 301 Appendix C Sample Applications Data Tables
40. 0 1 ane Reserved 0 3 224 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 4 i 24 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 5 i 26 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 6 28 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 7 30 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 8 j 32 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 3 i 34 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x1022 10 f 36 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 11 38 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 12 40 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 13 FFT iteration 0 32 767 242 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Oscillograph Configuration Read back Data Select Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No Remote 1 0 BT CIP Assy Inst 46 Write 47 Read No of Elements User Configurable Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Applies to Oscillograph Results Parameters Oscillograph Configuration Read back Data Select Element Modbus_ Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 Capture No 0 8 M6 1 Refer to Configuring Oscillography on page 160 0 2 M8 2 Channel No T2 1 3 Block No See page 161 1 4 Read back mode 0 2 0 5 Clear trigger command 0 10 0 6 Capture type 1 5 0 7 Pre trigger 0 100 90 8 Reserved 0 0 9 Capture clear status 0 255 10 Capture ready status 0 255 Publication 14
41. 0 16 32317 17 32318 Original model 0 9 The model as it was originally built 4 M4 5 M5 18 32319 Current model Differs from Original model if field upgraded 258 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Catalog Number and WIN Element Modbus No Address 19 32320 20 32321 21 32322 22 32323 23 32324 24 32325 25 32326 26 32327 2 32328 28 32329 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Element Name Reserved Range Comment Returns 0 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A 259 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Network Demand Sync and Time Configuration Parameters CSP File No N52 Remote 1 0 BT CIP Assy Inst 65 66 No of Elements 20 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type Ethernet Network Demand Sync and Time Configuration Element Modbus Parameter Name Range Default Description No Address Value 0 41901 Password 0 9999 0 On a write the correct password is required to change configuration data On a read 1 is returned 1 41902 Input mode 0 3 3 Refer to Network Demand Time Configuration on 2 41903 Broadcast port number 300 300 HRS 400 3 41904 SNTP IP address 1 octet1 0 255 0 4 41905 SNTP IP address 1 octet 2 5 41906 SNTP IP address 1 octet 3 6 41907 SNTP I
42. 0 0001h Master module code flash status bit 1 0002h Master module data flash status bit 2 0004h Master module RAM Status bit 3 0008h Reserved for factory use bit 4 0010h Master module NVRAM status bit 5 0020h Master module data acquisition status bit 6 0040h Master module real time clock status bit 7 0080h Reserved for factory use bit 8 0100h Reserved for factory use bit 9 0200h Display module status bit 10 0400h Master module watchdog timer status bit 11 0800h Master module optional communication status bit 12 15 1000h 8000h Reserved for factory use 230 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 List of Event Types Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Applies to Event Log Results Parameters on page 229 PM3000 Type See table List of Event Types Event M4 M M Event Type Event Command Comment Code M5 6 8 Code 0 e e No event 0 The log starts with no events recorded 1 e e e Setpoint triggered Setpoint Number A setpoint activated 2 e e e Setpoint released A previously active setpoint released 3 e e Relay force energized Relay Number 1 Form C relay 2 KYZ 4 e e Relay force de energized 5 e e e Relay force released 6 e e e Status input set Status Input Number 7 e je e Status input cleared 8 e e e kWh counter set or cleared 1 Records command action 8 e e e kVARh counter set o
43. 0 CRC 1 BCC 8 40309 Reserved 0 0 Returns 0 g 40310 1 The default address is the Device ID which is factory assigned and is found on the label on the side of the master module The device ID is incremented for each device 198 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Optional Communication Configuration Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No N14 Remote 1 0 BT 24 CIP Assy Inst 12 Write 13 Read No of Elements 20 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All TIP Select the table that applies to your Powermontior 3000 unit Ethernet Element Modbus Element name Range Units Default Comment No Address Value 0 40401 Password 0 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 40402 IP address byte a 0 255 192 Format aaa bbb ccc ddd Static IP address 2 40403 IP address byte b 168 of this device for example 130 151 32 86 If connected to a network IP address must 3 40404 IP address byte c 254 be unique 255 255 255 255 is not permitted 4 40405 IP address byte d Device ID Factory assigned device ID 5 40406 Subnet mask byte a 0 255 255 Format aaa bbb ccc ddd 6 40407 Subnet mask byte b 255 7 40408 Subnet mask byte c 0 8 40409 Subnet mask byte d 0 9 40410 Gateway IP address byte a 0
44. 11 20 Oscillograph Data Point 12 21 Oscillograph Data Point 13 22 Oscillograph Data Point 14 23 Oscillograph Data Point 15 24 Oscillograph Data Point 16 25 Oscillograph Data Point 17 26 Oscillograph Data Point 18 2 Oscillograph Data Point 19 28 Oscillograph Data Point 20 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Appendix A 245 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Oscillograph Results Element Modbus Element Name Range No Address 29 Oscillograph Data Point 21 30 Oscillograph Data Point 22 31 Oscillograph Data Point 23 32 Oscillograph Data Point 24 33 Oscillograph Data Point 25 34 Oscillograph Data Point 26 35 Oscillograph Data Point 27 36 Oscillograph Data Point 28 37 Oscillograph Data Point 29 38 Oscillograph Data Point 30 39 Oscillograph Data Point 31 40 Oscillograph Data Point 32 41 Oscillograph Data Point 33 42 Oscillograph Data Point 34 43 Oscillograph Data Point 35 44 Oscillograph Data Point 36 45 Oscillograph Data Point 37 46 Oscillograph Data Point 38 47 Oscillograph Data Point 39 48 Oscillograph Data Point 40 49 Oscillograph Data Point 41 50 Oscillograph Data Point 42 51 Oscillograph Data Point 43 52 Oscillograph Data Point 44 53 Oscillograph Data Point 45 54 Oscillograph Data Point 46 55 Oscillograph Data Point 47 56 Oscillograph Data Point 48 57 Oscillograp
45. 255 128 IP address of the gateway on this subnet 10 40411 Gateway IP address byte b 1 used to route messages to other subnets wide area networking 1 40412 Gateway IP address byte c 1 2 40413 Gateway IP address byte d 1 3 40414 Protocol selection 0 2 0 0 2 CIP 1 2 CSP 2 CIP CSP 4 40415 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 15 40416 6 40417 7 40418 8 40419 9 40420 1 Master module version 4 or later Ethernet firmware version 3 or later Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 199 Appendix A ControlNet Element No 0 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Modbus Address 40401 Element name Password 0 9999 Units Default Value 0 Comment Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 40402 MAC ID 0 99 99 On a write sets MAC ID node address of Powermonitor 3000 unit on ControlNet network 40403 40404 40405 40406 40407 40408 40409 oO CO N OD of A wy N 40410 4041 LI 4041 4041 4041 4041 4041 4041 4041 oO CO N Dm oy A wy N 4041 N N N N co co N o o1 A c N 200 40420 Reserved Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Remote 1 0 Element Mod
46. 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 13 7 14 Index at trigger the value of the transient index at the time of the capture Range 999 0 10 999 0 10 e Voltage and Current trigger thresholds at the time of the transient capture Range 0 0 999 0 10 e Capture ID unique identifier that increments by 1 s to 30 000 and then rolls over to 0 Read this data table by using an indexed read method Select the Read back Mode Capture and Cycle by writing to the Transient Analysis Configuration Read back Select table Reading Transient Capture Data The data client sets up the read back configuration with a table write to the Transient Capture Clear Read back Data Select Transient capture data is not available via Modbus communication This read write table of 13 integer elements contains the following e Password required for Clear command use 1 for read back selections DeviceNet unique write identifier e Capture number selects one of six captures or returns the last capture number selected Range 0 most recent capture initiated via communication 1 6 capture 1 6 default 1 e Channel number selects a channel number or returns the last channel number selected Range 1 V1 2 I1 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 I3 7 I4 default 1 e Block number selects a data block for the next read or returns the last block selected Range depends on communication type See below Default 1 e Read back mode
47. 38 4 Kbps 57 6 Kbps RS 485 Address Uniquely identifies the 1 247 Unit ID number Powermonitor device on a multi drop network Data Format Data bits Stop bits 8 1 none 8 1 none Parity 8 1 even 8 1 odd Inter Character Mimimum delay 0 6553ms 0 23 5 Timeout between characters that character times indicates end of Modbus message packet Error Checking BCC CRC CRC Optional RS 232 Communication Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in 232 are equipped with an optional RS 232 serial port in addition to the native port These units are set up at the factory to auto sense the protocol used by the initiator or master device on the network The configuration parameters are the same as the native RS 485 port with the following exception Flow Control Enables or disables hardware handshaking Default disabled 65 Chapter 4 66 Communication The RS 232 communication standard supports point to point communication between TWO stations or nodes with a maximum cable length of 15 24 m 50 0 fD You may not use the optional RS 232 port and the native RS 485 port at the same time Optional RS 232 Communication Configuration Summary Parameter Description Range Default User Setting Port Select active serial port RS 232 RS 232 RS 485 Protocol DF1 Full duplex Auto Sense DF1 Half duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave Auto Sense Delay Time between re
48. 767 210 Default Value 0 Comment Required to clear or preset energy counters Returns 1 Refer to How to Clear or Preset Energy Counters by Using Communication on page 120 Increments by 1 32 767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Metering Reactive Energy and Amp hour Results Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No N21 Remote 1 0 BT 30 CIP Assy Inst 21 Write 22 Read No of Elements 23 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Metering Reactive Energy and Amp hour Results Element Modbus Element name Range Units No Address 0 40601 Password 0 9999 1 40602 Parameter select 0 7 2 40603 kVARh forward 344 x 109 999 999 kVARh 3 40604 x 108 3 XU x 10 dH x 103 6 40607 7 40608 kVARh reverse x 10 999 999 8 40609 x 108 3 i HINT x 10 TH x 103 11 40612 12 40613 kVARh net x 109 999 999 13 40614 x 108 3 T MET x 10 x 103 16 40617 17 40618 Ah 44 x 199 999 999 kAh 18 40619 x 108 3 20 40621 Hx 10 x 103 21 40622 22 40623 Metering iteration 0 32 767 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Default Value 0 Comment Required to clear or preset energy counters Returns 1
49. 99 Demand Current 100 Demand Power 101 Demand Reactive Power 102 Demand Apparent Power 103 Projected Demand 104 Projected Demand W 105 Projected Demand VAR 106 Projected Demand VA 107 Elapsed demand period time Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Comment Referto Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results Parameters Referto Metering Power Results Parameters Referto Metering Demand Results Parameters Appendix A 271 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name No 108 L1 True Power Factor 109 L2 True Power Factor 110 L3 True Power Factor a N Three phase True PF L1 Displacement Power Factor L2 Displacement Power Factor L3 Displacement Power Factor Three phase Displacement PF L1 Distortion Power Factor L2 Distortion Power Factor L3 Distortion Power Factor a N N a a a a N N N N N N N co co N o Sal A Co Ro Three phase Distortion PF Comment Refer to Metering Power Factor Results Parameters 120 Wh forward 121 Wh reverse 122 Wh net 123 VAh 124 VARh forward 125 VARh reverse 126 VARh net 127 Ah 272 Refer to Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results Parameters Referto Metering Reactive Energy and Amp hour Results Parameters Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Parameters for Trend Log and Co
50. Class Instance and Attribute For the power monitor data tables Class 4 Assembly Objects Attribute identifies the data table and Attribute 3 data Word 6 and following words contain data to write to the power monitor 99 Chapter 4 Communication 100 Once the message is assembled your ladder program transfers the integer file to the scanner module MO file starting at word 224 SLC 500 controller or block transfers the 64 word integer file to the scanner module PLC 5 controller The ControlLogix controller includes in its instruction set a CIP Generic message instruction that builds the transaction header and path from information you enter into the message setup dialog in RSLogix 5000 software Message Setup Message Configuratinn msgPM3K_IIser E z sius UasPMOK Usa i The example above is a ControlLogix message instruction to read the user configured table assembly instance 37 TIP Because the floating point word order in the ControlLogix controller is reversed from the default DeviceNet floating point word order setting in the Powermonitor 3000 unit your ladder logic will need to reverse the word order so the data may be interpreted correctly The SWPB instruction performs this function You may also select little Endian word order however this may be incompatible with RSPower and RSEnergyMetrix software Up to four concurrent explicit messaging connections are supported by the
51. Data Writes A single element write to a data table must meet the following general criteria e A valid password is written to Table 60 element 0 to enable single element writes The source and destination data type and length must match for example floating point or integer 4 bytes or 2 bytes e The source data element must be within the legal range listed in the data table specification e Reserved elements may not be written For DeviceNet optional communication only each consecutive write must be unique e After 30 minutes without a write single element writes will be disabled You may read the Write Error Status table after writing an element to verify that the write was valid and accepted by the power monitor If there was an error in the last write the Write Error Status indicates the CSP file or assembly instance DeviceNet network only number and the offending element number You may write data to any writeable data table element in the power monitor Single Element Write Flow Diagram Panelview Terminal Powermonitor 3000 Data Client Data Server Qa a 8 Valid password 7 ement 1 m N60 0 1 Data Pe Addr 1 2 Data wel Addr 2 3 e Addr3 4 mel Addr4 Cz ws Pe d ay mas ume er dd able n x Adin DL Write error status Optional verification Source Elements Target Elements P after each element write 86 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Communica
52. Demand R F56 51 72 32401 12 e jeje 263 Parameters Time of Use Records Reactive Energy and R F57 52 73 3250 12 e jeje 264 Demand Parameters Time of Use Records Apparent Energy and R F58 53 74 3260 12 e jeje 265 Demand Parameters Single Password Write Parameters R W N60 75 76 4270 1 e o o 266 Single Parameter Read Parameters R 80 1 e jo o 267 103 1 Event log user comment feature has been removed from master firmware revision 3 1 and later Supported only on 1404 xxxxx ENT xx Data is most commonly read from this table by using the Indexed read method Powermonitor 3000 unit starts with file 9 to avoid any data type incompatibility with SLC file numbers 1 8 which are of a fixed data type This is a reply to a PCCC diagnostic status request used by RSWho to display text and an icon for the product Listed Modbus address is one based For zero based addressing subtract a value of one 1 from the listed address The default size is 2 input words and 2 output words for remote I O The input table instance 1 default size is 6 words and is user configurable for DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet networks Remote 1 0 tables and the default DeviceNet input channel are PLC SLC controllers compatible but if you reconfigure the DeviceNet input channel Instance 1 it may or may not be PLC SLC controllers compatible depending on the number of parameters configured 8 Basic device configuration data table s
53. IEEE 519 TDD total demand distortion e e IEEE 519 pass fail calculation on voltage and current e e Individual percent and RMS magnitude harmonics 1 41 Individual percent and RMS magnitude harmonics 42 63 e Oscillography capture data e Transient voltage and current index RMS voltage and current per phase for each cycle of transient capture e Transient capture wave form data f this box is checked you may view the measurement by using display module If not you may access measurements by using communication only 28 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Metering Accuracy Class In the Selftest Diagnostic Results table element 26 is a read only parameter that indicates the revenue metering accuracy class of the master module If this element contains the value 0 the master module meets ANSI C12 16 and EN61036 Class 1 requirements for accuracy If this element contains the value 1 the master module meets ANSI C12 20 Class 0 5 EN60687 Class 0 5 and Canadian standard CAN3 C17 M84 requirements for accuracy If this element contains the value 2 the master module meets ANSI C12 20 Class 0 2 EN60687 Class 0 2 and Canadian standard CAN3 C17 M84 requirements for accuracy The revenue metering accuracy class is also indicated on the side of the master module and can be accessed via the display module DIS
54. Limit 110 Nominal System Voltage e Action delay 0 e Release delay 0 e Output action Capture oscillograph TIP The setpoint limits reference the nominal line to line voltage for Delta modes and the nominal line to neutral voltage for Wye and single phase modes If the nominal system voltage setting is changed the high and low limits for setpoint 19 and 20 are automatically adjusted to 90 and 110 of the nominal system voltage Using Sag and Swell Detection Follow these steps to effectively use sag and or swell detection 1 Set RMS result averaging to 0 no averaging for the quickest setpoint response to changes in input voltage 2 Alter setpoint configuration if necessary to adjust the sensitivity to sags and or swells If using the setpoint to trigger an oscillograph capture make sure there is at least one capture location that is clear and ready to accept a new capture 175 Chapter 8 Advanced Features 176 3 Periodically check the event log or capture ready status for an indication that a sag or swell has occurred Read the event log to get the timestamp duration of the disturbance the worst case magnitude and the identifier of the capture 5 Find the capture that has the same identifier as the one found in the event log record by reading the first block from each capture location Read the entire capture from the power monitor Depending on the duration of the disturbance the captu
55. ML1400 data table N111 is the destination table for the Read message and N211 is the source for the Write message Table N211 contains the following values for setting the date and time in a power monitor with a password of 0 to January 1 2003 at 12 00 midnight i Data File N211 dec WRITEDTIME The Read Clock from PM3K and Set Clock from ML1400 bits are used to initiate the messages and are reset when the message instruction either completes successfully or an error occurs In your application code if the message rungs are controlled programmatically be sure that only one message is enabled at a time Ladder Program Read Write Message MSG File MIGIUU 1 Setup Screen MG10U 1 Write N11 table i Write N11 toble Sowre is N211 Source is N211 _ WRITE DATETIMEEN MG100 2 MSG Read Write Message MSG File MG100 2 Setup Scieen 302 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Message Configuration Read MSG MG100 1 1 Elements Modbus Date and Time table registers 40101 40108 length 8 elements Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 303 Appendix C Sample Applications Message Configuration Write 4 MSG MG100 2 1 Elements ET This Controller Control Bits Channet Ignore if imed out TO D Modbus Command 16 Write Multiple Registers 4rxxx Data Table Address N211 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements Data Enor ER n
56. O or DeviceNet discrete control The Pulse output scale factor sets the number of measurement increments per pulse Range 1 30 000 default 10 The Pulse output width parameter determines the pulse width in milliseconds Range 40 2000 or 0 to transition the output KYZ style Default is 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 53 Chapter 3 54 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Metering Options Configuration parameters RMS Result Averaging RMS Resolution and Frequency Averaging allow you to make choices to fit the power monitor more closely to your application needs The default settings are to average 8 RMS and frequency calculations providing a smoother result and to sample at a high rate providing greater accuracy where significant harmonics are present Refer to the discussion of these parameters in Metering Functionality at the beginning of this chapter Configurable Energy Counter Rollover You may configure the number of digits range 4 15 at which energy values roll over to zero Configure this setting by using the display module or by writing to the Advanced Device Configuration Parameters table on page 196 Advanced Metering Options Some applications require very frequent updates of a limited set of metering data In the M8 model you may de select certain metering functions to improve the update rate of the power monitor in its remaining metering and communication functions With this feature select
57. Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 2 Fill out the Setup dialog as shown MSG N7 42 14 Elements Notice that under target device that power monitor data table F10 Basic Configuration was selected The Local Node Address is the address of the power monitor Controlnet Node Address 4 The information to write was loaded into file F12 0 of the SLC controller and is 9 elements long Communicating to a Powermonitor 3000 Unit from a PLC 5 ControlNet Processor The power monitor is capable of communicating over ControlNet by using PLC 5 typed reads and writes When using ladder to communicate unscheduled messages to and from the power monitor the following example applies Publication 1404 UMOO1F EN P November 2009 117 Chapter 4 Communication Create a PLC 5 Typed Read You can message integer and float files to and from the power monitor using PLC 5 typed message instructions by using the following steps Insert a MSG Instruction to the ladder rung and assign a control MSG Read Write Message Control MG 0 Setup Screen This example reads the Voltage Current and Frequency table File F15 from the power monitor MSG MG9 100 1 Elements Notice that when using an unscheduled message directly to the power monitor in this case node 4 that the message format is local multi hop selection is no 118 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapt
58. R F25 48 28 30701 14012270 e e je 221 Min Max Log Configuration Read back Select R W N26 13 29 30 40901 9 e jeje 223 Parameters Min Max Log Results Parameters R F27 28 31 30801 1 e jeje 224 Event Log Configuration Read back Record Select R W N28 9 3233 41001 6 e jeje 228 Parameters Event Log Results Parameters R e N29 21 34 30901 14 17 18 e 229 11 User configured Table Setup Parameters R W N30 35 35 36 41101 26 e jeje 233 User configured Table Results Parameters R F31 62 37 31001 4or2302 e ee je 235 Write Error Status Parameters R N32 4 38 31101 e jeje 236 Harmonic Analysis Configuration Read back Select R W N33 14 39 40 41201 e jeje 2M Parameters Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More R F34 23 41 31201 gorio e e o 238 Parameters Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 1 21 R F35 39 42 14 ele 239 Parameters Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 41 R e F36 40 43 14 eje 240 Parameters Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 20 H F37 41 44 14 ele 241 Parameters Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 40 R e F38 42 45 14 eje 242 Parameters Oscillograph Configuration Read back Data Select R W N39 15 46 47 1 eje 243 Parameters 188 Publication 1404 UM 001 F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Summary of Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables for all Communication Options
59. Range Comment No Address 0 30101 2 L1 Current Amps A 9 9 999 9x102 Refer to Voltage Current and Frequency Results on 1 30103 4 L2 Current 0 0 999 9x10 2 30105 6 L3 Current 0 0 999 9x102 3 30107 8 Avg Current 0 0 999 9x102 4 30109 10 L1 N Voltage Volts V 0 0 999 9x102 5 30111 12 L2 N Voltage 0 0 999 9x107 6 30113 14 L3 N Voltage 0 0 999 9x107 7 30115 16 Avg L N Voltage 0 0 999 9x102 8 30117 18 L1 L2 Voltage 0 0 999 9x10 9 30119 20 L2 L3 Voltage 0 0 999 9x10 10 30121 22 L3 L1 Voltage 0 0 999 9x102 11 30123 24 Avg LL Voltage 0 0 999 9x102 12 30125 26 Frequency last cycle Hertz Hz 40 0 75 0 Returns 0 or 999 0 if out of range 13 30127 28 Metering iteration 0 32 767 Increments by 1 32 767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 205 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results Parameters CSP File No F16 Remote 1 0 BT 27 CIP Assy Inst 15 No of Elements 11 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results Element Modbus Element name Units Range Comment No Address 0 30201 02 L4 Zero sequence Current Amps A 0 0 999 9x102 Refer to Symmetrical Compon
60. Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience an anomoly within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that s contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone en html Canada or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headqu
61. Setpoint 5 time accumulator e e e 39 Setpoint 6 time accumulator e e e 40 Setpoint time accumulator e e e 41 Setpoint 8 time accumulator e e e 42 Setpoint 9 time accumulator e e e 43 Setpoint 10 time accumulator e e e 44 Voltage Sag 2 Volts e e 45 Voltage Swell 2 46 Transient detected 3 47 Avg IEEE THD V e e e 40 Avg IEEE THD I e e e 49 Avg IEC THD V e e 50 Avg IEC THD I e e e 51 Avg Crest Factor V e e 52 Avg Crest Factor e e O A setpoint activates when the magnitude of any phase passes the activation limit and releases when all phases pass the release limit in the appropriate direction for the setpoint evaluation condition 2 These setpoint types apply only to the applicable Powermonitor 3000 models and will appear as inactive on other models 130 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Setpoint Programming and Operation Chapter 5 Setpoint Action Type Setpoint Description M4 M6 M8 Setpoint Description M4 M M Action type M5 Action type M5 6 8 0 None e e e 22 Clear all energy results e e je 1 Energize relay and alarm flag 1 e e je 23 Clear setpoint 1 time e o 2 Energize KYZ and alarm flag 2 e e je 24 Clear setpoint 2 time e e je 3 Set alarm flag 3 e e fe 25 Clear setpoint 3 time e e je 4 Set alarm flag 4 e je 26 Clear setpoint 4 time e o 5 Set alarm
62. Specifications Appendix D The Bulletin 1404 display module is rated as IP65 degree of protection per International Standard IEC 529 It is rated as Type 4 Indoor per NEMA and UL 508 Follow the recommended installation guidelines to maintain these ratings ANSI IEEE Tested Meets or exceeds the Surge Withstand Capability SWC C37 90 1 1989 for protective relays and relay systems on all power connection circuit terminations Measurement Accuracy and Range See table below for the rating of each parameter Measurement Accuracy and Range The Powermonitor 3000 unit has these specifications Parameter Accuracy in of Full Scale at 25 C 77 F 50 60 Hz Unity Power Nominal Range Facator M4 M5 M6 M8 Voltage Sense Inputs V1 V2 0 2 0 05 0 05 0 05 347V 15 399V N V3 RMS 600V 26 691V RMS Current Sense Input 11 12 13 0 296 0 05 0 05 0 05 5 A 50 mA 10 6A 14 RMS Frequency 0 05 Hz 0 05 Hz 0 05 Hz 0 05 Hz 50 or 60 Hz 40 75 Hz Power Functions kW kVA ANSI C12 16 and ANSI C12 20 and ANSI C12 20 and ANSI C12 20 and kVAR EN 61036 Class 1 EN 60687 Class EN 60687 Class EN 60687 Class Demand Functions kW kVA Accuracy 0 5 Accuracy 0 5 Accuracy 0 5 Accuracy Energy Functions kWH kVAH Class 0 2 is also Class 0 2 is also Class 0 2 is also available available available 55 80 ms 45 70 ms 45 75 ms 40 90 ms Metering Update Rates Publi
63. Status 0 indicates released 1 indicates activated this read only element is ignored on a write Accumulated time Expressed in integer exponent format Clear time accumulator command 0 performs no action 1 clears the accumulated time for selected setpoint Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Setpoint Programming and Operation Chapter 5 Reading Setpoint Status Data by Using Communication To read the setpoint status by using communication the client uses the indexed read method The power monitor uses the Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status table both to select the setpoint to be read on the next read and to return the status of the selected setpoint In auto increment mode 0 the first read returns the status of setpoint 1 the second read setpoint 2 and so on In manual mode D the client alternates writes selecting the desired setpoint with reads of the setpoint status See the list just above for the content of this data table Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 135 Chapter5 Setpoint Programming and Operation 136 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Chapter 6 Relay and KYZ Output Operations I O Operations The power monitor is equipped with two relay outputs and two status inputs designed to provide a discrete interface with your application The Relay output is an electromechanical Form C relay with contacts rated at 10 amperes at 240V ac or 250V dc This set of contacts is
64. Time a time zone for the power monitor must also be configured for the correct time to be set The time zone is configured as an offset in hours from UTC formerly known as GMT To enable network demand synchronization the demand period parameter in the advanced configuration table must be set to zero or a negative number Refer to page 52 for more information If using RSEnergyMetrix RT option or RSPower software for configuration the checkbox Use Status Input 2 or Enable External Demand Sync must be checked You may configure network demand and time synchronization options by using the display module or by using communication by writing to the Network Demand Sync and Time Configuration table Input Mode Sets the unit network time sync mode Range 0 Master command input 1 Master status 2 input 2 Slave broadcast input 3 Slave status 2 input default Broadcast Port Sets the UDP port number for the master slave configuration Range 300 400 default 300 Time IP Address The IP address of the primary SNTP server accessed as the 1 4th octet World Time Zone Sets the time zone of the power monitor Range 12 12 For example 12 GMT 12 00 Eniwetok Kwajalein 11 GMT 11 00 Midway Island Samoa 12 GMT 12 00 Fiji Kamchatka Marshall Island Time set Interval Determines how often the unit time is automatically set in seconds Range 0 32 766 0 Disables the time set functio
65. Time of use selection above Default 1792 700 Hex 8 00 to 10 59 a m 157 Chapter 7 158 Data Logging e Mid peak PM selects afternoon mid peak time of use hours Default 120 78 Hex 3 00 6 59 p m e Peak AM selects morning peak time of use hours Default 2048 800 Hex 11 00 11 59 a m e Peak PM selects afternoon peak time of use hours Default 7 7 Hex 12 00 noon 2 59 p m Reading Time of use Log Data The power monitor stores the TOU log in three sets of 13 records each one set for real energy and demand a second for reactive energy and demand and the last for apparent energy and demand For each set record 0 contains the in process records for the current month Records are stored to non volatile memory every 2 minutes Records 1 12 contain the monthly records for the previous 12 months When the log day occurs the records are shifted down with the record 0 moving into record 1 and the oldest record being deleted The Time of Use Records Real Energy and Demand table contains the real energy and demand time of use data from the record selected during the most recent write to the Time of Use Register Configuration table This read only table of 12 floating point elements contains the following data e Off peak MWh e Off peak kWh e Off peak demand Watts e Mid peak MWh e Mid peak kWh Mid peak demand Watts e Peak MWh e Peak kWh e Peak demand Watts e Start date in YY MM
66. UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables This section provides the detailed data table definitions you may use for setting up communication with a Powermonitor 3000 unit One set of data tables covers all the Powermonitor 3000 models M M5 M6 and M8 and communication options 000 232 RIO DNT ENT and CNT The individual tables include notes regarding their applicability to various models and communication options Please note carefully these designations The table on page 188 summarizes the purpose and general attributes of each data table and lists each data table s access method read only or read write addressing options number of elements and Powermonitor 3000 model applicability The tables on pages 191 268 provide comprehensive details of the individual data tables along with application notes For your convenience summary information from the Summary of Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables for all Communication Options on page 188 is repeated at the top of each individual table 187 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Summary of Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables for all Communication Options Data Table Name and Description 2zle Applies to Referto a l8 ZG o 925m 2 T 5 Page 2 9u 29 25 eO 25 lss 2 sS S5 erE FEE BES gk lo la Ee ead o6 Talem ESES zu S GS Remote 0 DeviceNet
67. also rated to meet IEEE C37 90 requirements for power circuit breaker tripping duty The KYZ output is a solid state relay rated at 80 mA at 240V ac or 250V dc that provides higher reliability and long life for low power signaling duty such as a kWh pulse output The two outputs operate independently and you may configure each output s operation individually You may use the display module or communication to set the output configuration parameters in the Advanced Device Configuration table The output configuration options for the relay and KYZ outputs include the following e Control source specifies what controls the selected output Options are 07 none 1 through 67 pulsed output 7 7 setpoint control 8 discrete I O control Default 7 Output scale specifies the scaling factor for pulsed operation Range 1 30 000 default 10 e Output width specifies the pulse width for pulsed operation Range 0 or 40 2 000 ms e Force command overrides setpoint communication discrete or pulsed control until the force is released Options are 0 no change 1 force the output energized 2 forced the output de energized 3 release the force e Default output state on communication loss specifies response to a loss of communication Options are 0 last state resume 1 last state freeze 2 de energize resume 3 de energize freeze See below Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 137 Chapter 6 138 1 0 Operations
68. and set to 0 N9 4 Service code OxE for Get Attribute Single or 0x10 Set Attribute single N9 5 Class code of Instance Object Power monitor class 4 assembly instance 4 321 Appendix C 322 Sample Applications N9 CIP Word N9 6 Description of Function Targets Instance number to read or write N9 7 Target Attribute Power monitor Attribute of assembly instance is 3 3 N9 8 Target member number Not used N9 9 Size of the data in words Used for writes only When performing a read operation this parameter is forced to 0 Size of Power monitor tables is type N elements x 1 type F elements x 2 N9 10 Not used by CIP_SETUP N9 11 Enables a read write operation Writing a 1 starts the process for writing an assembly instance of the power monitor Writing a 2 starts the read process of assembly instance from the power monitor Receiving Information from the SCNR Scanner Observe the sample of the CIP_SETUP file for the retrieval of VIF table assembly instance 14 of the power monitor CIP Setup File gt Data File N9 dec CIP SETUP After setting up the communication parameters a 2 is written to location of N9 11 The transaction is complete when bit N7 0 9 becomes true The information will be located in file F8 FLT_DATA starting at location 0 The length of usable information is the length of elements in table instance 14 VIF table of the power monitor TIP W
69. approved wrist strap grounding device e Do not open the module or attempt to service internal components e Use a static safe workstation if available e Keep the module in its static shield bag when not in use 12 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Chapter 2 Product Description The Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 unit is designed and developed to meet the needs of both producers of and users of electric power A power monitor system consists of e a master module that provides metering data logging native RS 485 communication and other advanced features depending on the model e an optional display module for configuration entering commands and displaying data an optional communication port to serve data to other devices using a choice of networks e optional external devices and applications that display and utilize data for reporting control and management of power and energy usage The Powermonitor 3000 unit is a microprocessor based monitoring and control device suited for a variety of applications including the following e Load Profiling Using the configurable trending utility to log power parameters such as real power apparent power and demand for analysis of power usage by loads over time e Demand Management Understanding when and why demand charges occur lets you to make informed decisions that reduce your electrical power costs Cost Allocation Knowing your actual e
70. automatically calculate and store load factor on a particular day each month or you may manually generate a command by using communication to save the load factor result and reset the calculation This information is useful in reducing peak demand when you look at load factor and peak demand values The peak demand period is stored in the Mix Max Log which has a date and time stamp that indicates when the peak occurred Using this information you may be able to identify plant activities that caused the peak You may be able to prevent or reschedule activities or install a demand management system Either option may realize significant savings in demand charges You can use the load factor values to estimate demand cost savings potential The lower the load factor the higher the potential for savings by managing your electric power demand The power monitor stores the load factor in 13 records Record 0 stores in progress calculations and is cleared on a power cycle Records 1 12 are a first in first out array saved in non volatile memory with the highest record number containing the most recent record In manual clear reset mode when you issue a clear reset command the contents of record 0 is written to the highest numbered record and Cif necessary the remaining records are shifted down with the oldest being deleted In auto clear reset mode you select a day of the month for this process to occur automatically Within each record the
71. can be read from file N10 0 Float information can be read from F8 0 The enable and done bit s are turned off and the bit N7 9 is latched to notify the user that the transfer was successful Bit B3 0 1 is set to transfer any floats to the F8 0 file after swapping words from the incomming message Done Bit Message Pending Time Out Bit Error bit N7 0 B3 0 N7 0 N7 0 COP 0004 JE JE ME i Copy File 13 0 8 12 Source M0 3 1350 Dest N10 0 Length 64 Message Pending B3 0 t U a 0 Perform Read N9 11 A r Allow Write N9 11 AS 0 Enable Transfer Bit N7 0 CUD 4 15 Done Bit N7 0 L CU gt 4 13 Transfer Successful N7 0 L gt 9 Swap Words B3 0 LLL CL l 1 326 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C When an error or timeout occurs bit maintenance is performed to ready the ladder for the next message leaving the timeout or error bit set Time Out Bit Message Pending N7 0 B3 0 0005 J E gt 8 0 Error bit Perform Read N7 0 N9 11 JE CUS J C 12 1 Allow Write N9 11 CUS 0 Enable Transfer Bit N7 0 QU 15 This calls the word swap routine and returns after the swapping has been completed Swap Words Swap Words B3 0 B3 0 0006 J E gt 1 1 JSR Jump To Subroutine SBR File Number U 3 0007 CEND gt Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 327 Appendix C
72. clearing the current in process record Range 0 31 0 disables automatic clear reset 1 28 selects day of month 29 31 selects last day of month e Reserved reserved element must be 0 on a write returns 0 The results table is the Load Factor Log Results table You may read the in process Record 0 or one of the 12 logged records This table contains the following 14 floating point elements e Peak demand power expressed in watts Range 0 0 999 9 107 e Average demand power expressed in watts Range 0 0 999 9 10 e Load factor power expressed in per cent Range 0 0 100 0 Peak demand reactive power expressed in VARs Range 0 0 999 9 10 e Average demand reactive power expressed in VARs Range 0 0 999 9 107 Load factor reactive power expressed in per cent Range 0 0 100 0 Peak demand apparent power expressed in VARs Range 0 0 999 9 10 e Average demand apparent power expressed in VARs Range 0 0 999 9 10 e Load factor apparent power expressed in per cent Range 0 0 100 0 e Peak demand current expressed in VARs Range 0 0 999 9 10 178 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 Transient Detection Metering and Capture Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 e Average demand current expressed in VARs Range 0 0 999 9 107 Load factor current expressed in per cent Range 0 0 100 0 e Elapsed time hours that have elapsed since t
73. configure for nominal resolution if you require faster update rates but can accept lower accuracy as a trade off The M4 default is Nominal The M5 M6 MB8 default is High e RMS Result Averaging the default setting provides a more steady result by averaging the results of the last eight calculations You may also configure no averaging for the fastest response to a changing signal Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 e Frequency Averaging like the RMS result averaging the default setting provides for a smoother response by averaging the frequency of each of the last eight cycles You may select no averaging to return the frequency of only the last cycle Refer to Advanced Device Configuration on page 50 for more information Symmetrical Component Analysis Results The power monitor calculates sequence voltages and currents for use in symmetrical component analysis a method of mathematically transforming a set of unbalanced three phase vectors into three sets of balanced vectors The positive sequence components are a set of vectors that rotate the same direction as the original power vectors and represent that portion of the applied voltage or current capable of doing work Negative sequence components rotate opposite to the original vectors and represent the portion of the applied power that results in losses due to unbalance The percent Unbalance value is the ratio
74. data Starting with Master Module firmware version 4 and Ethernet firmware version 3 the Ethernet port may be configured for the following protocol selections e CIP This default selection maintains compatibility with prior firmware versions It provides support for CIP generic messaging as well as PCCC encapsulated messaging It must be selected for compatibility with RSEnergyMetrix RSPower and RSPowerPlus software e CSP This optional selection supports legacy client server protocol CSP messaging with older PLC and SLC controllers and certain 3rd party A B Ethernet drivers e CIP CSP This dual stack protocol selection may be used when both third party CSP drivers and CIP messaging are desired This selection is incompatible with RSEnergyMetrix RSPower and RSPowerPlus software The following table summarizes the protocol selection options Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 103 Chapter 4 Communication Protocol Selection Table Protocol RSLinx Pure CSP Client RSEnergyMetrix Logix and Implicit Connection Type Compatibility 1 and RSPower MicroLogix Messaging Compatibility Compatibility Compatibility B CIP default EtherNet IP No Yes Yes Yes g CSP DF1 CSP Yes No No No y CIP CSP DF1 CSP Yes No Yes Yes 104 In addition to the selectable protocols listed above the Ethernet port supports Modbus TCP beginning with Master Module firmware version 4 and Ethernet firmware version
75. e One quarter rack slave device e Three communication rate settings 57 6 115 2 and 230 4 Kbps e Cable lengths up to 3048 m 10 000 ft e Node capacity up to 32 nodes Update rates for discrete I O 5 ms Update rates for block transfers 50 ms minimum e Two discrete inputs e Eleven discrete outputs Read Write block transfer data tables for access to all data Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Product Description Chapter 2 DeviceNet Optional Communication A catalog number ending in DNT specifies a power monitor with a DeviceNet port in addition to the native RS 485 port The DeviceNet option permits concurrent use of both communication ports The DeviceNet port has the following performance features e Adapter class device e Four communication rate settings 125 250 500 Kbps and AutoBaud e Remotely settable communication rate e Cable length up to 500 m 1640 ft maximum e Node capacity up to 64 nodes including master e Remotely settable node address e Shielded twisted pair media containing both signal and power conductors Update rates for I O channel 100 ms minimum Update rates for explicit messaging 250 ms minimum e Configurable I O channel assembly instance six parameters default twenty three maximum e Configurable explicit assembly instance seventeen parameters default twenty three parameters maximum e Explicit assembly instances fo
76. instruction is to use For the target device power monitor specify its IP address and data table address In the example message setup dialog below the SLC 500 controller is reading the Power table F17 0 from a power monitor with IP address 192 1 1 207 SLC 5 05 Controller to Power Monitor Message Detail Screen Example MSG Rung 2 0 N9 0 F17 0 192 1 1 207 If you want to execute a sequence of messages condition each message in the sequence with the previous message s done or error status and include a brief programmed time delay between messages so that each message receives fresh data and the communication port is not overloaded As a starting point program the inter message time delay at 100 ms Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 105 Chapter4 Communication EtherNet IP CIP Protocol Allen Bradley controllers since the release of the ControlLogix platform have used the EtherNet IP or CIP protocol In particular PLC 5 and SLC 5 05 controllers at or later than the following series and revision levels support CIP communication e PLC 5 xxE Series C Rev N e PLC 5 xxE Series D Rev E e PLC 5 xxE Series E Rev D e SLC 5 05 Series A FRN 5 OS 501 e SLC 5 05 Series C EtherNet IP explicit messaging from a PLC 5E or SLC 5 05 controller to a Powermonitor 3000 unit uses a MultiHop message path The client controller thinks it is communicating with a ControlLogix controller The example mess
77. is displayed press the Enter key to execute the command The selection prompt reappears and the display module is set back to Program mode Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side are flashing again and the option prompt is now solid Program Mode To abort a command press the Escape key The display module returns to Program mode and the option prompt is displayed again Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side are now flashing and the option prompt is now solid 46 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Commands Parameter Description Range Force Relay Forces relay to a known state in which the relay De energize remains at that state until the force is removed Energize No Force Force KYZ Forces KYZ to a known state in which the relay De energize remains at that state until the force is removed Energize No Force Clear Min Max Log Resets the Min Max log with the current real Yes time metering information No Clear kWh Counter Resets the kWh net counter to zero Yes No Clear kVARh Counter Resets the kVARh net counter to zero Yes No Clear kVAh Counter Resets the kVAh net counter to zero Yes No Clear Ah Counter Resets the Ah net counter to zero Yes No Clear All Energy Counters Resets all cumulative energy counter to zero Yes No Clear S1 Counter Resets Status 1 counter to zero Yes No Clear S2 Counter Resets Status 2
78. is equipped with six two color status indicators arranged as shown Functions of the indicators differ among the various communication configurations Status Indicators eG G8 69 MODULE O 3 STATUS a o OO x OO The three indicators on the left display the same information on Powermonitor 3000 units with any communication option including native RS 485 communication only The three indicators on the right have different labels and different indications depending on the communication option selected as shown in this table Status Indicators All Powermonitor 3000 Models Status Indicator Indicator Color Indicator State and Communication Condition Module Status Off Control power is off or insufficient Steady Red Major fault internal self test has failed If a power cycle does not correct the problem call customer support Steady Green Powermonitor 3000 unit is operating normally RS 485 RX Off The RS 485 bus is idle no active data is present Flashing Green Active data is present on the RS 485 bus RS 485 TX Off Powermonitor 3000 unit is not transmitting 22 data onto the RS 485 bus Flashing Green Powermonitor 3000 unit is transmitting data onto the RS 485 bus Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publica
79. is not ready 1 is returned for all data points Block Number The block number and the total number of data reads required to read an entire capture depend on the communication option and the capture type See the Capture Type Properties table The block number range is 1 to the number of Data reads required listed in the table Capture Type The properties associated with the capture type options are listed in the Capture Type Properties table You may select a capture type that best suits your application requirements A higher sample rate provides a more accurate representation of the waveform when higher order harmonics and transients are present Higher data resolution provides more accuracy of each data point Capture type 5 combines low sampling rate and low resolution but captures almost 7 seconds of waveform at 60 Hz Capture Sampling Data Samples per Total Cycles per Capture Data Reads Required Type Rate Resolution in at 60 50 e at 60 50 dejan DeviceNet Other Comms 0 5 4 kHz 13 bit 90 108 51 1 42 6 0 85 230 92 1 2 7 kHz WORD 45 54 102 2 85 2 1 70 2 1 35 kHz 22 5 27 204 4 170 3 3 40 3 5 4 kHz 7 bit 90 108 102 2 85 2 1 70 460 184 4 2 7 kHz Wen 45 54 2044 1703 340 5 1 35 kHz 225 21 408 8 340 7 6 81 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 161 Chapter8 Advanced Features Read back Mode The data client uses the indexed read m
80. iteration 0 32 767 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 257 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Catalog Number and WIN Parameters CSP File No N51 Remote 0 BT 50 CIP Assy Inst 64 No of Elements 29 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Catalog Number and WIN Element Modbus Element Name Range Comment No Address 0 32301 Catalog text char pair 1 32 768 Catalog number without dashes Each element contains a character 1 32302 Catalog text char pair 2 S907 pait 2 32303 Catalog text char pair 3 For each character pair character 1 element 256 and character 2 3 32304 Catalog text char pair 4 EREDUBE 4 32305 Catalog text char pair 5 The 6th character of the catalog string reflects the Current model of the 5 32306 Catalog text char pair 6 UU 6 32307 Catalog text char pair 7 7 32308 Reserved 0 Returns 0 8 32309 9 32310 Hardware series 0 25 Indicates the series of the product 0 A 1 B 10 32311 WIN text character pair 1 32 768 WIN warranty identification number This is the same 10 character 1 32312 WIN text character pair 42 392 767 ME rs on the master module label Each element 12 32313 WIN text character pair 3 13 32314 WIN text character pair 4 14 32315 WIN text character pair 5 15 32316 Reserved 0 Returns
81. kAh Set 8 4 144 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Event Codes Data Logging Chapter 7 Event Type Name Event Type Event Type Event Command Code Shown by DM Number All Energy Counters Set All Power Set 8 5 Trend Log Clear Trend Clr 8 6 Min Max Log Set M M Clr 8 7 Factory Defaults Restored FactCfg 8 8 Status Input Counter 1 Cleared 1 Clr 8 9 Status Input Counter 2 Cleared 2 Clr 8 10 Reserved for Future Enhancement 11 Single Setpoint Timer Clear Single SP Set 12 All Setpoint Timers Clear All SP Set 13 Power Up Pwr On 9 0 Power Down Pwr Off 10 0 Self test Error ST 44441 11 Hexadecimal Status Error Code See Status Error Codes on page 146 Time Set TimeSet 12 0 Device Reconfigured New Cfg 13 0 Setpoint Reconfigured Set Cfg 14 0 NVRAM Set NVRAM Set 15 0 Transient Detected TRN Det 16 M8 only 1 Number indicates a numeric digit Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 145 Chapter 7 Data Logging Status Error Codes Bits Hex Description bit 0 0001h Master module code flash status bit 1 0002h Master module data flash status bit2 0004h Master module RAM Status bit 3 0008h Reserved for factory use bit 4 0010h Master module NVRAM status bit 5 0020h Master module data acquisition status bit 6 0040h Master module real time clock status bit 7 0080h Reserved for factory use bit 8 0100h Reserved for factor
82. load current The row of the table that corresponds to the ratio is then used to determine the proper limits for each of the individual harmonics and the TDD specified in the table columns IEEE 519 also recommends maximum voltage distortion levels that the utility should remain below Table 11 1 of the IEEE standard specifies these limits based on the magnitude of the line to line voltage at the PCC Once configured the 1404 M6 will automatically monitor the system voltage and current for IEEE 519 compliance Harmonic Magnitude The powe rmonitor calculates the RMS magnitude of each individual harmonic Results are calculated for harmonics 1 41 M6 or 1 63 M8 for all 7 voltage and current channels Each result is expressed in RMS volts or amps Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 Harmonic Distortion The power monitor calculates the magnitude of each individual harmonic with respect to the fundamental Results are calculated for harmonics 1 41 MO or 1 63 M8 for all 7 voltage and current channels Each result is expressed as a percentage of the fundamental Configuring Harmonic Analysis You may configure harmonic analysis only via communication The display module does not support harmonic analysis configuration Configure harmonic analysis by performing a table write to the Harmonic Analysis Configuration Read back Select table This
83. might be divided into five one minute sub intervals The demand for each one minute interval is calculated and at the end of five minutes the average value of the sub intervals is computed to obtain a demand value At the end of the sixth minute the value for sub interval one is discarded and a new demand value computed based on sub intervals two through six In this way a new five minute demand value is obtained every minute The maximum value is then maintained as the peak demand This method approximates the actual demand the utility measures How can you minimize your peak demand in order to reduce your utility demand penalty charges One way is to measure the power being used and project the demand level at the end of the interval This method permits you to reduce power consumption when the projected demand reaches a predetermined threshold thus preventing the final demand from exceeding the desired level Projected Demand Calculation Select the best projection method for your system by comparing the projected values from each method with the actual demand at the end of the interval The three methods of projecting demand are described below Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Instantaneous The power monitor computes instantaneous demand by substituting the elapsed interval duration for the total interval duration 7 in the dem
84. mode 0 1 0 5 Detection mode 0 3 1 6 Reserved 0 0 7 Auto threshold set command 0 1 0 8 Auto threshold set duration 1 3600 10 9 Auto threshold set margin 1 0 100 0 20 0 10 Voltage trigger threshold 0 1 100 0 10 0 11 Current trigger threshold 0 1 100 0 10 0 12 oe duration time 0 0 ett Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 249 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Transient Analysis Metering Results Parameters CSP File No F44 Remote 1 0 BT 32 CIP Assy Inst 54 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Hoating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M8 only Transient Analysis Metering Results Element Modbus Element Name Range No Address 0 Capture number 1 6 1 Cycle number 1 12 2 L1 L2 or L1 N Voltage 0 0 999 9x102 3 L2 3 or L2 N Voltage 0 0 999 9x10 4 L3 L1 or L3 N Voltage 0 0 999 9x10 5 L1 Current 0 0 999 9x10 6 L2 Current 0 0 999 9x10 7 L3 Current 0 0 999 9x10 8 L4 Current 0 0 999 9x10 g Voltage Index at trigger 999 0x10 999 0x102 10 Current Index at trigger 999 0x10 999 0x10 11 Voltage Trigger Threshold 0 0 999 0x102 12 Current Trigger Threshold 0 0 999 0x102 13 Unique Transient Capture ID 0 30 000 250 Comment Refer to Reading Transient Analysis Metering Data on page 181 Publication 1
85. mode for training 10 user configurable setpoints Discrete condition monitoring via status inputs Electronic KYZ pulse output Form C ANSI C37 90 1989 rated relay for direct breaker tripping Time stamped data logging of system measurements and events Configurable trend log up to 45 000 records deep Event log 50 records deep Firmware upgrades without removing module Total harmonic distortion THD and Crest Factor Automatic network based time synchronization via SNTP Daylight Saving Time ANSI C12 20 Class 0 5 revenue metering accuracy EN60687 Class 0 5 revenue metering accuracy Canadian Revenue Meter specification accuracy Field upgradeable to M6 or M8 extra cost option 10 additional setpoints with more options Event Log an additional 50 records deep User configurable oscillography up to 400 cycles 60 Hz TIF K factor and IEEE 519 Pass Fail Sag and swell detection with oscillogram capture Load factor log 12 records months deep Calculates amplitude and 96 distortion for harmonics 1 41 Calculates amplitude and 96 distortion for harmonics 1 63 Sub cycle transient capture and metering Transducer and Energy Meter modes with improved update rate Class 0 2 revenue metering accuracy available as an extra cost option Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Options Publication 1404 UM001F EN P Novem
86. monitor all output forces are released Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 139 Chapter 6 1 0 Operations 140 No Control Operation You may also select no output control by selecting a value of zero 0 for the Control source parameter This mode enables only output forcing Communication Loss Behavior The relay output contacts and solid state KYZ output contacts on the IMPORTANT power monitor may be used to control other devices through setpoint control or communication You configure the response of these outputs to a communication failure Be sure to evaluate the safety impact of the output configuration on your plant or process The Default output state on communication loss defines the behavior of the output if the power monitor experiences a loss of communication What constitutes a communication loss depends on the protocol A remote I O unit declares a communication loss if it has detected more than 100 ms between valid frames or more than 255 consecutive valid frames not addressed to it A DeviceNet unit declares a communication loss when the network master scanner has not polled it within the Expected Packet Rate that you configured when setting up the I O connection You may select one of the following behaviors for each output e Last state resume holds the output in its last state during a communication loss and resume the output control when communication recovers e Last state
87. n 2 harmonic n lt 41 or 63 Ay K Factor IM g 169 Chapter 8 170 Advanced Features IEEE 519 TDD and IEEE 519 Pass Fail IEEE 519 is the IEEE standard for Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems The 1404 M6 refers to the 1992 version of this standard IEEE 519 provides recommended limits for the level of harmonic current injection at the Point of Common Coupling PCC between the utility and your setup The PCC is typically defined as the location in the power distribution system where the utility meters are connected The standard provides recommended limits for individual harmonic components as well as a limit for Total Demand Distortion TDD Total Demand Distortion is defined as the root sum square of the current distortion expressed as a percent of the maximum fundamental demand load current based on the maximum demand over the applicable demand interval The formula for computing TDD is the same as the IEEE THD formula except the configured value for maximum fundamental load current is substituted for the magnitude of the measured fundamental load current Where I Hy e H magnitude of the n harmonic TDD dece I n lt 41 or 63 H e H4 maximum fundamental load current Table 10 3 of the IEEE standard specifies the limits The appropriate limits are selected by computing the ratio of the available short circuit current to the maximum fundamental demand
88. of a second M6 M8 0 seconds M4 M5 0 tenths of a second M6 M8 1 Energize relay 1 and set alarm flag 1 Parameter Setpoint action delay Setpoint release delay Setpoint action type Example 3 Sag alarm To set an alarm flag on a sag condition so that RSEnergyMetrix software can log it and take action use the following settings Sag Alarm Settings Parameter Suggested Value Setpoint number 3 Setpoint type 1 Voltage Setpoint evaluation condition 2 Under forward Setpoint high limit 11096 of nominal system voltage Setpoint low limit 11096 of nominal system voltage Setpoint action delay 0 Setpoint release delay 90 seconds Setpoint action type 3 Set alarm flag 3 Nominal system voltage is the nominal line to neutral voltage in Wye and single phase systems and nominal line to line voltage in Delta systems In 1404 M6 and 1404 M8 units the high and low limits would be the same as those found in setpoint 19 the built in sag setpoint Setpoint release delay of 90 seconds sets alarm flag 3 long enough that RSEnergyMetrix software can reliably log the alarm with a one minute log rate Alarm flag 3 is selected because alarm flags 1 and 2 are tied to physical relay and KYZ outputs Configuring Setpoints by Using the Display Module You may configure setpoint operations by navigating through the PROG gt PASS gt CONFIGURATION gt SETPOINT menus selecting a setpoint
89. on page 191 for the contents of the default I O messaging tables TIP You may reconfigure the input messaging table instance 1 by selecting up to 23 integer or 14 floating point parameters through a table write to assembly instance 35 Refer to User configured 1 0 on page 122 If you change the size of the input table you must also re map the inputs into the DeviceNet scanner by using RSNetworx for DeviceNet software Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Polled I O messaging can automatically provide fresh data at update rates as fast as 100 ms The power monitor supports both Every Scan and Background polled messaging You select the poll type and polling rate by using RSNetworx for DeviceNet software e Every Scan Polls the power monitor once per scan Set the Interscan Delay to at least 100 ms An Interscan Delay of less than 100 ms slows the power monitor s delivery of metering information e Background Polls the power monitor at intervals you specify by using the Foreground to Background Poll Ratio So long as the power monitor is polled no more frequently than every 100 ms it operates and communicate at its optimal rate You may calculate the total scan time with this formula Total Scan Time 1 R e D Where R Foreground to Background Poll Ratio D Interscan Delay Change of State I O messaging COS reports data only when the content of the I O table changes COS messaging c
90. on page 256 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 42 62 Parameters on page 257 M8 only Harmonic Analysis Configuration Read back Select Element Modbus M4 M M Element Name Range Default Comment No Address M5 6 8 Value 0 41201 e e e Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 41202 e e o Channel 1 9 1 Refer to Configuring Harmonic Analysis on 2 41203 e e e Read back mode 0 0 LPs 3 41204 e Reserved 0 0 e e Individual harmonic data type 0 1 0 4 41205 e Reserved 0 0 e e Enable disable Harmonics 0 1 1 5 41206 Reserved 0 0 e e IEEE 519 Max Integer 0 9999 0 6 41207 Reserved 0 0 e o IEEE 519 Max l Exponent 4 21 0 7 41208 Reserved 0 0 e o IEEE 519 Max lymnglnteger 0 9999 0 8 41209 e Reserved 0 0 e o IEEE 519 Max lgmng Exponent 4 21 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 237 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More Parameters CSP File No F34 Remote 1 0 BT 23 CIP Assy Inst 41 No of Elements 9 M4 M5 10 M6 M8 User Configurable No Data Type Hoating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type See table Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More Element Modbus
91. point element consists of two 16 bit words or four 8 bit bytes of data Each integer element consists of one word or two bytes User configurability This attribute determines whether you may configure the content and or length of the data table 81 Chapter 4 82 Communication Let s look at the Date and Time table as an example e CSP file number N11 e Remote I O BT length 12 e CIP assembly instance 6 Write or 7 Read e Data table name Date and Time e Data access Read write e Number of elements 8 e Data type Integer e User configurable No The power monitor data tables are listed in Appendix A The table on page 188 shows a summary of all the data tables Expressing Data in Data Tables The power monitor may express metering data in several formats in the communication data tables Floating point data type is used to express most metering results The trend log min max log and the user defined data table also return values in floating point format The power monitor uses the IEEE 754 32 bit floating point format that is compatible with Allen Bradley PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers Modbus float data type returns IEEE 754 floating point values in a big endian two register array Integer data type 16 bit is used in most configuration data tables and some results data tables Integer array format is used to express real reactive and apparent energy results Each of these values is expressed as an a
92. read write table of nine integer elements comprises the following configuration parameters e Password needed to enable or disable harmonic analysis or write the maximum short circuit and demand current parameters Not needed for read back select use 1 Default 0000 Channel Specifies the channel of harmonic data to obtain in the next read of Table 33 1 V1 2 I1 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 I3 7 14 8 avg of voltage channels 9 avg of current channels On a read indicates the last selection made Default 1 e Read back mode selects read back mode for the Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More table Range 0 1 default 0 See below The remaining elements listed below are reserved in the M4 and M5 TIP models return 0 on a read and must be 0 on a write e Individual harmonic data type selects distortion 0 or magnitude 1 on subsequent reads of the individual results tables Default 0 e Enable disable harmonic analysis 0 disables 1 enables calculation of TIF K factor IEEE 519 and individual harmonics results Default 1 e EEE 519 maximum short circuit current used for IEEE 519 pass fail calculation expressed in integer exponent format Range 0 9999 integer 4 to 21 exponent defaults are 0 e used for IEEE 519 TDD calculation expressed in integer exponent format Range 0 9999 integer 4 21 exponent defaults are 0 171 Chapter 8 172 Advanced Features
93. record 6 7 Index to the previous record Indexing occurs after each read of the Results table Only mode 0 1 and 2 are supported by DF1 and remote I O communication The Event Log Results table is a read only data table containing 14 M4 M5 17 M6 or 18 M8 only integer elements as follows e Reserved returns 0 e Event record internal identifier An incremental number assigned to each new event See below e Timestamp event timestamp expressed in four element timestamp format see below e Event type see Event Codes on page 144 e Event command code see Event Codes on page 144 and Status Error Codes on page 146 e Setpoint type evaluation condition level action release delay and action if event is a setpoint these elements return additional information about the setpoint The Setpoint level expressed in integer exponent format records the worst case value of the setpoint parameter e Sustain limit timer M6 M8 only time the setpoint parameter exceeded the limit expressed in integer exponent format e Capture identifier M6 M8 only identifies oscillograph or transient capture number if applicable 147 Chapter 7 Data Logging Configurable Trend Log 148 TIP The power monitor expresses timestamps in an array of four data table elements Year Month day Hour minute Second hundredth of a second Each timestamp parameter except the Year is a combination of its first and second element For instanc
94. upgradeable to an M6 or M8 M6 M4 functionality plus oscillography sag swell detection harmonics 1 41 measurement additional setpoints and logging firmware upgradeable to M8 M8 M6 functionality plus transient capture and analysis harmonics measurement up to 63rd transducer and energy meter modes 1 In addition to Native RS 485 port Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Current Inputs 05 5A Power Supply A 120 240V ac 50 60 Hz or 125 250V dc B 24V dc Communication Options 000 None 232 RS 232 Serial DNT DeviceNet RIO Remote 1 0 ENT Ethernet CNT ControlNet Revenue Accuracy Class none Class 1 M4 Class 0 5 M5 M6 M8 02 Class 0 2 M5 M6 M8 219 Appendix B Catalog Number Explanation Display Module 1404 DM Bulletin Number Type of Device 1404 Power Monitoring and Management Products DM Display module with 3 Meter Cable 280 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Appendix C Sample Applications Introduction This appendix contains sample applications including ladder diagrams to help you get started in setting up communication between your application and a power monitor The application samples depict basic methods for reading and writing data between a power monitor and your programmable controller or other application Expand on these basic steps to customi
95. 0 0 999 9x1022 Total power signed to show direction 4 30309 10 L1 Reactive Power Volt amps 9 9 999 9x1022 Reactive power per phase signed to show 5 30311 12 L2 Reactive Power o 0 0 999 9x1022 uua 6 30313 14 L3 Reactive Power 0 0 999 9x1022 7 30315 16 Total Reactive Power 0 0 999 9x1922 Total reactive power signed to show direction 8 30317 18 L1 Apparent Power Volt amps 0 0 999 9x1022 Apparent power per phase 9 30319 20 L2 Apparent Power i 100 9999107 10 30321 22 L3 Apparent Power 00 9999107 11 30323 24 Total Apparent Power 0 0 999 9x1022 Total apparent power 12 30325 26 Metering iteration 0 32 767 Increments by 1 32 767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 207 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Metering Demand Results Parameters CSP File No F18 Remote 1 0 BT 25 CIP Assy Inst 17 No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Metering Demand Results Element Modbus Element name Units Range Comment No Address 0 30401 02 Demand Current Amps A 90 9999x10 Refer to Energy Results on page 34 1 30403 04 Demand Power Watts W 9 9 999 9x102 2 30405 06 Demand Reactive Power VAR 0 0 999 9x102 3 30407 08 Demand Apparent Power VA 0 0 999 9x102 4 30409 10
96. 0 BT 41 CIP Assy Inst 44 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 20 Element Modbus Element Name Range Comment No Address 0 Channel returned eee Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0 pose le Reserved 0 3 2 d Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 4 4th Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 5 f 6 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 6 z 8 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 7 f 10 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 8 12 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 3 i 14 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x1022 10 16 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 11 18 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 12 20 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 13 FFT iteration 0 32 767 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 241 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 40 Parameters CSP File No F38 Remote 1 0 BT 42 CIP Assy Inst 45 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Hoating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 40 Element Modbus Element Name Range Comment No Address 0 Channel returned 1 7 Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on 1 Type of harmonic data returned
97. 04 UM001F EN P November 2009 243 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Oscillograph Results Parameters CSP File No N40 Remote 1 0 BT 61 CIP Assy Inst 48 No of Elements 29 DeviceNet network only 59 all other communication types User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Oscillograph Results Element Name Timestamp Element Modbus No Address 0 1 x 2 244 Month day Hour minute Second hsec 0000 1231 0000 2359 0000 5999 Comment Trigger timestamp see page 82 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Comment Refer to Reading Oscillograph Data on page 162 Oscillograph Results Element Modbus Element Name Range No Address 3 Capture 1 8 M6 1 2 M8 4 Channel number 1 7 5 Block number See page 80 6 Capture type 0 5 7 Trigger source and 0 22999 capture identifier 8 Trigger position 1 4600 1 9200 9 Oscillograph Data Point 1 8192 8191 10 Oscillograph Data Point 2 11 Oscillograph Data Point 3 12 Oscillograph Data Point 4 13 Oscillograph Data Point 5 14 Oscillograph Data Point 6 15 Oscillograph Data Point 7 16 Oscillograph Data Point 8 17 Oscillograph Data Point 9 18 Oscillograph Data Point 10 19 Oscillograph Data Point
98. 07 7 i 11 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 8 i 13 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 3 i 15 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x1022 10 3 17 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x1022 11 19 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 12 21 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x1022 13 FFT iteration 0 32 767 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 239 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 41 Parameters CSP File No F36 Remote 1 0 BT 40 CIP Assy Inst 43 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Hoating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 41 Element Modbus Element Name Range Comment No Address 0 Channel returned 1 7 Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0 1 Belo Reserved 0 3 23 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 4 i 25 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 5 i 27 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 6 29 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 7 31 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 8 j 33 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 3 i 35 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x1022 10 f 37 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 11 39 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 12 415 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 13 FFT iteration 0 32 767 240 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 20 Parameters CSP File No F37 Remote 1
99. 08 PRI Q101 1731 Data Tables on page 82 4 30709 10 Seconds hsec 0000 2359 5 30711 12 0000 5999 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 221 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Trend Log Results Element Modbus Element Name Range Comment No Address 6 30713 14 User selected parameter 1 The values of parameters that were configured 7 30715 16 User selected parameter 2 8 30717 18 User selected parameter 3 9 30719 20 User selected parameter 4 10 30721 22 User selected parameter 5 11 30723 24 User selected parameter 6 12 30725 26 User selected parameter 7 13 30727 28 User selected parameter 8 14 30729 30 User selected parameter 9 15 30731 32 User selected parameter 10 16 30733 34 User selected parameter 11 7 30735 36 User selected parameter 12 18 30737 38 User selected parameter 13 19 30739 40 User selected parameter 14 20 30741 42 User selected parameter 15 21 30743 44 User selected parameter 16 222 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Min Max Log Configuration Read back Select Parameters CSP File No N26 Remote 1 0 BT 13 CIP Assy Inst 29 Write 30 Read No of Elements 9 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Min Max
100. 09 317 Appendix C 318 Sample Applications The message configuration for writing the new configuration table to the power monitor is shown below Message Configuration msgwriteNew x Configuration Communication Tag Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag Download 0 zc New Tag Number Of Elements 26 E Destination Element N 30 0 O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 26 Q Error Code Timed Out Extended Error Code Cancel Apply Help Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Timer2 delays evaluating the write status until the Powermonitor 3000 unit has reset This rung evaluates the results of writing the new configuration The Failed flag asserts if the WriteNew message instruction errors out or if the GetStatus instruction errors out twice or if the write status indicates bad data in the download table If there is a bad data indication verify that word 0 of the download table is the correct Powermonitor 3000 password that word 1 is a value of 31 decimal and that at least one or more words beginning with word 3 are non zero Then try toggling start again Counter increments if the GetStatus message errors out The logic will wait until Timer2 times out and then retry the GetStatus message When the operation i
101. 122 In EtherNet IP and ControlNet units Instances 1 and 2 comprise the Class 1 connection As in DeviceNet units Instance 1 contains 6 integer elements of input data and Instance 2 contains 2 integer elements of output data You may configure Instance 1 See the Remote I O DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet I O Messaging Parameters table on page 191 for the content and format of the I O messaging data tables The power monitor supports a number of different communication networks and protocols Each of these has unique characteristics and methods The information in this section is provided to assist you in designing and implementing data messaging with the power monitor by discussing in detail the unique properties of the communication options Refer also to the Sample ladder diagrams in Appendix C Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Serial Communication Options The native RS 485 and optional RS 232 communication ports provide basic serial asynchronous communication capabilities The RS 485 communication standard supports multi drop communication between a master station and up to 31 slaves on a single network up to 1219 m 4000 ft long For satisfactory communication performance however we recommend connecting no more than 8 12 power monitors to an RS 485 multi drop network The optional RS 232 communication port has several configuratio
102. 12am 1 1am 23 11pm 5 40106 Tancem nate 0 59 0 The internal clock does not adjust for daylight saving time 6 40107 Time seconds 0 59 0 7 40108 Time hundredths of seconds 0 99 0 Ona write the maximum value for day depends on the values written to month and the year 2 The data and time default values are set if one of the following three conditions occur When the device is first powered up at the factory A device power up following the depletion of the real time clock power source In the event of an abnormal condition which may cause the real time clock to contain values which are not in the valid range The date and time are not set to the default values when Restore Factory Defaults is performed via the display module or communication port Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 195 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Advanced Device Configuration Parameters CSP File No N12 Remote 1 0 BT 26 CIP Assy Inst 8 Write 9 Read No of Elements 25 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Advanced Device Configuration Element Modbus Element name Range Units Default Comment No Address Value 0 40201 Password 0 9999 0 Required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 40202 New password 0 9999 1 1 no action 0 9999 new
103. 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 43 Chapter 3 44 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations 3 Change the value of the parameter by pressing the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys until the desired parameter value is displayed Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side remain solid and the parameter being modified is still flashing 4 After the desired parameter value is displayed press the Enter key to write the new value to the master module and set the display module back to Program mode Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side are now flashing and the parameter being modified is now solid If you begin to edit the wrong parameter press the Escape key This returns the original parameter value does not modify the master module and returns the display module to Program mode Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side are flashing again and the parameter being modified is now solid Setting a Default Screen To set the current display module view as the default screen press the Enter key The display reads Set Default with No flashing in the second line Press the Down Arrow key to change No to Yes Press the Enter key again to confirm your selection The display module now returns to the screen you have selected on power up or after 30 minutes of inactivity on the display module Issuing Commands The display module allows you to issue commands to the power monitor These commands include relay and KYZ
104. 1928 57 55 INT 2 99 2 Examples Example 1 You want to log kWh every 15 minutes and you want to know how many records the log contains and how long a time that covers The Trend Log Depth Formula applies to this example Fill and hold mode allows logging the most records Logging only 1 parameter per record the formula results in a total of 17 640 records after rounding down Logging every 15 minutes this log configuration will log 6 1 months of kW data Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Data Logging Chapter 7 Example 2 Another user wants to log several parameters every 5 minutes indefinitely retrieving the records within one week after the end of each month He saves the retrieved data and creates trend graphs on his PC The question is how many parameters may be monitored The Parameters per Record Formula applies to this example The total log depth of 10 944 is based on the log duration and interval 31 days per month 7 days 24 hours per day 60 minutes per hour 5 minute logging interval Overwrite mode F 1 allows you to read the log any time without losing any data In this example P the number of parameters that may be recorded is 3 From this example you can see that the trend log can log 3 parameters every 5 minutes in a 38 day sliding window Setting up the Trend Log You configure the Trend Log by performing a table write t
105. 276 Comment Refer to Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status Parameters Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name Comment No 245 Logging interval Referto Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select Parameters 246 Logging mode 247 Total records logged 248 Trend log param 1 249 Trend log param 2 250 Trend log param 3 251 Trend log param 4 252 Trend log param 5 253 Trend log param 6 254 Trend log param 7 255 Trend log param 8 256 Trend log param 9 257 Trend log param 10 258 Trend log param 11 259 Trend log param 12 260 Trend log param 13 261 Trend log param 14 262 Trend log param 15 263 Trend log param 16 264 Enable disable Min max log Referto Min Max Log Configuration Read back Select Parameters 265 Timestamp of last min max clear year 266 Timestamp of last min max clear Month day 267 Timestamp of last min max clear Hour min 268 Timestamp of last min max clear Second hsec 269 Enable disable save status input Referto Event Log Configuration Read back Record Select Parameters changes to Event log 270 Number of events in the event log 271 Write error status File BT Inst No Refer to Write Error Status Parameters 272 Write error status Parameter number Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P
106. 3 Refer to the description of the Modbus RTU protocol beginning on page 92 for further information The Ethernet port supports up to 64 concurrent connections The power monitor supports the following network requests Ethernet Message Types Message type CIP PLC 5 Typed Write CIP PLC 5 Typed Read CIP Generic Assembly Object class 04 Get amp Set Attribute Single for Attribute 3 data CIP Generic Assembly Object class 04 Get Attribute Single for Attribute 3 size CIP SLC 500 Typed Write CIP SLC 500 Typed Read CIP Data Table Read using CSP PCCC addressing for example F15 0 CIP Data Table Write CSP PCCC PLC 5 Typed Write CSP PCCC PLC 5 Typed Read CSP PCCC Protected Typed Logical Read 2 address fields CSP PCCC Protected Typed Logical Read 3 address fields CSP PCCC Protected Typed Logical Write 2 address fields CSP PCCC Protected Typed Logical Write 3 address fields CSP PCCC Word Range Read CSP PCCC Word Range Write CSP PCCC Diagnostic Loopback Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Ethernet PCCC CSP protocol You may set up messaging from legacy controllers such as PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers to a power monitor with optional Ethernet communication by using peer to peer message instructions In the message setup specify the controller data table address size of the data in elements and the channel the message
107. 30 39 Data Point 31 40 Data Point 32 41 Data Point 33 42 Data Point 34 43 Data Point 35 44 Data Point 36 45 Data Point 37 46 Data Point 38 47 Data Point 39 48 Data Point 40 Ag Data Point 41 50 Data Point 42 51 Data Point 43 52 z Data Point 44 53 Data Point 45 54 Data Point 46 55 Data Point 47 56 Data Point 48 57 Data Point 49 58 Data Point 50 254 8192 8191 Comment The DeviceNet network returns only 20 data points per read Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Advanced Metering Configuration Parameters CSP File No N47 Remote l 0 BT 19 CIP Assy Inst 58 Write 59 Read No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type MB only Advanced Metering Configuration Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration returns 1 1 Meter result set 0 2 0 Refer to Advanced Metering Options on page 54 2 Reserved 0 0 Must be 0 on a write returns 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 255 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 43 63 Parameters CSP File No F48 Remote 1 0 BT 45 CIP Assy Inst 60 No of Elements User Co
108. 404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Transient Capture Clear Read back Data Select Parameters CSP File No N45 Remote 1 0 BT 17 CIP Assy Inst 55 Write 56 Read No of Elements 13 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M8 only Applies to Transient Capture Results Parameters on page 252 Transient Capture Clear Read back Data Select Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 1 Dnet unique write 32 768 32 767 0 Refer to DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier on page 103 identifier 3 Channel number lied 1 4 Block number See page 90 1 5 Read back mode 0 2 0 6 Clear command 0 3 0 7 Reserved 0 0 8 Reserved 0 0 9 Reserved 0 0 10 Capture clear status 0 63 11 Capture ready status 0 63 12 Reserved 0 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 251 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Transient Capture Results Parameters CSP File No N46 Remote 1 0 BT 60 CIP Assy Inst 57 No of Elements 29 DeviceNet network only 59 All other communication types User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M8 only Transient Capture Results Element Name Timestamp Month day Hour minute Second hsec Element Modbus
109. 5 0 Not used e e e Voltage Volts e e e 2 Current Amps s s 3 Voltage unbalance Percent e 4 Current unbalance e 5 Neutral current Amps e 6 W Watts 7 VAR VARs e 8 VA VA e e e 9 Total true PF Percent e 10 Total disp PF e e e 11 Total dist PF e 12 W demand Watts e 13 VAR demand VARs e 14 VA demand VA e 15 Amp demand Amps e e e 16 Projected amp demand Amps e e 17 Projected W Demand Watts e e 18 Projected VAR Demand VARs e e 19 Projected VA Demand VA e e e 20 Frequency Hz e e e 21 Phase rotation 22 Crest factor voltage Volts e e e 23 Crest factor current Amps e e Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 129 Chapter5 Setpoint Programming and Operation Setpoint Types Setpoint Type Description Units M4 MG M8 M5 24 GestfatonM Ams le Te 25 IEEE THD voltage Volts e o o 26 IEEE THD current Amps e o o 27 IEEE THD 14 Amps e 28 IEC THD voltage Volts e o o 29 IEC THD current Amps be 30 IEC THD 14 Amps e e 31 Status input 1 e e 32 Status input 2 e e e 33 Any status input hd 31 Setpoint 1 time accumulator Seconds e e Te 35 Setpoint 2 time accumulator e e e 36 Setpoint 3 time accumulator e e e 37 Setpontz4time accumulator le e 38
110. 65 ms M6 65 ms 70 ms M8 80 ms 85 ms Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 61 Chapter3 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations 62 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Chapter Configuring Communication Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication The communication features of the Powermonitor 3000 unit make it uniquely suited to integrate electric power usage information into your industrial control and information systems Every power monitor is equipped with a native RS 485 communication port and you can select optional communication that facilitate seamless integration with a variety of industrial networks The optional communication choices include the following e Serial an RS 232 communication port Remote I O allows you to connect your power monitor as a quarter rack to any remote I O scanner device DeviceNet a port with standard DeviceNet functionality lets your power monitor integrate into an open standard multi vendor architecture e Ethernet a standard 10BaseT port allowing easy integration into factory floor and office information systems ControlNet with NAP port and two BNC connectors for connection to single or redundant media applications This chapter covers configuration and operation of the native and optional communication ports Refer to the Installation Instructions publication 1404 INOO7 for installation wiring and connection instructions The
111. 9 The counter value may be read by using the display module or communication to provide a value proportional to the accumulated value of the meter connected to the status input You may select the input counter values as Trend Log parameters You may clear either or both status input counters by using the display module or by writing the appropriate command to the Advanced Device Configuration table Demand Period Synchronization You may synchronize the Powermonitor 3000 demand period with a utility end of interval EOD pulse by wiring a dry contact controlled by the EOI pulse into Status Input 2 and setting the appropriate demand configuration parameters Refer to Chapter 3 for more information about demand Setpoint Inputs You may use one or both status inputs to activate setpoint control Use an equal or not equal setpoint evaluation condition with status inputs 141 Chapter6 O Operations Event Logging of Status Inputs You may choose whether or not to record status input transitions in the Event Log If you were using a status input to read a KYZ meter pulse for example recording transitions into the Event Log would quickly fill the log and overwrite potentially important event information On the other hand you may use the status input to detect a discrete condition that you want logged Refer to Event Log Configuration Options on page 144 142 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Chapter
112. 95 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 10 90 172 Default Domain Name Primary Name Serve 0 0 0 r User Provided Web Pages Starting Data File Number a N Pages E Secondary Name Server 0 0 0 0 ee r Protocol Control BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 1m 15000 M SNMP ServerEnsble J SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout x 15 3000 IV HTTP Server Enable v Auto Negotiate Port Setting 40 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex lt i Inactivity Timeout x Min 30 Contact Localion OK Cancel Appl Help Data Tables The MicroLogix 1400 data table N111 is the destination table for the Read message and N211 is the source for the Write message Table N211 contains the following values for setting the date and time in a power monitor with a password of 0 to January 1 2003 at 12 00 midnight Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 297 Appendix C Sample Applications 4 Data File N211 dec WRITEDTIME Offset Kis N211 0 Radix Decimal Swa touwns i Desc N211 Properties Usage Help The Read Clock from the Powermonitor 3000 unit and Set Clock from the MicroLogix 1400 controller bits are used to initiate the messages and are reset when the message instruction either completes successfully or an error occurs In your application code if the message rungs are controlled program
113. Baud Rate N13 3 16 bit Integer Single Element Password N60 0 16 bit Integer 332 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Example Screens The first example screen lets you read and write date and time to and from the power monitor Entering the correct password default 0 permits single element writes until 30 minutes of inactivity has elapsed Screens w luWwr zsi h5xaJueo Agit ibo Lanegan Fog ced Dune ET mw SS i KK TH Tk nLT 3 tet hes Em E DES me Ege onewe MEME FEEE m Zo C a mm eed Cc EN T Do LL 3 I k 8 8g Cc B 8 li H The second example is a screen that may be used to view and set selected configuration parameters in the power monitor Screens OH WA Ewe xuHe Acoxcton Language Eng nies Bier 18 9 rrro o c D 0 SS Ake KK TOOTS Om ERR ee ENS EN O ENS 0 0 EN 000 ESOS E i Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 333 Appendix C Sample Applications 334 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Product Approvals Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Appendix D Technical Specifications Powermonitor 3000 units have the following approvals and certifications EtherNet IP Conformance Testing All products equipped with
114. Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 Allen Bradley Catalog Numbers 1404 M4 1404 M5 1404 M6 1404 M8 User Manual Rockwell Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment o
115. DD format e End date in YY MM DD format e Record number 0 12 The Time of Use Records Reactive Energy and Demand and Time of Use Records Apparent Energy and Demand tables are identical except that one contains reactive energy and demand TOU data and the other contains apparent energy and demand TOU data Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Chapter 8 Advanced Features In this chapter we discuss major features that for the most part are found only in the Powermonitor 3000 M6 and M8 models The exception is that basic harmonic analysis is supported in the M4 and M5 models Oscillography Oscillography captures waveforms of the voltage and current present at the power monitor input terminals A client application reads oscillography records by using the indexed read method The main features of oscillography include the following e Simultaneous capture of all seven voltage and current channels e Non volatile storage of up to 8 M6 or 2 M8 captures e Configurable sampling rate up to 5 4 kHz or 90 samples per cycle at 60 Hz e Captures may hold up to 408 cycles of data per channel at 60 Hz e Configurable data resolution of 13 bit w sign or 7 bit w sign e Configurable pre trigger means the capture includes waveform information prior to the triggering event e Setpoints or communication may trigger oscillogram captures e All communication options support oscillography You may choose to use RSPower RSPo
116. DeviceNet communication port Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 DeviceNet Message Types The power monitor supports the following DeviceNet message types DeviceNet Message Types Group CAN Identifier Message Type Field 1 01101Xxxxxx Slave s 1 0 COS or Cyclic message 0111 1Xxxxxx Slaves 1 0 poll response or COS Cyclic ACK message 2 10xxxxxx010 Master s COS Cyclic ACK message 10yyyyyy011 Slave s explicit unconnected response message 10Xxxxxx100 Master s explicit request message 10xxxxxx101 Master s I O poll command COS Cyclic message 10500001 10 Group 2 only unconnected explicit message request 1000000111 Duplicate MAC ID check message 3 11101Xxxxxx Unconnected explicit response 1111 OXxxxxx Unconnected explicit request 4 Not used xxxxxx Destination MAC ID node no 6 bit field yyyyyy Source MAC ID node no 6 it field 101 Chapter4 Communication DeviceNet Class Services As a group 2 slave device the power monitor supports the following class and instance services DeviceNet Class Services Service Name Service Code Service Code hex decimal Reset 05 05 Get Attribute Single OE 14 Set_Attribute_Single 10 16 Allocate Group 2 ldentifier Set 4B 75 Release Group 2 ldentifier Set 4C 76 DeviceNet Object Classes The power moni
117. FE PM3K CNT C 2 n AB CONTROLNE 9 Download the revised program to the controller 10 Run RSNetworx for ControlNet software to schedule the connection between the controller and the power monitor Refer to the RSNetWorx for ControlNet documentation for assistance The ControlNet power monitor supports up to 64 concurrent Class 1 connections to instance 1 and one concurrent connection to instance 2 114 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Communicating to a Powermonitor 3000 Unit from an SLC Controller through 1747 KFC15 ControlNet Module Connect the 1747 KFC15 module according to your instruction manual documentation There should be a connection from the KFC15 RS232 port to Channel 0 of the SLC controller For this example the communication and configuration of the channel 0 and the KFC15 module were the following e KFC15 DF1 station address 7 e KFC15 and SLC baud rate at 19200 e KFC15 and SLC Full duplex e KFC15 and SLC Parity None e KFC15 and SLC Handshaking None e KFC15 Diagnostic Command Execution Disabled e KFC15 Duplicate detect Off e KFC15 and SLC Error Detect CRC e KFC15 Number of Retries 3 e KFC15 DF1 ACK Time Out 3 2 Since it is easier to configure and much faster to run full duplex mode is the preferred mode of operation Use half duplex mode only if you do not have a c
118. Flow Control Handshaking Data flow control for RS 232 RS 485 port 0 None 1 Hardware RTS CTS 40408 RTS On Delay 0 9995 ms 40410 40411 Inter character timeout Specifies the minimum delay between characters that indicates the end of a message packet 0 3 5 character times 40412 Error checking Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 0 CRC 1 BCC 203 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables RS 232 Element Modbus Element name Range Default Comment No Address Value 12 40413 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 13 40414 14 40415 15 40416 16 40417 17 40418 18 40419 19 40420 The default address is the same as the Device ID which is assigned at the factory and can be found printed on the white label on the side of the master module The device ID is incremented for each device 204 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No F15 Remote l 0 BT 38 CIP Assy Inst 14 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result Element Modbus Element name Units
119. Functionality The power monitor provides harmonic data to help you understand this important element of power quality in your facility Each model provides a different level of harmonic information The Harmonic Analysis Functionality table provides an overview of the harmonic analysis available in each model You may access all harmonic data by using communication The display module can access average values of the parameters as indicated in the DM column Harmonic data DM M4 M6 MS Per Per Avg Of Avg Of Avg M5 Current Voltage Current Voltage Channel Channel Channels Channels IEEE Total Harmonic Distortion THD e e e e e e IEC Distortion Index DIN e e e e e e Crest Factor e e e e e Telephone Interference Factor TIF e e e e K factor e e e e e e IEEE 519 Total Demand Distortion TDD e e e IEEE 519 Pass Fail e e e e Harmonic distortion harmonics 1 41 e Harmonic magnitude harmonics 1 41 Harmonic distortion harmonics 42 63 Harmonic magnitude harmonics 42 63 IEEE THD and DIN 166 Both of these total harmonic distortion calculation methods provide a summary indication of the amount of distortion due to harmonics present in a system The standard IEEE definition of harmonic distortion is Total Harmonic Distortion THD and is computed for each channel as follows z Where 2 H F H mag
120. Integer 14 40415 Accumulated time 1 21 Exponent 15 40716 Clear time 0 1 0 accumulator command 1 On the M6 and MB setpoint 19 and 20 default to detect voltage sag and voltage swell See Sag and Swell page 174 List of Setpoint Types Parameters Applies to Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status Parameters on page 215 PM3000 Type See table List of Setpoint Types Param Parameter Name M4 M Comment No M5 8 0 Not used e Disables the setpoint 1 Voltage e Refer to Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result Parameters 2 Current bd e 3 Voltage unbalance e Referto Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results Parameters 4 Current unbalance e 5 Neutral current e 6 W e Refer to Metering Power Results Parameters 7 VAR e e 8 VA 9 Total true PF e e Refer to Metering Power Factor Results Parameters 10 Total disp PF e e 11 Total dist PF 12 W demand e e Refer to Metering Demand Results Parameters 13 VAR demand 14 VA demand e 15 Amp demand e e 16 Projected amp demand e e 17 Projected W Demand e e 18 Projected VAR Demand e 19 Projected VA Demand e 20 Frequency e e Refer to Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result Parameters 21 Phase rotation e Refer to Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results Parameters 216 Public
121. Level A Pie i f e Level 1 if a 4 Level 3 4 Display Program m Previous Item cS 4 Level 4 y ag Within Current Level Program J Password Level 2 Display Display Display Metering Harmonics Logs Level 3 Metering Metering Metering Harmonics Event Min Max VI Fl2 Power E Power L1 L2 L3 N0 Log Log Level 4 s Event Most Recent Volts L1 N Watts L1 kW Hours Forward IEEE XI DV vent n Volts L2 N Watts L2 kW Hours Reverse HE THD i Volts L3 N Watts L3 kW Hours Net IEC TRD V Volts 3Ph Ave L N Total Power kVARh Forward IEC THD a Amps L1 VARS L1 kVARh Reverse Erost FACEN m Oldest Amps L2 VARS L2 kVARh Net Crest Fact Amps L3 VARS L3 kVAh Net TEN Amps 3Ph Ave Tot React Pwr kAh Net Iri Amps Neutral VAL Demand Amps IEEE 519 DD Volts L1 L2 VA L2 Demand Amps Max IEEE 519 P F Volts L2 L3 VAL3 Demand Watts Amps L Unbal Current VA Ave 3 Ph otal Disp PF IEC THD L3 V Volts L1 L3 Tot App Pwr Demand Watts Max Amps L2 Pos Seq Volts Demand I Dist PF L1 IEC THD L4 I Volts 3Ph Ave L L True PF L1 Demand VAR Amps L3 Neg Seq Volts Demand W Dist PFL2 Crest Factor L1 V Frequency True PF L2 Demand VAR Max Average Amps Unbal Volts Demand VAR Dist PFL3 Crest Factor L1 Phase Rotation True PF L3 Demand VA Volts L1 N Average Frequency Demand VA otal Dist PF Crest Factor L2 V Volts Pos Seq Tot True PF Demand VA Max Volts L2 N Watts L1 Projected Demand IEEE THDL1V Crest Factor L2 Volts Neg Seq Displ PF L1 Projected Demand I Volts L3 N Wat
122. Log Configuration Read back Select Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value select returns 1 1 40902 Min max parameter to read 0 73 1 Refer to Interfacing with the Min Max Log 7 40903 Read backmode 0 4 0 by Using Communication on page 154 3 40904 Enable disable Min max log 0 1 1 4 40905 Clear min max log 0 1 0 5 40906 Timestamp of last min max clear year 1998 2097 month day 6 40907 hour minute 0101 1231 7 40908 second hsec 0000 2359 8 40909 0000 5999 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 223 Appendix A Min Max Log Parameter List Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Applies to Min Max Log Configuration Read back Select Parameters on page 223 Min Max Log Results Parameters on page 227 PM3000 Type All Min Max Log Parameter List Param Parameter Name Comment No 0 L1 Current Refer to Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result Parameters 1 L2 Current 2 L3 Current 3 Avg Current 4 L1 N Voltage 5 L2 N Voltage 6 L3 N Voltage 7 Avg L N Voltage 8 L1 L2 Voltage 9 L2 L3 Voltage 10 L3 L1 Voltage 11 Avg L L Voltage 12 Frequency last cycle 13 L4 Current Referto Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results Parameters 14 Positive Sequence Current 15 Negative Sequence Current 16 Current unbalance 17 Positive Sequence Voltage 18 Negative
123. MASTR 1 DF1 3 Click New and enter a name for the DDE OPC topic The example uses DF1_1404_123 292 Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Browse through the tree in the Data Source dialog to locate your power monitor and click its icon to select it DDE OPC Topic Configuration 00 Workstation AB MASTR p 14 1404 xx DFA 5 Click the Data Collection tab select SLC 5 03 as the Processor Type leaving the rest of the settings as default DDE OPC Topic Configuration PLC 2 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 293 Appendix C Sample Applications 6 Click Apply and confirm when prompted 7 Click the Advanced Communication tab to verify the driver and path settings in the topic and click Done DDE OPC Topic Configuration DF1 1404 123 AB_MASTR 1 DFT Sta OCOMI The Microsoft Excel Sample Worksheet The sample worksheet uses Visual Basic for Applications VBA macros to read and set the date and time in the power monitor Sample Worksheet N Microsoft Excel SimpleDdeWriteE xample xls Date and Time Elem Name Password Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Hundredths of second 294 Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 The range Sheet1 D7 D14 is the write sour
124. No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 40801 Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 40802 DeviceNet unique write 32 768 0 Refer to DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier on page 103 identifier 32 767 2 40803 Reserved 0 0 Must be 0 on a write returns 0 3 40804 Read back mode 0 6 2 Refer to Setting up the Trend Log on page 151 and Reading Data from the Trend Log on page 152 4 40805 Logging interval 1 3600 900 Expressed in seconds 15 min 1 synchronize logging with demand interval 0 disable periodic logging 5 40806 Logging mode 0 1 0 0 Overwrite 1 Fill and hold 6 40807 Clear trend log command 0 1 0 0 no action 1 clear trend log returns 0 7 40808 Total records logged x 1000 0 999 Number of records element 7 x 1000 element 8 8 40809 Total records logged x 1 0 999 9 40810 Reserved 0 Must be 0 on a write returns 0 0 40811 Parameter 1 selection 1 301 122 Refer to Setting up the Trend Log on page 151 Defaults 1 40812 Parameter 2 selection 0 301 126 Parameter 1 122 Net Kilowatt hours 12 40813 Parameter 3 selection 100 Parameter 2 126 Net kVAR hours 13 40814 Parameter 4 selection 0 parameter SEO Demand ats 14 40815 Parameter 5 selection
125. No Address 0 1 2 252 Range 0000 1231 0000 2359 0000 5999 Comment Capture trigger timestamp see page 82 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Transient Capture Results Element Modbus Element Name Range No Address 3 Capture 1 6 4 Channel number 1 5 Block number 1 70 for DeviceNet 1 28 for all other comms options 6 Reserved 0 7 Unique Transient Capture ID 0 30 000 8 Reserved 0 9 Data Point 1 8192 8191 10 Data Point 2 11 Data Point 3 12 Data Point 4 13 Data Point 5 14 Data Point 6 15 Data Point 7 16 Data Point 8 17 Data Point 9 18 Data Point 10 19 Data Point 11 20 Data Point 12 21 Data Point 13 22 Data Point 14 23 Data Point 15 24 Data Point 16 25 Data Point 17 26 Data Point 18 2 Data Point 19 28 Data Point 20 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Comment Refer to Reading Transient Capture Data on page 182 253 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Transient Capture Results Element Modbus Element Name No Address 29 Data Point 21 30 Data Point 22 31 Data Point 23 32 Data Point 24 33 Data Point 25 34 Data Point 26 35 Data Point 27 36 Data Point 28 37 Data Point 29 38 Data Point
126. O01F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C ControlLogix Tags Used Tag Name Type of Description Table Elems msgReadOld MESSAGE N A Read Existing Config N30 msgWriteNew MESSAGE N A Write New Config N30 msgGetStatus MESSAGE N A Write Status N3 Start BOOL 1 Start Operation Failed BOOL 1 Failure Flag Success BOOL 1 Success Flag Oneshot_1 BOOL 1 One shot Oneshot_2 BOOL 1 One shot Timer TIMER 1 Inter message Delay Timer2 TIMER 1 PM3000 Reset Time Counter1 COUNTER 1 Message Retry Default INT 26 Default Configuration Custom INT 26 Custom Configuration Old INT 26 Previous Config Download INT 26 New Config to Write Pwd INT 1 PM3000 Password Status INT 2 Write Status Select INT 1 User Selection You must enter data into the Default and Custom tags Refer to User configured Data Table on page 121 for the structure and rules for the User configured Table Setup data table and its default settings See Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Parameters on page 268 for parameters that may be included in the User Configured Table Setup IMPORTANT Words 0 3 of the User Configurable Table Setup array must have specific values e Word 0 power monitor password default 0 e Word 1 must be one of the following decimal values 31 for CSP PCCC 10r 37 for CIP e Word 2 zero 0 for writes to table 31 For conf
127. P 1 0 connection 110 IP CIP protocol 106 more information 112 PCCC CSP protocol 105 performance features 19 web access 112 event log 143 configuration options 144 configuring using communication 146 reading data using communication 147 viewing using the display module 144 event logging of status inputs 142 expressing data 82 expressing metered data 29 F file data values 309 forced operation 139 frequently asked questions 341 H harmonic analysis 166 configuring 171 crest factor 167 harmonic distortion 171 harmonic magnitude 170 IEEE THD and DIN 166 IEEE 519 TDD and IEEE 519 pass fail 170 K factor 169 reading data 172 reading individual values 173 TIF 168 harmonic distortion 171 harmonic magnitude 170 hours selection 156 1 0 operations 137 1 0 type communication 90 IEEE 519 Pass Fail 170 IEEE 519 TDD 170 IEEE THD and DIN 166 indexed reads 98 issuing commands 44 K k factor 169 key functions 39 L load factor 177 reading the log 178 master module 14 communication 14 configuration 14 metering accuracy class 29 metering functionality 27 configurable energy counter rollover 35 demand calculation 35 energy results 34 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 expressing metered data in the display module 29 metering accuracy class 29 power factor results 33 power results 32 projected demand calculation 36 symmetrical component analysis results 31 viewing metered data using the display module 29
128. P address 1 octet 4 7 41908 Time zone 12 12 10 8 41909 Time set update interval 0 60 s 32 766 9 41910 SNTP IP address 2 octet 1 0 255 0 SNTP IP address 2 is a back up server address when 10 41911 SNTP IP address 2 octet 2 0 the first address fails 11 41912 SNTP IP address 2 octet 3 0 12 41913 SNTP IP address 2 octet 4 0 13 41914 SNTP IP address 3 octet 1 0 SNTP IP address 3 is a back up server address when 14 41915 SNTP IP address 3 octet 2 the secnond address fails 15 41916 SNTP IP address 3 octet 3 0 16 41917 SNTP IP address 3 octet 4 0 17 41918 Reserved 0 0 Reserved for future use 18 NI Reserved 0 0 On a write only a 0 is accepted On a read always 19 41920 Reserved 0 0 returns 0 260 Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Controller Command Parameters CSP File No N53 Remote l 0 BT CIP Assy Inst 67 No of Elements 1 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Write only PM3000 Type Ethernet Controller Command No Value 0 Refer to Network Demand Time Bits 0 Configuration on page 55 Daylight Saving Time Configuration Parameters CSP File No N54 Remote 1 0 BT 47 CIP Assy Inst 68 Write 69 Read No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Daylight Saving
129. PLAY STATUS ACCURACY CLASS Metering Accuracy Class Model Class 1 Class 0 5 Class 0 2 M4 Stadad NotAvalabe NotAvalabe M5 Standard Optional M6 Standard Optional M8 Standard Optional Expressing Metered Data on the Display Module The display module displays scaled metered data in its basic units such as volts amps watts Prefixes such as K or M are used to denote multipliers of 1 000 kilo and 1 000 000 mega The display module expresses power factor as a percentage with a positive value indicating leading and a negative value indicating lagging The display module displays values to a maximum precision of five significant digits Viewing Metered Data by Using the Display Module The display module makes it easy to view the metering data produced by the power monitor Refer to display module functionality later in this chapter for information on use of the display module 29 Chapter 3 30 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Voltage Current and Frequency Results Line to line voltage results L1 L2 L2 L3 and L3 L1 are calculated for all wiring modes Line to neutral voltage results L1 N L2 N and L3 N are calculated in wye and single phase wiring modes only In delta wiring modes line to neutral voltages return a zero value Average line to line Avg L L and line to neutral Avg L N voltage results return the mathematical average of the three line to line or line to
130. Power is off or the power monitor is not online Flashing Green Network status is OK no connections established Steady Green Network status is OK connections established Hashing Red Recoverable communication failure port is restarting Steady Red Non recoverable communication error check wiring and configuration parameters EtherNet IP Optional Communication catalog numbers ending in ENT Status Indicator Indicator Color Indicator State and Communication Condition LNK Off No valid physical Ethernet connection Steady Green Valid physical Ethernet connection ACT Strobing or Power monitor transmitting onto Fthernet Solid Yellow F1 off Not Used F2 off Not Used NETWORK STATUS Off No power Flashing Green No established connections Steady Green Connected has at least one established connection Flashing Red Connection timeout one or more connections to this device has timed out Steady Red Duplicate IP the IP address assigned to this device is already in use Flashing Green Red Selftest this device is performing a power up self test Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Product Description Chapter 2 ControlNet Optional Communication catalog numbers ending in CNT Status Indicator CHAN A and CHAN B Status Indicator Color Indicator State and Communication C
131. Readback Mode The data client uses the indexed read method to read harmonic analysis and individual harmonic data The options include the following e Auto increment 0 increments the channel after each read of the Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More table This also controls the read back channel for individual harmonics results tables If you use the auto increment mode read any desired individual harmonic data for the current channel before the next read of the Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More table e Manual increment 1 successive reads of the Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More table return harmonic results from the current channel As with other indexed reads DeviceNet and Ethernet networks optional communication support only manual increment read back mode so that the client must write a read back select message to change the channel returned in the results table For all other communication options auto increment Read back mode provides the highest communication throughput Reading Harmonic Analysis Data The power monitor presents harmonic analysis results in the Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More table This read only table contains 9 floating point elements in the M4 and M5 models and 10 floating point elements in the M6 and M8 models The table contains the following parameters e Channel number the voltage or current channel being returned See above e
132. Results THD Crest Factor and More Parameters Param Parameter Name No 53 V1 IEEE THD 54 I1 96 IEEE THD 55 V2 IEEE THD 56 I2 96 IEEE THD 57 V3 IEEE THD 58 I3 96 IEEE THD 59 I4 96 IEEE THD 60 V1 96 IEC thd DIN 61 I1 96 IEC thd DIN 62 V2 96 IEC thd DIN 63 I2 96 IEC thd DIN 64 V3 96 IEC thd DIN 65 I3 96 IEC thd DIN 66 14 96 IEC thd DIN 67 V1 Crest Factor 68 I1 Crest Factor 69 V2 Crest Factor 70 I2 Crest Factor 71 V3 Crest Factor 72 3 Crest Factor 73 14 Crest Factor 226 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Min Max Log Results Parameters CSP File No F27 Remote 1 0 BT 28 CIP Assy Inst 31 No of Elements 11 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Min Max Log Results Element Modbus Element Name Range Comment No Address 0 30801 02 Parameter being returned 1 73 Refer to Reading Data from the Trend Log on page 152 1 30803 04 MIN value for parameter 999 9x102 999 9x102 2 30805 06 MAX value for parameter 999 9x102 999 9x102 3 30807 08 MIN timestamp year 1998 2097 4 30809 10 EE 0101 1231 5 30811 12 sec hsec 0000 2359 6 30813 14 0000 5999 7 30815 16 MAX timestamp year 1998 2097 8 30817 18 a 0101
133. SLC 500 or ControlLogix controllers use message instructions that address the DF1 master port number the power monitor node address the power monitor data table address for example F17 0 Metering Power Results and the length of the file in elements The target file must be of the same data type as the power monitor data table for example integer or floating point 91 Chapter 4 Communication IMPORTANT Because the floating point word order in the ControlLogix controller is reversed from that in the power monitor your ladder logic needs to reverse the word order so the data may be interpreted correctly The swap byte SWPB instruction performs this function Because of the DF1 protocol s inherent handshaking the completion of each message may be used to activate the next message without any additional programmed delay Modbus RTU slave protocol We assume that you are familiar with Modbus communication The information provided in this section is general rather than specific Refer to glossary at the end of this publication for definitions of unfamiliar terms For more information about the Modbus RTU Slave protocol see the Modbus Protocol Specification available from http www modbus org Modbus is a half duplex master slave communication protocol The network master reads and writes coils and registers and obtains diagnostic information of the multiple slaves The Modbus protocol allows a single
134. Sequence Voltage 19 Voltage unbalance 20 Average frequency 224 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Min Max Log Parameter List Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Param Parameter Name Comment No 21 L1 Real Power Referto Metering Power Results Parameters 22 L2 Real Power 23 L3 Real Power 24 Total Real Power 25 L1 Reactive Power 26 L2 Reactive Power 2 L3 Reactive Power 28 Total Reactive Power 29 L1 Apparent Power 30 L2 Apparent Power 31 L3 Apparent Power 32 Total Apparent Power 33 Demand Current Referto Metering Demand Results Parameters 34 Demand Power 35 Demand Reactive Power 36 Demand Apparent Power 37 Projected Demand 38 Projected Demand W 39 Projected Demand VAR 40 Projected Demand VA 41 L1 True Power Factor Referto Metering Power Factor Results Parameters 42 L2 True Power Factor 43 L3 True Power Factor 44 Three phase True PF 45 L1 Displacement Power Factor 46 L2 Displacement Power Factor 47 L3 Displacement Power Factor 48 Three phase Displacement PF Referto Metering Power Factor Results Parameters 49 L1 Distortion Power Factor 50 L2 Distortion Power Factor 51 L3 Distortion Power Factor 52 Three phase Distortion PF Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 225 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Min Max Log Parameter List Comment Refer to Harmonic
135. T 8 arrays 288 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Read clock from PM3K 1E ContrlLogix Tags Sample Applications Ladder Diagram 0 J E Set_clock_from_PM3K End MSG Type CIP Generic I CEN Message Control Read Time t CDN gt ER gt Read_Time DN Read clock from PM3K lt U Read Time ER MSG Type CIP Generic t CEN Message Control Set_Time CDN gt L CER gt Set_Time DN Set_clock_from_PM3K U gt QU Set Time ER Appendix C Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 289 Appendix C Sample Applications Message Setup Dialogs Message Configuration Head Time Get Attribute Single v Hep Class fa Date time from PMS am The communication tab of the message setup simply shows the module name in the I O configuration for this example Communication Tab Message Configuration Head Time 5amimumeatigm Eta I cp pp hanme Destination Link 7 EIF C r py source Dine Destination One a ictal Vv bathe lonnectons L The write message dialog is similar to the Read 290 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Write Message Dialog Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic nate set Attribut
136. Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 9 MB Data Address 1 655535 Message Enabled EN 0 Slave Node Address dec Modbus Address Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors Date and Time Summary You may use the examples above as building blocks to create applications to meet your business needs Refer to Appendix A for detailed information on the power monitor data tables as well as the sections of this manual that describe the functionality you wish to include in your application Rockwell Automation also offers software products such as RSPower RSPowerPlus and RSEnergyMetrix that perform much of the data integration work for you Please contact your Rockwell Automation representative for more information 304 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Multiple Data Table Reads by Using DeviceNet Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C The following is a ladder program designed to return a number of real time data tables from a power monitor to an SLC 500 processor via DeviceNet by using a DeviceNet scanner module The following example and ladder diagram uses these settings e Node MAC ID 5 e Port 0 e Class 4 e Instance 14 16 18 20 22 17 25 e Attribute 3 e Command 1 4 e Size 3 e Size 3 e Service 14 Explicit Message Transfer Setup The Explicit Message Transfer Block heade
137. The value being used as a reference to 0 10 000 000 Depends on type 0 activate the setpoint for over comparisons or to deactivate the setpoint for under comparisons Note This parameter is non numeric when viewed via the display module and the Setpoint Type is Phase Rotation or Status input 128 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Setpoint Programming and Operation Chapter 5 Setpoint Configuration Parameter Name Parameter Description Range Units Default Setpoint Low Limit The value being used as a reference to 0 10 000 000 Depends on type 0 deactivate the setpoint for over comparisons or to activate the setpoint for under comparisons Setpoint Action Delay The minimum time in seconds that the 0 3600 Sec M4 M5 0 setpoint limit must be exceeded continuously before the setpoint will trigger 0 30 000 0 1 Sec M6 M8 Setpoint Release The minimum time in seconds that the 0 3600 Sec M4 M5 0 Delay setpoint limit must not be exceeded continuously before the setpoint releases 0 30 000 0 1 Sec M6 M8 Setpoint Action Type The action that occurs when the setpoint is 0 32 see details in the 0 triggered Setpoint Action Type table on page 131 Clear Accumulated Clear the time accumulator for this setpoint Yes N A Time No Setpoint Types Setpoint Type Description Units M4 M6 M8 M
138. These numbers typically begin at 0 increment by 1 each time a new record is created and roll over to 0 once they reach their maximum value typically 32 767 The data client may use the record identifier to associate records in different data tables or to ensure that subsequent reads contain fresh data DeviceNet unique write identifier The DeviceNet communication port on Powermonitor 3000 models with optional DeviceNet communicaitons discards duplicate identical messages For that reason read back selection tables include a DeviceNet unique write identifier element The data client changes usually increments the value of this element each time it writes an otherwise identical message Writing Data to Data Tables The power monitor contains a number of writeable data tables These tables have read write access so a client may read their current content or write new content Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 83 Chapter 4 Communication 84 A valid write to a data table must meet the following general criteria The length of the source data array must equal the data table length Note that the same data table may have a different length in various power monitor models The entire data table must be written in one pass e The first element in the source data array must generally contain the correct password or a value of 1 for read back data selection e The source and destination data type must m
139. Time Configuration Element Modbus Element name Range Default Comment No Address 0 42101 Password 1 9999 0 Required for configuration Returns 1 1 42102 DST Enable 0 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 42103 DST Start Month 12 3 January 2 February 3 42104 DST Start Day 0 6 0 0 Sunday 1 Monday 4 42105 DST Start Day Instance ved 2 1st 2 2nd 5 Last 5 42106 DST Start Hour 0 23 2 0 12 00 midnight 1 1 00 AM 6 42107 DST End Month 12 11 January 2 February 7 42108 DST End Day 0 6 0 0 Sunday 1 Monday 8 42109 DST End Day Instance a5 1 1st 2 2nd 5 Last 9 43110 DST End Hour 0 23 2 0 12 00 midnight 1 1 00 AM Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 261 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Time of Use Register Configuration Parameters CSP File No N55 Remote 1 0 BT 49 CIP Assy Inst 70 Write 71 Read No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Time of Use Register Configuration Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address 0 42201 Password 1 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select Returns 1 1 42202 Record to read back 0 12 0 Refer to Configuring the Time of use Log on page 157 2 42203 Reserved 0 0 3 42204 Write command 0 1 0 4 42205 Log day 1 31 31 5 42206 Of
140. Unit Operations DST Daylight Saving Time Configuration The power monitor may be configured to automatically adjust its internal clock for daylight saving time You may configure the daylight saving time function by using the display module or via communication by writing to the Daylight Saving Time Configuration table DST Enable Enables the daylight saving time function Range 0 disable 1 enable DST Start Month Selects the calendar month when daylight saving time begins Range 1 January 2 February 12 December DST Start Day Selects the day of the week when daylight saving time begins Range 0 Sunday 1 Monday 7 Saturday DST Start Day Instance Selects which instance of the DST start day in the DST start month when DST begins Range 1 first 2 second 3 third 4 fourth 5 last DST Start Hour Selects the hour of the day when DST begins Range 0 midnight 1 1 00 a m 23 11 00 p m DST End Month This parameter and the following three determine when DST ends and are configured the same as the start parameters above e DST end day e DST end day instance e DST end hour Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 DST is disabled by default When enabled the default start time is 2 00 a m on the second Sunday in March and the default end time is 2 00 a m on the fi
141. _ETH 1 Ethemet 3 Click the network The network devices are displayed DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet 1 o999989 900 Daea a 74 1 DeviceNet to SCANport Dodge EZLINK General Purpose Discrete 1 0 Genetic Device Human Machine Interface Inductive Proximity Switch Limit Switch Photoelectric Sensor Rockwell Automation miscellaneous Rockwell Automation Electro Craft Motion Control Rockwell Automation Reliance Electric Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 4 Read the scanner s configuration Right click on the DeviceNet scanner icon and upload the scanner s present configuration DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet eviceNet General Purpose Discrete 1 0 Generic Device Human Machine Interface Inductive Proximity Switch Limit Switch Photoelectric Sensor Rockwell Automation miscellaneous SCANport Adapter endor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Dodge Rockwell Automation Electro Craft Motion Control Rockwell Automation Reliance Electric s9sMSsEssESSSSSEEM MORONS cH mesteveeH e teveeveet 5 Edit the Scanner List The DeviceNet scanner needs to know how the information is coming from the Powermonitor 3000 unit Select the Scan List tab and move the power monitor into the Scanlist set TTEA 6 Edit the Data Table Map Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 75 Chapter4 Communicatio
142. a 30 minute floating window specify 2 as the demand period length and 15 as the number of demand periods Range 1 15 default 1 Forced Demand Delay is a timeout setting that waits for x number of seconds before ending a demand period when the external demand sync input function is being used When a missed external demand sync is detected the unit e forces an end to the current demand period e records an event log record of the event e records a trend log record if the trend log interval is set to 1 Sync with demand setting Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 e sends out a demand sync broadcast when configured as a Master Ethernet units e starts the projected demand calculations from the beginning again Entering a value of 0 disables this function For more information about this feature read the section Network Demand Time Configuration on page 55 Projected Demand Type specifies the type of calculation used for projected demand Selections include the following e Instantaneous default e First order e Second order Relay and KYZ Pulse Operation Setup Use these configuration parameters to select how the relay and KYZ solid state outputs are controlled Relay control source controls the selection which includes the following e Disabled e Wh forward e Wh reverse e VARh forward e VARh reverse e Vah e Ah e Setpoints default e Remote I
143. actor is the ratio between the magnitude of the fundamental and the sum of the magnitudes for all of the current harmonics in percent The power quantities kW kWh kVAR kVARh and power factor are four quadrant measurements The power monitor measures and expresses these measurements in a way that allows you to determine the magnitude and direction of both the real power flow and the reactive power flow Explanation of Power Factor Values on page 34 indicates the relationship between these quantities and the numeric signs used by the power monitor to convey the information Parameter Description Range Units Phase 1 Power Power of individual phase or sum of phases 0 999 9x1022 Watts signed to show direction Phase 2 Power Phase 3 Power 3 Phase Total Power Phase 1 Reactive Power Reactive power of individual phase or sum of all g 9999x1922 VARs Phase 2 Reactive Power phases signed to show direction volt amperes Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Apparent Power 3 Phase Total Apparent Power Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 reactive Phase 3 Reactive Power 3 Phase Total Reactive Power Phase 1 Apparent Power Apparent power of individual phase or sum of all 0 999 9x1022 VA phases volt amperes 33 Chapter3 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Power and Power Factor Results Parameter Phase 1 True Power Factor Phase 2 True Power Factor Phase 3 True Pow
144. adcast transmitted 2 Function Code not The controller does not support this 1 supported Modbus function or sub function 3 Bad Command The Modbus Command is the wrong size 3 Length 4 Bad Length The function attempted to read write past 3 the end of a data file 5 Bad Parameter The function cannot be executed with 3 these parameters 6 Bad Table The table number does not exist 2 Number 7 Bad Modbus The function attempted to access an 3 Address invalid Modbus address 8 Table Write The function attempted to write to a 3 Protected read only table 9 Table Access Access to this table is not granted 2 Denied If a client device requests too large a data size the power monitor returns the requested data padded with zeroes up to the requested data size rather than returning an error When the User configured Table Setup table is used together with Modbus the value for element 1 should be 1000 The value for element 0 of the Write Error Status table is the first Modbus address of data table written to last For function code 03 04 and 16 the number of words of user data is limited to 100 If it is over 100 exception code 3 will be returned to the master and error code 3 occurs Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 For function code 16 if the data length is larger or less than the element number of the data table accessed error code 4 occurs It means the data length for fun
145. age detail screens below indicate a PLC 5xxE reading the voltage and current table F15 0 from a power monitor to the controller s F15 0 data table PLC 5 xxE Controller Message Detail Screen Example MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 L IBI x This PLO S Control Bits Communication Command Ignore if imed out TO D Data Table Address To be retried NR 0 Size in Elements Awaiting Execution Ew D Port Number Continuous Run CO o Enor ER 0 Target Device Message done DN 0 Data Table Address Message Transmitting ST 0 MuliHop Message Enabled EN 0 m Error Error Code Hex 0 m Error Description No errors 106 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 When you select Yes in the MultiHop field the MultiHop tab appears in the dialog Enter the IP address of the power monitor in the 1756 ENET I P field 192 168 4 49 is used here as an example and any integer in the 1756 backplane Slot field PLC 5 xxE Controller MultiHop Configuration MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 Jof x Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop This PLCS TEENE LP str 192 168 4 49 ControlLogix Backplane A 1756 Backplane Slot dec 1 The example below shows the MultiHop configuration for messaging from a PLC 5 xxC ControlNet processor through a ControlLogix Gateway to an Ethernet power monitor PLC 5 xxC Controller via Con
146. all Modbus slaves that are connected on the network Slave address 0 is reserved for this value burden The electrical load placed on source of VA or the load an instrument or meter places on a current or potential transformer All current and potential transformers have a rated burden which should not be exceeded or else transformer transformation accuracy deteriorates capacitor A device consisting essentially of two conducting surfaces separated by an insulating material or dielectric A capacitor stores electrical energy blocks the flow of direct current and permits the flow of alternating current to a degree dependent upon the capacitance and frequency They may also be used to adjust the power factor in a system 343 Glossary 344 coil This is a Modbus mapped location used for reading and writing bit length data These bits typically reflect the value of the discrete outputs Powermonitor 3000 units do not support this data type connected load The total load which a customer can impose on the electrical system if everything was connected at one time Connected loads can be measured in horsepower watts or volt amperes Some rate schedules establish a minimum demand charge by imposing a fee per unit of connected load current transformer CT A transformer intended for measuring or control purposes designed to have its primary winding connected in series with a conductor carrying the current to be measured or c
147. an EtherNet IP communication port bear the mark shown below This mark indicates the power monitor unit has been tested at an Open Device Vendor Association ODVA independent test lab and has passed the EtherNet IP conformance test This test provides a level of assurance that the power monitor will interoperate with other conformance tested EtherNet IP devices Gncluding devices from other vendors Two representative devices from the power monitor EtherNet IP family of devices the 1404 M405A ENT B and the 1404 M8805A ENT B have been tested by ODVA using EtherNet IP Conformance Test version A2 8 The ODVA website http www odva org maintains a list of products that have passed the conformance test at one of their test labs Ether IP conformance tested ControlNet Conformance Testing All products equipped with a ControlNet communication port bear the mark shown below This mark indicates the power monitor has been tested at a ControlNet International CD independent test lab and has passed the ControlNet conformance test This test provides a level of assurance that the power monitor will interoperate with other conformance tested ControlNet devices including devices from other vendors Two representative device from the power monitor ControlNet family of devices the 1404 M405A CNT A and the 1404 M805A CNT A have been tested by CI using ControlNet Conformance Test version 12 The CI website http www w ControlNet org maintains a li
148. an I program the power monitor through the display A Yes All programmable attributes can be accessed and programmed through the display module Q Do I need a display module A All features of the monitor can be accessed and programmed through the communication ports The display module is a highly recommended option Q Can I power the power monitor from the source being monitored A Yes but it s not advisable Assuming a voltage match logging of power outages and voltage phase loss anomalies would be difficult if not impossible Q What determines what information I get by using RIO block transfers A The word length of the block transfer Q My Volt and Amp readings look good but why are my power numbers way off A One or more Current Voltage transformers are wired with reverse polarity or improper phase sequence Q What size fuses do I use for my voltage inputs A Size the fuses to the National Electrical Code for the size of the wire being used Q Why do I need shorting terminal blocks for the current transformers A If for any reason the meter s current transformer wires are removed or disturbed to cause an open circuit in the Current Transformers secondary while primary current is applied a hazardous voltage will occur which may cause personal injury death property damage or economic loss Q Can I monitor several loads from one monitor A It is not advisable to switch current transfo
149. an be more efficient for discrete applications because it tends to reduce the network traffic If you have configured the input message table to include metering data however COS may reduce the network efficiency because the data constantly changes Cyclic I O messaging reports data periodically according to a time increment you configure COS and Cyclic messaging typically reduce the network bandwidth loading compared with Polled messaging To optimize explicit messaging performance use a Background Polled I O connection with a high foreground to background poll ratio To help obtain optimal network operation verify the following settings by using RSNetworx for DeviceNet software looking at the scanner Properties dialog For Polled I O messaging verify that the effective polling rate or scan time is less than the expected packet rate CEPR to prevent time out errors You may find the EPR on the Module by clicking Advanced e For COS or Cyclic I O messaging verify that the COS Cyclic Inhibit Time is less than the EPR and that the ACK time out is set appropriately You may find these parameters on the Scanlist by clicking Edit I O Parameters Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 97 Chapter 4 98 Communication Please contact Rockwell Automation technical support if you find that the default settings do not result in adequate network performance Explicit Messaging Use explicit messaging to read and write all
150. and ControlNet Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Remote I O Discrete Data Provided by Powermonitor Remote 1 0 Input Data Element Element name Range Comment No 1 Relay KYZ and alarm bits Bit Description 00 07 Reserved used internally for BT information 08 Form C relay state setpoint output flag 1 0 De energized and not forced 1 Energized and not forced 09 KYZ output state setpoint output flag 2 0 De energized and not forced 1 Energized and not forced 10 Setpoint output flag 3 state 11 Setpoint output flag 4 state 12 Setpoint output flag 5 state 13 Setpoint output flag 6 state 14 Setpoint output flag 7 state 15 Setpoint output flag 8 state 2 Status input bits Bit Description 00 Status input 1 state 01 Status input 2 state 02 05 Reserved returns 0 06 New oscillograph M6 M8 only Indicates at least one capture has been triggered saved and is ready to be read This bit is cleared when all captures are cleared 07 11 Reserved returns 0 12 14 Reserved used internally for BT information 15 Reserved returns 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 191 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables TIP Data appears in the first two words of the input image table corresponding to the Powermonitor 3000 logical rack For example with the unit configured as Rack 1 Group 1 in a 1747 SN scanner residing in Slot 2 the data wi
151. and charge determined by the peak demand that occurs during a specified period which may be one month one year or some other duration As a result only one occurrence of a high demand level can have a long term effect on your utility bill The peak demand value indicates to the utility the reserve capacity they need to satisfy your short term power requirements The peak demand charge helps to pay the utility for maintaining this instantaneous capacity The power monitor computes demand levels for watts VA amps and VARs and provides three different methods for projecting demand 35 Chapter 3 36 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations The utility may provide a pulse that indicates the end of each demand interval The utility updates the demand value at the end of each interval and maintains the highest value obtained during any interval This method is known as thermal demand You may set up a power monitor to determine its demand interval from the utility pulse To accomplish this connect the utility pulse to status input 2 and make the appropriate settings in the Advanced Device Configuration If the utility does not provide a demand interval pulse you won t be able to synchronize with the utility to control your demand In this case you may use the sliding window method This method breaks the demand interval into many sub intervals and updates the demand value at the end of each sub interval For example a five minute interval
152. and equation It is therefore identical to the standard computation except it integrates the power only over the elapsed interval duration and calculates the average value over the elapsed duration The modified equation thus becomes t2 J P t dt tl Demand EDT t2 t1 Elapsed interval duration and is less than T First Order Projection The first order demand projection does the following e Utilizes the instantaneous demand as a starting point e Computes the trend of the instantaneous demand Computes the time remaining in the interval e Performs a first order projection of what the final demand is at the end of the interval This method may be useful where your system has a significant base load with additional loads that are switched in and out during the interval Second Order Projection The second order demand projection begins with the first order projection then it does the following e Computes the rate of change of the first order trend Computes the time remaining in the interval e Performs a second order projection of what the final demand is at the end of the interval This method may be useful where your power system has little or no base load and a load profile that increases over the duration of the interval A second order projection is more sensitive to rapid load changes than the other methods 37 Chapter3 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Energy and Demand Results Parameter K
153. and the machine address HostID The Subnet Mask defines the boundary between the NetID and HostID in the IP address Each 1 bit in the subnet mask represents the NetID and each 0 represents the HostID Here is an example IP Address decimal 192 1 J 207 binary 11000000 00000001 00000001 11001111 Subnet decimal 255 255 255 0 Mask binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Net ID ns Host ID Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 In this example the NetID is 192 1 1 0 and the HostID is 0 0 0 207 The relationship between NetID and HostID depends on the IP address class the discussion of which is beyond the scope of this document the example uses a Class C IP address Devices on the same subnet can communicate directly devices on different subnets may communication with each other only through a gateway or router The Gateway IP Address defines the address of the gateway or router on the unit s subnet that is used to route messages to other subnets for wide area networking Default 128 1 1 1 Optional Ethernet Communication Parameter Description Range Default User Setting IP Address Unit IP address in format 0 255 192 168 254 UnitlD Bytes 1 4 aaa bbb ccc ddd decimal each byte Subnet Subnet mask in format 0 255 255 255 255 0 Mask Bytes aaa bbb ccc ddd decimal each 1 4 byte Gateway IP Gateway IP address in 0 255 128 1 1 1 Address forma
154. arters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 PN 55981 Supersedes Publication 1404 UM001E EN P October 2006 Copyright 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
155. ata format 1 CIP compliant little Endian 5 40406 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 6 40407 7 40408 8 40409 9 40410 10 40411 11 40412 12 40413 13 40414 14 40415 15 40416 16 40417 17 40418 18 40419 19 40420 202 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 RS 232 Element No 0 Modbus Address 40401 Element name Password Default Value 0 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Comment Appendix A Required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 40402 Hardware port 0 Select active port 0 RS 232 port Native RS 485 port 40403 40404 Protocol Delay 2 10 ms Communication protocol for the native communication port 0 DF1 half duplex slave 1 Modbus RTU slave 2 Auto Sense Selects the protocol based on the incoming communication packets 3 DF full duplex Specifies the delay before responding to an external request useful with slow external devices such as RF modems 40405 Baud rate 0 1 2 Kbps 1224 Kbps 2 4 8 Kbps 3 9 6 Kbps 4 19 2 Kbps 5 38 4 Kbps 6 57 6 Kbps 40406 40407 RS 232 address Data format 1 Identifies the device on the link 0 is typically used by the DF1 master 255 is the broadcast address Parity number of data bits number of stop bits 0 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 1 Even parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 40408
156. atch for example floating point or integer e Fach element of the source data array must be within the legal range listed in the data table specification e Reserved elements must be the correct value usually 0 e For DeviceNet optional communication only each consecutive write must be unique You may read the Write Error Status table after writing to a data table to verify that the write was valid and accepted by the power monitor If there was an error in the last write the Write Error Status indicates the CSP file or assembly instance DeviceNet network only number and the offending element number You may write data to the power monitor for basic and advanced device configuration to set the time and date to set up setpoints logs oscillography and transient analysis and to select records to be read back from indexed data reads such as harmonics oscillography and logs Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Data Table Write Flow Diagram Programmable Controller Data Client Source Location Initiates Data Read Data Powermonitor 3000 Data Server Element 0 1 2 3 4 5 n Target Table Element 0 1 Data Element O 1 Table 31 Write error status Optional verification 85 Chapter4 Communication Single Element
157. ate rates for real time metering data 100 ms minimum e Update rates for logged data 250 ms minimum e Supports network based time synchronization via SNTP e Supports networked demand period synchronization e Supports Class 1 scheduled connection for I O data ControlNet Optional Communication A catalog number ending in CNT specifies a power monitor with a ControlNet communication interface in addition to the native RS 485 port The ControlNet interface has the following features e Adapter class device e Supports redundant media or single media applications physical connections include NAP port and two BNC connectors e ControlNet International conformace tested and approved e Compatible with ControlLogix PLC 5 and SLC controllers PanelView units RSEnergyMetrix RSPower and RSPowerPlus software and more All power monitor data readable writable via unscheduled UCMM or Class 3 connection to Powermonitor assembly object instances 3 64 e Supports scheduled messaging Class 1 connection one assembly instance of configurable content from the power monitor and one assembly instance of fixed content to the power monitor Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Product Description Chapter 2 e Supports up to 64 concurrent Class 1 connections to instance 1 and one Class 1 connection to Instance 2 e ControlFlash can be used to update ControlNet communication firmware e Supports ControlLogix message types CIP Ge
158. atio xxx xxx 4 40009 10 11 12 13 current e ejo 10 Amps 5 0 The high side of the CT ratio transformer CT Primary 10 000 000 0 XXX xxx 5 40011 12 11 12 13 CT secondary e e 1 0 5 0 Amps 5 0 The low side of the CT ratio xxx xxx 6 40013 14 14 CT primary e jeje 10 Amps 5 0 The high side of the 14 CT ratio 10 000 000 0 XXX XXx 7 40015 16 14 CT secondary e e oj 10 5 0 Amps 50 The low side of the I4 CT ratio XXX XXX 8 40017 18 Nominal system voltage e 1 0 Volts 480 0 Value is used in the default Sag and 10 000 000 0 Swell setpoints M6 and M8 only Nominal line to line voltage for Delta mode and line to neutral for Wye and single phase modes 194 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Date and Time Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No N11 Remote 1 0 BT 12 CIP Assy Inst 6 Write 7 Read No of Elements 8 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Date and Time Element Modbus Elementname Range Defaut Commet No Address Value 2 0 40101 Password 0 9999 0 Valid password required to change the date and time Returns 1 1 40102 Date year 1998 1998 1 January 2 February 12 December 2097 The internal clock adjusts the date for leap year 2 40103 Date month 1 12 1 3 40104 Date day 1 310 1 4 40105 Time hour 0 23 0 0 2
159. ation In modes 0 1 and 2 the client need only read the results table repeatedly until the entire Trend Log is read In modes 3 6 the client must alternate writes to select the next read back record with reads of the results table You may obtain the number of records in the Trend Log by reading the Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select table elements 7 and 8 The number of records is element 7 1000 element 8 Only the following elements are needed during a record selection write e Password 1 e DeviceNet unique write identifier as applicable e Reserved words must be 0 e Read back mode see above The Trend Log Results table is a read only table of 14 DeviceNet network or 22 all other communication options floating point elements as follows e Reserved element returns 0 e Internal identifier increments by 1 to 15 for each trend log record then rolls over to 0 e Time stamp in 4 element timestamp format See page 55 User selected parameters parameters you selected when you configured the Trend Log The Min max Log maintains a time stamped record of the minimum and maximum values of up to 74 metering parameters You can monitor values over a day a week a month or any period to record the highest and lowest values of voltage current or power factor Most industrial utility bills include a charge based on the maximum demand recorded during the billing period You could use the Min m
160. ation 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A List of Setpoint Types Param Parameter Name M4 M M Comment No M5 6 8 22 Crest factor voltage e e e Refer to Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More Parameters 23 Crest factor current e ele 24 Crest factor 14 e ele 25 IEEE THD voltage e jojo 26 IEEE THD current e jejo 27 IEEE THD 14 e ele 28 IEC THD voltage e jejo 29 IEC THD current i bd 30 IEC THD 14 ele 31 Status input 1 e e Refer to Discrete Data Parameters 32 Status input 2 e ele 33 Any status input bs e je 34 Setpoint 1 time accumulator e e Refer to Setpoint Output Actions Parameters 35 Setpoint 2 time accumulator ele 36 Setpoint 3 time accumulator ele 37 Setpoint 4 time accumulator e ele 38 Setpoint 5 time accumulator ele 39 Setpoint 6 time accumulator ele 40 Setpoint 7 time accumulator ele 41 Setpoint 8 time accumulator ele 42 Setpoint 9 time accumulator e ele 43 Setpoint 10 time accumulator ele 44 Voltage Sag e e Refer to Sag and Swell on page 174 45 Voltage Swell es 46 Transient detected e riggers a setpoint when a transient has been detected 47 Avg IEEE THD V e e e Refer to Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More Parameters 48 Avg IEEE THD I e ele 49 Avg IEC thd V ele 50 Avg IEC th
161. ax log to provide that piece of data for generating an internal or shadow billing report 153 Chapter 7 154 Data Logging Accessing the Min Max Log by Using the Display Module You may view enable disable or clear the min max log by using the display module Interfacing with the Min Max Log by Using Communication Write Min max Log configuration settings and command by using a table write to the Min Max Log Configuration Read back Select table Access data in the Min max Log by using the indexed read method Write to the Min Max Log Configuration Read back Select table to select the read back mode and or which of 74 min max records to return on the next read of the Min Max Log Results table The Min Max Log Configuration Read back Select table contains these nine integer elements e Password Required to enable disable or clear the min max log 1 for selecting a record Parameter to read The record number to read next or the starting record for auto increment read back mode Read back mode 0 selects auto increment mode returns the next min max record after each read of the results table 1 selects manual indexed mode only mode 0 1 and 2 are supported by DF1 and remote I O communication Enable disable Min max Log 0 disables 1 enables Clear Min max Log command 0 takes no action 1 clears the log and writes a time stamp Timestamp of last Min max clear the last four elements store the last clear times
162. ay module navigate through these menus PROG gt PASS gt CONFIGURATION gt ADVANCED You may also set the advanced device configuration via communication by writing to the Advanced Device Configuration table Password The password protects the unit against unauthorized commands or configuration changes Be sure to write down the new password and keep it in a safe place Range 0 9999 default 0000 If you forget or lose your password contact Rockwell Automation TIR Technical Support for assistance Refer to Rockwell Automation Support on the back cover of this manual Device Configurations Summary Parameter Range Default User Setting Wiring Mode 0 Delta 3 CT 5 Open Delta 2 CT 6 Wye 1 Delta 2 CT 6 Wye 2 Direct Delta 3 CT 7 Single Phase 3 Direct Delta 2 CT 8 Demo S 4 Open Delta 3 CT PT Primary 1 10 000 000 480 amp PT Secondary 1 600 480 c amp CT Primary 1 10 000 000 5 E CT Secondary 1 5 5 pss 4 Primary 1 10 000 000 5 14 Secondary 1 5 5 Nominal System Voltage 1 10 000 000 480 M6 and M8 only 50 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Device Configurations Summary Parameter Range Default User Setting New Password 1 9999 0000 Demand Period Length 99 99 15 Number of Demand Periods 1 15 1 Forced Demand Delay 0
163. ay module provides the most economical and simplest method for setting up and configuring the master module for operation The display module has a highly visible two line LED display and four operator buttons with tactile feedback Use the buttons and display to navigate through a series of menus for configuration commands and data display The display module is shipped with a 3 m 10 ft long shielded four pair cable that provides power and serial communication between the master module and the display module The display module fits into a standard ANSI 4 in analog meter cutout for panel mounting Only one display module may connect to a master module although you may use one display module to configure and monitor any number of master modules one at a time 15 Chapter2 Product Description Performance Features The power monitor is available in four basic models designated M4 M5 M6 and M8 Each model offers specific functionality as indicated in this table The M5 model offers M functionality and can be field upgraded to an M6 or M8 model for an additional charge Product Features of Powermonitor 3000 Module M4 e M5 e M6 e Master Module Features Voltage current power measurements and display Compatible with PLC 5 SLC 500 and ControlLogix controllers Compatible with RSLinx RSPower RSPowerPlus RSEnergyMetrix and RSView32 software Output control via control relays or PLC controllers Demo
164. be modified accordingly IMPORTANT Failure to modify the length of file N10 for a modification of either the Configuration or Run sequence results in improper operation of the ladder program and possible fault of the processor due to invalid indirect offsets File Data Values Prior to running the sample ladder the sequencer initialization file needs to be loaded with the numbers that correspond to the explicit message transfer sequence The following is a list of each mode s initialization file and the required possible numbers to be stored in each The first value of a block transfer sequence must be duplicated in both position 0 and 1 of an initialization file N10 Run Mode Required numbers are 20 20 21 22 23 24 25 and 26 N20 0 Required numbers are 5121 6 3589 4 14 3 N21 0 Required numbers are 5377 6 3589 4 16 3 N22 0 Required numbers are 5633 6 3589 4 18 3 N23 0 Required numbers are 5889 6 3589 4 20 3 N24 0 Required numbers are 6145 6 3589 4 22 3 N25 0 Required numbers are 6401 6 3589 4 17 3 N26 0 Required numbers are 6657 6 3589 4 23 3 309 Appendix C Sample Applications Ladder Diagram 0000 Source 7 qe Dest R6 0 LEN Ts Clear Dest R6 0 POS z 0001 1747 SDN 1747 SDN 310 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C TON 0002 Timer On Delay Timer T4 0 Time Base 0 01 Preset 75 lt
165. ber 2009 Product Description Chapter 2 In addition to the native RS 485 communication port several factory installed communication options are also available These options make it possible for a user to select Powermonitor 3000 units to provide power and energy information into a variety of existing or new control systems and communication networks Each communication option supports bi directional data transfer with external devices or applications Metering measurement logging configuration and status data may be accessed via communication Communication options are set in the master module You may configure communication by using the display module or via communication to an external application such as RSPower RSPowerPlus or RSEnergyMetrix Refer to the information later in this manual on configuration and operation of the communication options Refer to the Powermonitor 3000 Installation Manual publication 1404 INOO7 for installation and wiring information related to your selected communication options The last 3 characters of the catalog number specify the communication option of the Powermonitor 3000 unit RS 485 Native Communication A catalog number ending in 000 specifies a power monitor equipped with only a native RS 485 communication port with the following performance features e Communication rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 38 400 and 57 600 Kbps e RS 485 cable length 1219 m 4000 ft e Cable type t
166. between the negative and positive current sequence in a three phase system and is the most accurate measurement of current unbalance because it takes into account the magnitude of the individual currents and the relative phase displacement The zero sequence component is a single vector that does not rotate and represents ground or neutral current or voltage The component analysis results returned include the following Positive Sequence Current e Negative Sequence Current e Current Unbalance Positive Sequence Voltage Negative Sequence Voltage e 96 Voltage Unbalance e L4 current which is the zero sequence current on a wye system when neutral current is connected to the I4 current input or in delta systems when an external zero sequence transformer is connected to the I4 input The Voltage Current and Frequency Metering table on page 32 summarizes the voltage and current metering information provided by the power monitor Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 31 Chapter 3 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Voltage Current and Frequency Metering a three phase system n Expressed in line to neutral volts for Wye and line to line volts for Delta wiring modes 32 Power Results Parameter Description Range Units Phase 1 L N Voltage RMS line to neutral voltage of individual phase or three phase 0 999 9x1022 Volts Phase 2 L N Vol
167. bles In the SLC 500 data tables table N111 is the destination table for the Read message and N211 is the source for the Write message Table N211 contains the following values for setting the date and time in a power monitor with a password of 0 to January 1 2003 at 12 00 midnight Table N211 Data File N211 dec WRTCLOCK E ial xl 0 i 2 3 n 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 0 0 a FE N211 0 Radix Decimal M Desc N21 Properties Usage Help sma N r The Read Clock from PM3K and Set Clock from SLC bits are used to initiate the messages and are reset when the message instruction either completes successfully or an error occurs In your application code if the message rungs are controlled programmatically be sure that only one message is enabled at a time 283 Appendix C Sample Applications Ladder Diagram 00 Peer To Peer Read Target Device 500CPU Local Remote Local Control Block H10 0 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen 01 Peer To Peer Write S00CPU Local N11 0 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen 102 284 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Message Setup Dialogs Read Message Dialog ELENTINILTLTTLCNENNNNNNN c imd r This Controller Communication Command Bo0cPU Read Data Table Address N111 0 Size in Elements Channel Local Node Addr dcc Local Nemote octal
168. bus Element name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 40401 Password 0 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 40402 Logical rack address 1 63 1 The scanner uses rack address 0 2 40403 Module group 0 2 4 6 0 0 Group 0 acts like the first 2 rack slots 2 Group 2 4 Group 4 6 Group 6 3 40404 Last rack 0 1 0 0 No 1 Yes 4 40405 Baud rate 0 2 0 0 57 6 Kbps 1 115 2 Kbps 2 230 4 Kbps 5 40406 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 6 40407 7 40408 8 40409 9 40410 10 40411 11 40412 12 40413 13 40414 14 40415 15 40416 16 40417 17 40418 18 40419 19 40420 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 201 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables DeviceNet Element Modbus Element name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 40401 Password 0 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 40402 Node address 0 64 63 Address 64 enables remote node address programming there is MAC ID no actual node address of 64 defined for the DeviceNet network 2 40403 Baud rate 0 4 0 0 125 Kbps 1 250 Kbps 2 500 Kbps 3 Auto 4 Programmable 3 40404 Bus Off Interrupt 0 1 0 0 hold CAN chip in reset Action 1 reset CAN chip and continue communication 4 40405 Floating point 0 21 0 0 Compliant with prior versions word order swapped d
169. capture types 3 4 and 5 163 Chapter 8 164 Advanced Features Each data point is expressed in calibrated analog to digital A D converter counts with a resolution of 8192 13 bit w sign or 128 7 bit w sign A client may calculate the primary side instantaneous voltage or current magnitude of each data point by using the following formula M ice ms 2 iO O Ro max N e Mgata Where M instantaneous value of the voltage or current data point M nax rms Max rms magnitude 399 0 line to neutral volts for channels 1 3 and 5 691 1 line to line volts for channels 1 3 and 5 10 6 amperes for channels 2 4 6 and 7 Rmax maximum resolution 8192 for 13 bit w sign capture types 0 1 and 2 128 for 7 bit w sign capture types 3 4 and 5 e N PT or CT ratio PT or CT primary PT or CT secondary e Maata Value of the data point from the Oscillograph Configuration Read back Data Select table For example consider the following capture e PT primary 13 8 kV e PT secondary 120 V e CT primary 100 A e CT secondary 5 A Delta voltage mode line to line e Capture type 2 You would multiply each data point by the following factor to correctly display the waveform Factor 691 1 e 1 414 8192 e 13800 120 13 72 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Trigger Statistics Th
170. cation 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 337 Appendix D Technical Specifications General Input Output and Environmental Ratings Input and Output Ratings Control Power 1404 200XA XXX 102 264V ac 47 63 Hz or 106 275V dc 0 2 A max loading 1404 xxxxB xxx 18 50V de 15V A max loading Voltage Sense Inputs V1 V2 V3 Input Impedance 1 Mohm min 399V ac max V1 V2 and V3 to N Current Sense Inputs I1 12 13 14 Overload Withstand 15 A Continuous 200 A for 1s Burden 0 05V A Impedance 0 002 ohms Maximum Crest Factor at 5 A is 3 Starting Current 5 mA Status Inputs Contact Closure Internal 24V dc Control Relay 1 ANSI C37 90 1989 trip duty KYZ Output 1 Solid State KYZ 80 mA at 240 300V dc Control Relay Rating 50 60 Hz ac rms DC Max Resistive Load Switching 10 A at 250V 10A at 30V and 0 25A at 2500V A 250V Min Load Switching 10 mA at 24V 10 mA at 24V UL 508 CSA 22 2 IEC Rating B300 0300 Class Max Make Values Inductive 30 A at 120V 0 55 A at 125V Load 15 A at 240V 0 27 A at 250V 3600V A 69V A Max Break Values Inductive 3A at 120V 0 55A at 125V Load 1 5 A at 240V 0 27 A at 250V 360V A 69V A Max Motor Load Switching 1 3 HP at 125V 1 2 HP at 250V 1 Meets ANSI IEEE C37 90 1989 standards for trip duty Relay Life Parameter Number of Operations Mechanical 5X 10 Electrical 1X 10
171. cators 25 ControlNet communication 79 counters 141 crest factor 167 D data logging 143 data messaging data table attributes 81 expressing data in data tables 82 I O type communication 90 indexed reads of large data structures 88 simple reads of data tables 87 writing data to data tables 83 data messaging application considerations 90 ControlNet 112 DeviceNet 96 Ethernet 103 serial communication 91 user configured data tables 121 data messaging overview 80 data table attributes 91 data tables 187 daylight saving time 58 dst enable 58 dst end month 58 dst start day 58 dst start day instance 58 dst start hour 58 351 Index 352 dst start month 58 demand calculation 35 demand period synch 141 DeviceNet 71 96 class services 102 explicit messaging 98 I O messaging 96 indexed data table reads 102 message types 101 object classes 102 performance features 19 status indicators 24 unique write identifier 103 using RSNetworx 73 DF1 protocol 91 discrete 1 0 control 139 display module 15 configuring setpoints 133 expressing metered data 29 viewing metered data 29 viewing setpoint data 134 display module functionality 38 displaying information 42 editing a parameter 43 issuing commands 44 key functions 39 power up 42 scrolling 43 setting a default screen 44 displaying information 42 E editing a parameter 43 energy counter 35 energy results 34 equal setpoint 127 Ethernet 78 103 EtherNet I
172. ccurate computation of power in watts The RMS value is the same value as if continuous direct current were applied to a pure resistance RTU Remote Terminal Unit one of two possible transmission formats supported by Modbus Powermonitor 3000 units only supports RTU slave function Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Glossary Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 slave address This is the numerical label for slave devices Valid slave device addresses are in the range of 0 247 decimal The individual slave devices are assigned addresses in the range of 1 247 The value of 0 is reserved for broadcast sliding demand interval A method of calculating average demand by averaging the average demand over several successive short time intervals advancing one short time interval each time Updating average demand at short time intervals gives the utility a much better measure of true demand and makes it difficult for the customer to obscure high short term loads sub function code Sub function word third and forth bytes of any Modbus Command packet unbalanced load A situation existing in a three phase alternating current system using more than two current carrying conductors where the current is not due to uneven loading of the phases volt ampere VA The unit of apparent power It equals volts times amperes regardless of power factor volt ampere demand Where peak average demand is measured
173. ce instance 2 only supports one connection If the controller loses its connection to instance 1 and 2 the instance 255 connection is also lost 1 0 Connection Setup Module Properties ENET ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 x Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethemet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent ENET Name My PM3000 m Connection Parameters Assembly s Description Example of Class 1 connection Instance ES setup Input UNE fe 16 bit a Output 2 2 mnes Comm Format Data INT x Configuration 3 q i 8 bit Address Host Name Bon IP Address 128 1 1 123 Status Input C Host Name Status Output Cancel Back Next gt rese Help 4 Select Data INT as the Communication Format 5 Enter the IP address of the power monitor 6 Set the Connection Parameters as shown for the default configuration If you change the configuration of the input assembly instance enter its new size in Instance 1 here 110 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UMOO1F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 7 Select 3 as the Configuration instance and leave its Size set to 0 bytes and click the Next 8 Set the Requested Packet Interval to 100 ms or greater The power monitor does not respond reliably to an RPI of less than 100 ms Requested Packet Interval Setup Module Properties ENET ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 The power monitor data is found in controll
174. ce range and the read target range The Read graphic element is associated with the following VBA script or macro Sub ReadDateAndTimeO Open DDE link the first argument is the application we want to DDE with Second argument is the DDE topic name configured in RSLinx RSIchan DDEInitiate RSLINX DF1 1404 123 Read the date time table from the PM3000 and put it in the excel sheet Range Sheet1 D7 D14 DDERequest RSIchan N11 0 L8 Close DDE link DDETerminate RSIchan End Sub The Write graphic element is associated with the following VBA script Sub WriteDateAndTimeO Open DDE link RSIchan DDEInitiate RSLINX DF1 1404 123 Write data from the excel sheet into the PM3000 DDEPoke RSIchan N11 0 L8 Range Sheet1 D7 D14 Close DDE link DDETerminate RSIchan End Sub To read the date and time from the power monitor click the Read graphic element To write the data and time to the power monitor enter the desired data and time into the worksheet along with the power monitor password default 0 and click the Write graphic element Use OPC for Single Element Password Write First create an OPC topic that points to your power monitor In the OPC client add the single password write parameter item with address N60 0 along with any other parameters that you want to write Right click the single password write ItemID and then select Sync Write Enter your power monitor password Default pas
175. ceivinga 0 75 ms 10 ms request and transmitting a response Communication RS 485 port 1 2 Kbps 9600 baud Rate communication bitrate 2 4 Kbps 4 8 Kbps 9 6 Kbps 19 2 Kbps 38 4 Kbps 57 6 Kbps Node Address Uniquely identifies the 1 247 Unit ID Powermonitor device on number a multi drop network Data Format Data bits Stop bits 8 1 none 8 1 none Parity 8 1 even 8 1 odd Flow Control RS 232 hardware flow 0 none 0 none Handshaking control 1 RTS CTS Inter Character Mimimum delay between 0 to 6553 ms 0 3 5 Timeout characters that indicates character end of Modbus message times packet Error Checking BCC CRC CRC Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Auto Configure Instructions for DF1 Full duplex Verify that the latest EDS files have been installed for firmware revision 3 Follow these steps to configure DF1 full duplex 1 Select the serial DF1 driver from the selection menu and click Add New r Avallablc Driver Types Add New r Configured Drivers Name and Description AB_ETH 1 A B Ethernet RUNNING Running 2 Select the default driver name or provide your own Add New RSLinx Driver X Choose a name for the new driver 15 characters maximum Cancel AB D F1 1 ots 3 When presented with the configuration screen you may use the auto configure feature or enter your own configuration P
176. ch may then trigger an oscillogram capture providing zoom capability All communication options support transient configuration metering and capture Use RSPower RSPowerPlus or RSEnergyMetrix software or create a custom application to configure and read transient data The following information provides details of the data table interface for transient detection 179 Chapter8 Advanced Features Transient Capture 400 T 2UU 5 v ULLS c c Amps 200 4 400 10 B By Bw Transient Analysis Configuration Perform a table write to the Transient Analysis Configuration Read back Select to configure transient analysis This read write table of 13 floating point elements contains the following configuration command and read back select parameters e Password required for configuration and command Use a valid password or 1 for read back select Range 0000 9999 default 0 returns 1 DeviceNet unique write identifier range 32 768 32 767 default 0 e Capture number selects a capture for read back Range 0 6 default 1 e Cycle number selects a cycle for read back Range 1 12 default 1 e Read back mode 0 Auto increment mode cycle number increments after each read of the Transient Analysis Metering Results table 1 Manual increment mode only mode supported by DeviceNet and Ethernet communication Default 0 e Detection mode selects channels to monitor 0 disables transient detectio
177. counter to zero Yes No Restore Defaults Settings Restores all settings to factory default Yes No Clear Setpoint Timers Clears the time accumulated in each setpoint Yes timer No Configuration by Using the Display Module The display module provides an inexpensive easy to operate method for setting up power monitor parameters to adapt it to your power system and select the performance options you desire You configure the power monitor by using Program mode and Edit mode of the display module You may also configure the power monitor via communication and certain advanced features of the power monitor may be configured only via communication Please refer to the appropriate sections of the user manual for more information Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 47 Chapter 3 48 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Refer to the Device Configurations Summary table on page 50 for a summary of basic and advanced device configuration settings You may use a copy of this table to record your configuration settings Basic Device Configuration The basic unit configuration sets the wiring mode PT ratios and CT ratios to match your power system Every power monitor requires basic configuration To perform basic configuration by using the display module navigate through these menus PROG gt PASS gt CONFIGURATION gt BASIC You may also set the basic device configuration via communication by writing t
178. ction code 16 should be strictly the same as the size of the accessed data table If the data written to the power monitor by using function code 16 is outside of the legal range as shown in Appendix A error code 5 occurs For function code 03 04 and 16 if any undefined starting address is sent to the power monitor exception code 2 is returned and error code 6 occurs If the starting addresses other than the first Modbus address of the data tables are sent to the slave with function code 16 this error code also occurs For function codes 03 and 04 the starting address may be any address within the data table However for floating point data tables one element occupies two Modbus addresses Therefore only odd Modbus address are allowed when accessing floating point data table If the starting address is even error code 7 occurs The Controller Command table is the only one table that has write only attribute If you try to use function code 03 to read this table error code 8 occurs and a 02 exception response packet is returned Auto sense Protocol Selection The primary purpose for auto sense is to permit configuration by using RSPower or RSPowerPlus software on a point to point RS 485 connection by disabling the Modbus master station and enabling a DF 1 connection with RSLinx software The port switches back to the Modbus protocol when it detects incoming Modbus data packets Simultaneous use of Modbus and DF 1 master stations o
179. d e ele 51 Avg Crest Factor V e ele 52 Avg Crest Factor e ele Mp setpoint activates when the magnitude of any phase passes the acti setpoint evaluation condition vation limit and releases when all phases pass the release limit in the appropriate direction for the 2 These setpoint types apply only to the applicable Powermonitor 3000 models and will appear as inactive on other models Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 217 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Setpoint Output Actions Parameters Applies to Refer to Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status Parameters on page 215 PM3000 Type See table Setpoint Output Actions Param Parameter Name M4 M Comment M5 8 0 None e No output action but recorded in the event log and Setpoint status recorded 1 Energize relay and set alarm flag 1 e e Refer to Discrete Data Parameters 2 Energize KYZ and set alarm flag 2 e 3 Set alarm flag 3 e 4 Set alarm flag 4 e 5 Set alarm flag 5 e 6 Set alarm flag 6 7 Set alarm flag 7 8 Set alarm flag 8 9 Set alarm flag 9 10 Set alarm flag 10 e 11 Set alarm flag 11 e 12 Set alarm flag 12 e 13 Set alarm flag 13 14 Set alarm flag 14 e 15 Set alarm flag 15 e e 16 Set alarm flag 16 17 Save a trend log record e e Saves record even if periodic trending is
180. d length the number of demand periods to average for demand calculation the forced demand delay and the type of calculation used for projected demand Demand Period Length sets the length in minutes 1 99 of the demand period used for demand and projected demand calculation Range 99 99 default 15 A positive value other than 0 configures the power monitor to use its internal clock to measure the demand period A setting of zero 0 configures the power monitor to use an external synchronizing method to synchronize the demand interval A negative value configures the power monitor to use its internal clock for calculating projected demand and an external synchronizing method to calculate actual demand External synchronizing methods include e A dry contact end of interval pulse connected to status input 2 e For Ethernet network units a network demand sync broadcast message from a network demand master power monitor or a controller command message from a PLC controller Refer to Network Demand Time Configuration on page 55 for more informatin on network demand synchronization TIP In RSEnergyMetrix RT software and RSPower software a negative demand interval is set by checking a checkbox entitled Use Status Input 2 or Enable External Demand Sync Number of Demand Periods specifies how many demand intervals are averaged together to a floating window demand calculation For instance to configure
181. data tables other than the I O messaging table The specific details of explicit messaging depend upon the master device that initiates the message The example in this section uses an Allen Bradley SLC 500 controller and DeviceNet Scanner 1747 SDN as the master Refer to the DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions publication 1747 IN058 for a detailed description of explicit message programming in the SLC 500 controller Please refer to the Rockwell Automation KnowledgeBase for other examples of explicit messaging to a Powermonitor 3000 unit In the SLC 500 and PLC 5 controllers you assemble the explicit message header in an integer file and transfer it to the scanner module When the response is received you transfer the response from the scanner to another integer file The message header consists of 6 words organized as follows Explicit Messaging Message Word High byte Low byte Header 0 Transmit ID Command 1 Port Size 2 Service MAC ID Body 3 Class 4 Instance 5 Attribute 6 Data to write if applicable 7 n Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Word 0 contains a transmit identifier TXID and command byte Assign each explicit message a unique TXID in the range of 0 255 decimal 0 to FF hex The TXID is used to identify the response to this message request These are valid command codes e 1 hex
182. device the locations are defined by the Modbus Memory Map lagging current The current flowing in an ac circuit which is mostly inductive If a circuit contains only inductance the current lags the applied voltage by 90 Lagging current means lagging power leading current The current flowing in a circuit which is mostly capacitive If a circuit contains only capacitance the current leads the applied voltage by 90 Leading current means leading power factor load Any device or circuit consuming power in an electrical system load shedding The removal of load from the line to limit load and control demand level load restoring The energizing of loads that were previously removed from the line to limit load and control demand level Modbus Industrial communication network protocol created by the Modicon Corporation neutral The conductor chosen as the return path for the current from the load to the source It is also a voltage reference point in a power system Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Glossary ohm The unit of electrical resistance One ohm is the value of resistance through which a potential difference of one volt will maintain a current flow of one ampere peak demand The highest average load over a utility specified time interval during a billing period If there is no ratchet clause in the rate schedule then the peak demand is also th
183. dge module 1756 CNB or 1756 CNBR in the I O configuration Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 3 Add the power monitor as a Generic ControlNet module Typical ControlNet Configuration Module Properties Cnet CONTROLNET MODULE 1 1 ControlNet Powermonitor 3000 a ha pasm 0 88 0g 4 Select Data INT as the Communication Format dl Enter the ControlNet address of the power monitor 6 Set the Connection Parameters as shown for the default configuration If you change the configuration of the input assembly instance enter its new size in Instance 1 here 7 Select 3 as the Configuration instance and leave its Size set to 0 bytes and click Next 8 Set the Requested Packet Interval to a binary multiple of the network update time NUT greater than 100 ms The power monitor update rate is typically 100 ms Requested Packet Module Properties Cnet CONTROLNET MODULE 1 1 02 The power monitor data is found in controller tags Publication 1404 UMOO1F EN P November 2009 113 Chapter4 Communication Controller Tags eJ Decimal INTIE HE PM3K CNT IData U 0 Decimal INT EL PMSK ENT LData T 0 Decimal INT c PM3K ENT Data 2 0 Decimal INT PM3K_CNT 1 Dataf3 o Decimal INT PMSK CNT 1 Data 4 0 Decimal INT HE PM3K CNT I Data 5 0 Decimal INT c PM3K ENT O asi mm AB CONTROLNE
184. disabled 18 Clear kWh result 19 Clear kVARh result e 20 Clear kVAh result e 21 Clear Ah result 22 Clear all energy results e e 218 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Setpoint Output Actions Param Parameter Name M4 M Comment M5 8 23 Clear setpoint 1 time e e Clears the corresponding setpoint time accumulator 24 Clear setpoint 2 time 25 Clear setpoint 3 time e 26 Clear setpoint 4 time e 27 Clear setpoint 5 time 28 Clear setpoint 6 time e e 29 Clear setpoint 7 time e e 30 Clear setpoint 8 time e 31 Clear setpoint 9 time e 32 Clear setpoint 10 tim e e 33 Clear setpoint 11 tim 34 Clear setpoint 12 tim 35 Clear setpoint 13 tim e 36 Clear setpoint 14 tim e 37 Clear setpoint 15 tim e 38 Clear setpoint 16 tim 39 Clear setpoint 17 tim e 40 Clear setpoint 18 tim e 41 Clear setpoint 19 tim e 42 Clear setpoint 20 tim e 43 Capture oscillograph e Triggers a capture per the current oscillography configuration Publication 1404 UMOO1F EN P November 2009 219 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select Parameters CSP File No N24 Remote 1 0 BT 34 CIP Assy Inst 26 Write 27 Read No of Elements 26 User Configurable
185. display module is the recommended way to configure communication on your power monitor The display module includes setup menus for native and optional communication If you need to review Configuration by Using the Display Module on page 47 You may also configure communication parameters by using the native or optional communication ports However because this may lead to loss of communication with the port being configured we recommend using the display module for initial communication configuration 63 Chapter 4 64 Communication If you choose to configure communication parameters by using communication please refer to the Native Communication Configuration table and the Optional Communication Configuration Parameters table in Appendix A Native RS 485 Communication Your Powermonitor 3000 unit is set up to communicate via its native RS 485 port when you first power it up except for units with an optional RS 232 communication port The communication configuration includes the following parameters e Protocol Allen Bradley DF1 full duplex DF1 half duplex slave Modbus RTU slave or auto sense Default auto sense e Data communication rate Range 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 and 57 6 Kbps Default 9 6 Kbps e Delay Range 0 75 ms 10 ms default e Data Format 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity odd parity or even parity Default no parity e Node address Range 1 247 default is the same value as the uni
186. ds Apparent Energy and Demand Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables CSP File No F58 Remote 1 0 BT 53 CIP Assy Inst 74 No of Elements 12 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Time of Use Records Apparent Energy and Demand Appendix A Element Modbus Element Name Range Units Comment No Address 0 32601 02 Off peak apparent 999 999 0 MVAh Refer to Reading Time of use Log Data on energy 999 999 0 page 158 1 32603 04 Off peak apparent 999 999 999 kVAh energy 999 999 999 2 32605 06 Off peak demand V 0 0 999 9 x 102 VA 3 32607 08 Mid peak apparent 999 999 0 MVAh energy 999 399 4 32609 10 Mid peak apparent 999 999 999 kVAh energy 999 999 999 5 32611 12 Mid peak demand VA 9 9 999 9 x 102 VA 6 32613 14 Peak apparent energy 999 999 0 MVAh 999 999 0 7 32615 16 Peak apparent energy 999 999 999 kVAh 999 999 999 8 32617 18 Peak demand VA 0 0 999 9x 102 VA 9 32619 20 Record number 0 12 10 32621 22 Start date 000101 991231 YYMMDD Start month day for data stored in this record inclusive 11 33623 24 End date 000101 991231 YYMMDD End month day for data stored in this record inclusive Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 265 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Single Password Write Parameters CSP File No N60 Remote 1 0 BT
187. e the Month the parameter value divided by 100 with the remainder the Day Example 1230 December 30 You can learn a great deal about and learn how to reduce your enterprise s energy costs by keeping a historical record of power and energy usage The Configurable Trend Log allows you to set up automatic logging of up to 16 parameters at intervals between 1 second and 1 hour It can store over 45 000 individual records in nonvolatile memory You must use communication to configure and read the Trend Log There is no display module interface for either configuration or monitoring Trend Log Modes of Operation The Trend Log operates in one of these two modes e Fill and Hold record logging continues until the log is full You must clear the log for logging to continue Overwrite logging operates in first in first out mode whereby each new record overwrites the oldest record The trend log always contains the most recent records Default Configuration As shipped from the factory a power monitor logs net kilowatt hours kWh net kVAR hours kVarh and demand watts at 15 minute intervals in overwrite mode Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Data Logging Chapter 7 TIP If you use the power monitor with RSEnergyMetrix energy logging software you should coordinate the parameters selected for the Trend Log with those logged by the software This allows for
188. e 1 10 000 000 default 480 e PT secondary range 1 600 default 480 e CT primary range 1 10 000 000 default 5 e CT Secondary range 1 5 default 5 e 14 primary and I4 secondary same as CT primary and secondary For direct connection to power systems of 600V set the PT ratio to 600 600 For a 480V system set the PT ratio to 480 480 Nominal system voltage M6 M8 only The M6 and M8 models use the nominal voltage setting for calculating the default sag and swell setpoint high and low limits For Wye and single phase wiring modes set this value to the PT primary side nominal line to neutral For all other wiring modes set this parameter to the PT primary side nominal line to line voltage Range 1 10 000 000 default 480 TIP When setting a parameter you may press and hold the up arrow or down arrow key for a few seconds to increase the rate the value increments or decrements Refer to the Powermonitor 3000 Installation Instructions publication 1404 INOOT for information on selecting and installing PTs and CTs Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 49 Chapter3 X Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Advanced Device Configuration A number of parameters are grouped into Advanced Configuration including the Password demand and projected demand setup relay and KYZ pulse operation setup metering accuracy options date time and display module scrolling rate To perform advanced configuration by using the displ
189. e Defaults Data Acquisition Clear Setpoint Timers Watchdog Timer Clock Optional Comms Version Number Identifier Type Status DM Status DM FRN Date Time Relay Status KYZ Status S1 Status S1 Count S2 Status S2 Count Output Word 5 In Program Mode this entry becomes Clear Accumulated Time 6 1 10 M4 M5 or 1 20 M6 M8 7 Available on M6 and M8 only 8 Applies to EtherNet IP ControlNet DeviceNet and remote 1 0 neworks only Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 41 Chapter 3 42 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Displaying Information The display screen consists of two rows of five alpha numeric LED digits At the right of this screen is a column of phase indicators L1 L2 L3 and N These indicators show which phase or phases is referred to by the information being displayed on the 2x5 screen The phase indicators also indicate program mode by flashing Power Up When the display module powers up it first illuminates all of its LED indicators for approximately 2 seconds It then displays its firmware revision number TM d hi All CEN 7 ta un mou After about 2 seconds the display waits for communication with the master module If it doesn t receive any messages within 8 seconds it displays Chac K civ mv on At any time if the display module stops receiving information from the master module it displays the Check Rx message If it is receiving messages but no
190. e Single Source Element Set PM3K Date Tim J Source Length fi 6 a Bytes ce in Hex Class fa He Destination A FE Instance e Attribute 3 Hex New Tag Q Enable Enable Waiting 2 Start Done Done Length 0 Error Code Extended Error Code T Timed Out Error Path Error Test Cancel Aor He Note that the source length is in Bytes not elements Since this message write 8 INT elements the message length is 16 bytes RSLinx DDE OPC and Microsoft Excel Software You may create a simple data transfer application by using RSLinx direct data exchange DDE capabilities and a DDE client such as Microsoft Excel software This example uses DDE to read and write the value of the real time clock in a power monitor You may utilize similar techniques to transfer data to and from any power monitor data tables Setting up a DDE Topic in RSLinx Software Follow these steps to create a DDE topic in RSLinx software You need RSLinx OEM Professional Gateway or SDK software to support DDE communication 1 Establish communication between RSLinx software and your power monitor by using the communication method of your choice The example uses the native communication port in DF1 half duplex configuration 2 In RSLinx software select DDE OPC from the main menu 291 Appendix C Sample Applications DDE OPC Topic Configuration DFT 1404 123 faa Linx Gateways Ethemet gs AB_ETH 1 Ethernet gs AB
191. e Table Writes A client may write a table of data to the power monitor Generally only full data tables may be written Data writes may be performed to configure device features set the date and time reset or preset energy counters and select records for subsequent reads e Single Element Writes Beginning with version 4 master module firmware a client may enable single element writes by writing a valid password to the Single Element Password Write table Single element writes are disabled again after 30 minutes of inactivity e Simple Data Reads A client may read metering or configuration data The client may read an entire data table or any number of consecutive data elements up to the table boundary e Indexed Data Reads The power monitor parses large data structures such as logs oscillograms harmonics and transient captures into data blocks records and or channels These records are transferred to an interface table The client selects the read back mode and or record reads the interface table and reassembles the original data structure e I O Type Communication The power monitor supports polled change of state and or cyclical implicit I O messaging depending on the communication options The specific communication setup depends on the communication port type and protocol whether serial Ethernet or others as well as the type of device controlling the communication The following sections provide more detail Pub
192. e billing demand polyphase Having or utilizing several phases A polyphase power circuit has several typically three phases of alternating current with a fixed phase angle between phases potential transformer PT An transformer with the primary winding connected in parallel with the circuit whose voltage is to be measured or controlled PT s are normally used to step down high voltage potentials to lower levels acceptable to measuring instruments Also known as voltage transformer VT potential transformer ratio The ratio of primary voltage divided by secondary voltage power factor The ratio of real power in watts of an alternating current circuit to the apparent power in volt amperes Also expressed as the cosine of the phase angle between the fundamental voltage applied to a load and the current passing through it power factor correction Steps taken to raise the power factor by closely aligning the current to be in phase with the applied voltage Most frequently this consists of added capacitance to increase the lagging power factor of inductive circuits power factor penalty The charge utilities impose for operating at power factor below some rate schedule specified level This level ranges from a lagging power factor of 0 80 to unity There are innumerable ways by which utilities calculate power factor penalties 347 Glossary 348 ratchet clause A rate schedule clause which states that billing demand
193. e current e e e Positive sequence current e e e Negative sequence current Percent current unbalance e e e Voltage per phase L L and L N on four wire systems Average voltage per phase L L and L N on four wire systems Positive sequence voltage e e Negative sequence voltage e e Percent voltage unbalance e e e Frequency e e e e Phase rotation ABC ACB e e e e Real power watts total and per phase on four wire systems e e e e Reactive power VARs total and per phase on four wire systems e e e Apparent power VAJ total and per phase on four wire systems e e e True power factor PF total and per phase on four wire systems e e Displacement PF total and per phase on four wire systems e e e e Distortion PF total and per phase on four wire systems e e e Energy consumption in kilowatt hours kWh forward reverse and net e Reactive energy consumption in KVAR hours forward reverse and net e e e Apparent energy consumption in kVA hours e e Current consumption in ampere hours e e e e Demand kA kW kVAR and kVA e e e e Projected demand kA kW kVAR and kVA e e e Load factor calculation amps watts VAR and VA e e e e IEEE percent THD total harmonic distortion e e e e IEC percent THD Distortion Index DIN e o o o Crest Factor e e e TIF Telephone Interference Factor K factor e e
194. e feeder can supply approximately 1000 kW or 1000 kWh per hour 2 Divide this maximum parameter value by 3600 to determine the maximum value expected per second In our example we round this to 280 Wh per second Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 1 0 Operations Chapter 6 3 Select a maximum pulse rate This should be between 2 and 5 pulses per second for a two wire KYZ connection and between 2 and 10 pulses per second for a three wire connection Let s use a three wire KYZ connection and a pulse rate of 4 pps 4 Compute the output scale by dividing the result of step 2 by the result of step 3 and rounding to the nearest integer For our example we ll set the output scale to 70 Setpoint Control Set the Control source to a value of 7 to enable setpoints to control the selected output Discrete 1 0 Control Set the Control Source to a value of 8 to enable Ethernet ControlNet DeviceNet or remote I O networks to have exclusive control over the power monitor output via I O messaging Forced Operation You may over ride automatic output control by issuing a force command by using the display module or by writing the appropriate force command parameter in the Advanced Device Configuration table Forces override all other output control sources If you force an output either energized or de energized be sure to release the force to re establish your selected control source TIP If you cycle power to the power
195. e is loaded with the numbers corresponding to the two explicit message transfers to be performe remains in this d Once Run mode has begun the ladder program mode The speed at which the processor performs the messages may be m altered by resetting the On Delay timer that is located within the sequencer output rung However the availability of new data values is controlled by the power monitor table update rate Data Files Used Data Files Data File Number of Description Address Elements N9 1 N9 0 Sequencer Output N10 Variable N10 0 Sequencer Input R6 0 Sequencer Control Message Read Data Table Locations Control Data N20 F30 14 Voltage Current Data N21 F31 13 Real Time Power N22 F32 13 Power Factor N23 N33 23 kWh and kVAh N24 N34 23 kVarh N25 F35 10 Demand N26 N36 27 Diagnostic Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C The reset word for the sequencer is N10 0 The first word in the rotation of the sequencer is N10 1 The value in N10 0 must be the same as that in N10 1 The size of file N10 is equal to the size of the largest sequencer input file This size depends on the number of explicit message transfers to be performed The sequencer length may be expanded or reduced for Run mode It is imperative that the corresponding file that serves as the source of the sequencer s input file N10 must
196. e table User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type See table Event Log Results Element Modbus M4 M M Element Name Range Comment No Address M5 6 8 0 30901 e e e Reserved 0 Returns 0 1 30902 e e e Internal identifier 0 32768 Refer to Reading Data from the Event Log by Using Communication on page 147 2 30903 e e e Timestamp of event Year 1998 2097 Refer to Expressing Data in Data Tables on 3 3004 e e le Teu ad 0101 1231 ma 4 30905 e je jo Second hsec 0000 2359 5 30906 e o o 0000 5999 6 30907 e e o Event type 0 19 Refer to List of Event Types Parameters 7 30908 e e e Event code Refer to Reading Data from the Event Log 8 30909 e e e Setpoint type 0 52 by Using Communication on page 147 9 30910 e e e Setpoint evaluation condition 0 5 10 30911 e e e Setpoint level integer 0 9999 T 30912 e e le DOVE Oat 12 30913 e e Setpoint action release delay 0 3600 M4 M5 0 30 000 M6 M8 13 30914 e e Setpoint action 0 32 M4 M5 0 43 M6 M8 14 30915 e e Sustain limit timer integer 0 9999 15 30916 PILAE ITE 16 30917 e e Capture identifier 0 999 17 30918 e Reserved 0 Returns 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 229 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Status Error Codes Bits Hex Description bit
197. e trigger source and capture identifier are combined in one element and indicate what triggered the capture and a unique capture identifier or serial number The value divided by 1000 gives the trigger source 0 none 1 20 setpoint number 21 native communication 22 optional communication The remainder of this calculation is the unique capture identifier which increments by 1 from 0 999 and rolls back to 0 A client application may use the identifier to associate with an event log entry and determine chronological order of captures Example a parameter value of 15 347 indicates that setpoint 15 triggered the capture and its serial number or identifier is 347 The trigger position returns the number of the data point corresponding with the time the capture was triggered A client application may use this to place a marker on the displayed waveform The maximum trigger position is the same as the total number of oscillogram data points The power monitor configuration may affect the accuracy of the trigger position statistic with respect to the pre trigger setting For best results set RMS resolution to 0 nominal and RMS results averaging to 0 none in the Advanced Device Configuration table The capture timestamp and capture type are also important statistics that identify the capture and enable a client application to correctly display the waveform 165 Chapter8 Advanced Features Harmonic Analysis Harmonic Analysis
198. econds 20 Time Hundredths of seconds 21 Date Month day Referto Date and Time Parameters compacted to take less space 22 Time Hour minute 23 Time Second hsec 268 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name No 24 Demand Period Length 25 Number of Demand Periods 26 Predicted Demand Type 2 KYZ Pulse Output Parameter 28 KYZ Pulse Output Scale 29 KYZ Pulse Output Width 30 Relay Pulse Output Parameter 31 Relay Pulse Output Scale 32 Relay Pulse Output Width 33 RMS Resolution 34 RMS result averaging 35 Frequency averaging 36 Default relay state in event of communication loss 37 Default KYZ state in event of communication loss 38 DM text scroll rate 39 Protocol 40 Delay 41 Baud rate 42 Device address 43 Data format Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Comment Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Referto Advanced Device Configuration Parameters Referto Native Communication Configuration Parameters Appendix A 269 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name Comment No 44 Comm parameter 1 Refer to Optional Communication Configuration Parameters 45 Comm parameter 2 46 Comm
199. ection Bitfield Value Bitfield Value Parameter Binary Decimal Table 14 Table 15 000 0 001 1 kWh forward kVARh forward 010 2 kWh reverse kVARh reverse 100 4 kVAh kAh 111 7 All All You may select the value at which the energy counters roll over to 0 in the Advanced Device Configuration table Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 User configured Data Table If your application requires monitoring a small number of parameters normally found in different data tables and you need to conserve communication bandwidth then the power monitor user configured data table may be an ideal solution To use this table your data client application performs a write to the User configured Table Setup table containing the desired parameters that you select from the Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table To read the user configured table perform a table read of the User configured Table Results The user configured table setup includes the following elements e Password needed to change the configuration e Table identifier a number that identifies the results table For DF1 Ethernet CSP and Ethernet PCCC CSP this is file number 31 for Remote I O file number BT length 62 for EtherNet IP DeviceNet and ControlNet networks instance 37 or 1 see the User configured I O table e Parameter selections from the Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table The fi
200. ed de selected metering calculations return values of 0 in the appropriate data table elements You may set the advanced metering selection only through communication by performing a table write to the Advanced Metering Configuration table The display module does not support this configuration This table exists only in the M8 model and consists of 10 integer elements as follows e Password A valid password is required e Meter result set 0 calculates all metering results default 1 is Transducer mode 2 is Energy Meter mode e Reserved elements The remaining elements must be 0 e Transducer mode The power monitor calculates only volts amperes watts VARs VA true power factor per phase and total and frequency e Energy Meter mode The unit calculates only average voltage average amperes total watts frequency and net kWh Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Date and Time You may use these parameters to set the power monitor s internal clock and calendar and configure the display format as MM DD YYYY default or DD MM YYYY The power monitor uses its internal clock time stamp entries in logs oscillograms and transient captures Display Mode Scroll Speed This parameter controls how fast text that doesn t fit in the window is scrolled on the display module Default is fast scrolling Watchdog Timeout Action
201. ed results table e Manual Increment the client specifies a record to be read during the next read of the results table by performing a write to the applicable read back select table IMPORTANT oe communication option supports only manual increment The client selects the read back mode by writing to the Read back Mode element in the appropriate read back select table The Auto increment mode provides the highest data throughput In Manual Increment mode the client must alternate writes of the read back select table with reads of the read back table The Indexed Data Read Manual Mode Flow Diagram shows the flow of alternating writes and reads required for the Manual Increment mode e First the client writes to the appropriate read back select table to identify the desired data block record or channel For selecting a read back record the client may write either a valid password or a value of 1 to the password element in the read back select table e After a short time delay the client reads the results table verifies that it is the desired record and adds it into the target data structure e The client repeats steps 1 and 2 until all the desired data is read Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Indexed Data Read Manual Mode Flow Diagram Personal Computer Application Powermonitor 3000 Data Client Data Server Large data structure e g log oscillogram etc
202. elonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Introduction Updated Information Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Summary of Changes This release of this document contains new and updated information To find new and updated information look for change bars as shown next to this paragraph The document contains these changes Topic Added information about single instance parameters Single instance parameter for DeviceNet Added Single Element Writes to the primary methods to communicate with a power monitor Added information for writing single element data to a data table Added information about floating point word order Added information for configuring protocol selections Changed the placeholder from instance 99 to instance 255 Added information about changing the configuration of Instance 1 in the user configured table Added information about setpoint output action logic Added an example of sag alarm for setpoint operation Changed element 3 range in the Discrete Data table to 0 7 Updated the Native Communication Configuration table it has nine elements and the range for element 3 is 0 6 Updated the optional communication configuration table for Ethernet adding protocol selection as element 13 Updated the optional communication configuration table for DeviceNet adding floating point data format as element 4 C
203. ement password write and the EtherNet IP communication network Please refer to applicable product literature for information on configuration and use of the PanelView Component HMI terminal Illustrations in this example were made using a Firefox 2 x browser The power monitor master module firmware must be version 4 x or later and PanelView Component HMI firmware must be version 1 11 or later Power monitor Ethernet protocol selection may be either CIP or CIP CSP CHMI Communications Setup In this example controller 3k1 is a Powermonitor 3000 unit with IP address 10 90 172 91 It is configured with controller type Allen Bradley MicroLogix ENI PLC 5 t Abentiradiey MicroLogw E E vhem USA Earnet Panelview Component Settings No contour atie properes at resic ei seve Controller Settings T x Own iy Name M Ascending S Mame Commoner type Gate 0 Pon Request Size Slot Confega ationiilick Waite Function les KPE PLC 5 331 Appendix C Sample Applications Tag Configuration This example includes the following tags Name Address Data type Year N11 1 16 bit Integer Month N11 2 16 bit Integer Day N11 3 16 bit Integer Hour N11 4 16 bit Integer Minutes N11 5 16 bit Integer Seconds N11 6 16 bit Integer Voltage Mode F10 1 Real Voltage Primary F10 2 Real User Config Table Parm 1 Setup N30 3 16 bit Integer Native Comms Protocol N13 1 16 bit Integer Native Comms
204. ent No Address 0 31001 02 User selected parameter 1 Parameters previously setup during a write to the User configured Table 1 31003 04 User selected parameter 2 Seip Parentes table 2 31005 06 User selected parameter 3 3 31007 08 User selected parameter 4 4 31009 10 User selected parameter 5 5 31011 12 User selected parameter 6 6 31013 14 User selected parameter 7 7 31015 16 User selected parameter 8 8 31017 18 User selected parameter 9 9 31019 20 User selected parameter 10 10 31021 22 User selected parameter 11 11 31023 24 User selected parameter 12 12 31025 26 User selected parameter 13 13 31027 28 User selected parameter 14 14 31029 30 User selected parameter 15 The DeviceNet network supports a maximum of 14 user configured 15 31031 32 User selected parameter 16 paremeters 16 31033 34 User selected parameter 17 17 31035 36 User selected parameter 718 18 31037 38 User selected parameter 719 19 31039 40 User selected parameter 20 20 31041 42 User selected parameter 21 21 31043 44 User selected parameter 22 27 31045 46 User selected parameter 23 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 235 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Write Error Status Parameters CSP File No N32 Remote 0 BT 4 CIP Assy Inst 38 No of Elements 2 User Configurable No
205. ent Analysis Results on page 31 1 30203 04 Positive Sequence Current 0 0 999 9x102 2 30205 06 Negative Sequence Current 0 0 999 9x102 3 30207 08 96 Current unbalance Per Cent 0 0 100 0 4 30209 10 Positive Sequence Voltage Volts V 9 9 999 9x102 5 30211 12 Negative Sequence Voltage 0 0 999 9x102 6 30213 14 Voltage unbalance Per Cent 0 0 100 0 7 30215 16 Phase rotation 0 2 0 No rotation 1 ABC rotation 2 ACB rotation 8 30217 18 Average frequency Hertz Hz 40 0 75 0 Average of the last 1 or 8 cycles Returns 0 or 999 0 if out of range 9 30219 20 Frequency source 0 2 0 V1 1 V2 2 V3 10 30221 22 Metering iteration 0 32 767 Increments by 1 32 767 rolls over to 0 206 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Metering Power Results Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No F17 Remote 1 0 BT 31 CIP Assy Inst 16 No of Elements 13 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Metering Power Results Element Modbus Element name Units Range Comment No Address 0 30301 02 L1 Real Power Watts W 0 0 999 9x1022 Real power per phase signed to show 1 30303 04 L2 Real Power 0 0 999 9x1022 Dane Results on page 32 2 30305 06 L3 Real Power 0 0 999 9x1022 3 30307 08 Total Real Power
206. enu Parameter Structure on page 40 for a description of their functionality Escape Key Up Arrow Key Display mode Returns to parent menu Steps back to the previous parameter menu in the list Down Arrow Key Steps forward to the next parameter menu in the list Enter Key Steps into a sub menu or sets as default screen Program mode Returns to parent menu Steps back to the previous parameter menu in the list Steps forward to the next parameter menu in the list Steps into a sub menu selects the parameter to be modified or changes to Edit mode Edit mode Cancels changes to the parameter restores the existing value and returns to Program mode Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Increments the parameter menu value Decrements the parameter value Saves the parameter change to the master module and returns to Program mode 39 Chapter3 X Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Menu Parameter Structure Chart Key Default Screen Default 4 Level 1 ag v Screen i 2 Fi 2 Next Item t 2 Within Current
207. er 11 100 Dmd W 14 41115 Selection for parameter 12 122 KWh 15 41116 Selection for parameter 13 130 Status 16 41117 Selection for parameter 14 14 Yea Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 233 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables User configured Table Setup Element Modbus Element Name No Address 17 41118 Selection for parameter 15 18 41119 Selection for parameter 16 19 41120 Selection for parameter 17 20 41121 Selection for parameter 18 21 41122 Selection for parameter 19 22 41123 Selection for parameter 20 23 41124 Selection for parameter 21 24 41125 Selection for parameter 22 25 41126 Selection for parameter 23 234 0 301 Default Value 21 Mo Dy 22 Hr min 23 Sec hsc 0 Comment Parameters 15 23 not supported by the DeviceNet network Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 User configured Table Results Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables CSP File No F31 Remote 1 0 BT 62 CIP Assy Inst 37 No of Elements 14 DeviceNet network or 23 All other communication options User Configurable Yes Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All User configured Table Results Appendix A Element Modbus Element Name Range Comm
208. er 4 Create a PLC 5 Typed Writes The following selection performs a write operation to the basic configuration table F10 of the power monitor Insert a MSG Instruction to the ladder rung and assign a control MSG Read Write Message Control MG9 0 Setup Screen This example writes configuration to the Basic Configuration table File F10 in the power monitor MSG MG9 0 1 Elements PLC 5 Typed write This message transfers 9 floats from table F8 0 to the power monitor table F10 The power monitor address is at node 4 local message Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 119 Chapter 4 120 Communication How to Clear or Preset Energy Counters by Using Communication You may clear or preset the energy counters by performing a table write to the Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results table or the Metering Reactive Energy and Amp hour Results table These read write tables each contain 23 integer elements e Password required to clear or preset an energy counter returns 1 e Parameter select bitfield used to select parameter for clearing or presetting See below e Energy counter values expressed in integer array format see page 82 e Metering iteration increments by 1 with each new set of results rolls to 0 at 32 767 The Parameter select bitfield value selects the parameter or parameters to be cleared or preset during the current write as shown in the table below Parameter Sel
209. er Factor Total True Power Factor Description Range Units The ratio between the power and apparent 100 100 Percent power for an individual phase or all three phases signed to show lead or lag Phase 1 Distortion Power Factor Phase 2 Distortion Power Factor Phase 3 Distortion Power Factor Total Distortion Power Factor The ratio between the magnitude of the 0 100 Percent fundamental and the sum of the magnitudes for all of the current harmonics for an individual phase or all three phases Phase 1 Displacement Power Factor Phase 2 Displacement Power Factor Phase 3 Displacement Power Factor Total Displacement Power Factor 34 The cosine of the phase angle between the 100 100 Percent fundamental voltage and current for an individual phase or all three phases signed to show lead or lag Explanation of Power Factor Values Pf 0 kVAR Import kVARHR F Forward 90 Power Factor A Power Factor Leading Lagging PF 100 y 0 kW Import kWH F Forward Pf 100 kW Export 180 lt kWH R Reverse Power Factor Power Factor Lagging Leading Y 270 Pf 0 kVAR Export kVARHR R Reverse Energy Results The power monitor calculates energy values including kWh forward reverse and net kVAh kVARh forward reverse and net and kAh You may read these values by using the display module or via communicat
210. er tags Power Monitor I 0 Tags 111 Chapter 4 112 Communication Powermonitor 3000 Web Access You may view a number of data tables by simply pointing your web browser to the IP address of your power monitor from a computer with access to the units subnet Example http 192 1 1 207 On the left side of the web page is a list of data table that you may view Each list entry is a hyperlink that takes you to the selected table with a single mouse click Each table appears as a tabular display with value descriptions and values To return to the main page click Refresh on your browser Powermonitor 3000 Web Page Rockwell Automation D Allen Bradiey Powermonitor 3000 Ethernet Address 00 00 BC 08 0B 9B ASA Serial 4 20039964 M IP Address 130 151 20 178 Netmask 25525500 Gateway IP Address Not Set e Koop Alive Time 30 Seconds Management Setetions Unit ID 123 Forsan St Enot Application FRN 103 Enet Boot Code FRN 104 Additional Ethernet Information The power monitor utilizes the following fixed Ethernet port numbers e HTML Port 80 e CSP Port 2222 e CIP Port 44818 Modbus TCP TCP port 502 ControlNet Communication Option Powermonitor 3000 ControlNet units support a Class 1 connection to Instance 1 and 2 1 To utilize this scheduled connection to a ControlLogix controller open the controller program offline in RSLogix 5000 software 2 Select the ControlNet bri
211. es the action defined in Setpoint Action Type and writes a time stamped entry to the Event Log Setpoint action types that energize a relay or KYZ output or set an alarm flag are maintained until the setpoint releases Other setpoint actions such as capturing an oscillograph or clearing a counter occur when the setpoint activates The power monitor also writes a time stamped entry in the Event Log when the setpoint releases The event log record contains the maximum over voltage or under voltage recorded during a swell or sag condition respectively This applies only to models M6 and M8 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 123 Chapter 5 Setpoint Programming and Operation 124 Parameter Value Maximum Excursion Setpoint High Limit Setpoint Low Limit TIP If more than one setpoint is used to control the relay and or KYZ output the individual setpoints are evaluated in a logical and to determine the output state You may read setpoint output flags in the Discrete Data table on page 193 and the Remote I O DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet I O Messaging Parameters on page 191 You may read only the first 8 setpoint output flags in the discrete input table with optional remote I O communication Setpoints evaluate data based on six different conditions over forward over reverse under forward under reverse equal and not equal Over and under setpoint evaluation conditions may only be used with analog values s
212. et CAN chip and continue Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Configure the Powermonitor 3000 Unit by using RSNetworx for DeviceNet Software TIP The DeviceNet network is an open standard multi vendor l communication network Although other vendors offer DeviceNet configuration tools all examples in this manual will depict the use of Rockwell Software RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 1 Launch RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software At this point the DeviceNet scanner module does not know what device to scan 2 Click Online to list the available devices on the network DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet LE o x Fle Edt View Network Device Tools Heb ja8i u amp s rel Je fr Ela ASSI ed Hardware P DeviceNet e Category AC Drive Barcode Scanner Commurication Adapter DeviceNet to SCANpost Dodge EZUNK General Purpose Discrete 1 0 Generic Device Human Machine Interface Inductive Proximity Switch Limit Switch Photoelectric Sensor Rockwell Automation miscellaneous a Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Dodge J Rockwell Automation Electro Craft Motion Control 3 Rockwell Automation Reliance Electric Toggle the online state of the network Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 73 Chapter4 Communication The available networks are displayed Browse for network Ethernet aes N amp s AB
213. ethod to read oscillogram capture data The readback mode options include the following e Auto increment all channels successive reads of the Oscillograph Results table increment through all remaining blocks of the current channel increment through all remaining channels and wrap back to the original channel e Auto increment current channel successive reads of the results table will increment through all remaining blocks of the current channel only e Manual increment each write of the Oscillograph Configuration Read back Data Select table specifies the channel and block to be read in the next read of the Oscillograph Results table Successive reads of the results table returns the same block of data each time if no read back select write is done Reading Oscillograph Data Read oscillograph data from the Oscillograph Results table by using the indexed read method Oscillograph data is not available via Modbus communication This read only table comprises these 29 DeviceNet network or 59 all other communication options integer elements e Capture timestamp in three elements using the standard timestamp format except the year is omitted e Capture number in the range 1 8 M6 or 1 2 M8 e Channel number in the range 1 7 see above e Block number block number of the data contained in the table see above Capture type in the range of 1 5 see table above e Trigger statistics see below Range 0 22 999
214. ew size of Instance 1 TIP Refer to the Rockwell Automation KnowledgeBase http www ab com for additional information on setting up a user configured I O instance Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Chapter 5 Theory of Setpoint Operation Setpoint Programming and Operation Setpoint operation provides a method other than communication for the power monitor to be used in and interact with power and energy applications Some examples of setpoint applications include the following e Turning on an output relay when predicted demand exceeds a preset level for simple demand management e Turning off an output relay if phase rotation is accidentally reversed helping to assure that loads rotate in the correct direction e Capturing an oscillogram when a status input is energized Setpoint operation permits the power monitor to simultaneously monitor a number of parameters and take action when specified conditions are met The M4 and M5 models support 10 setpoints while the M6 and M8 support 20 There are eight parameters to configure for each setpoint Setpoint Number Type Evaluation Condition High Limit Low Limit Action Delay Release Delay and Action Type These parameters are described in the Setpoint Configuration table on page 128 In the M6 and M8 models setpoints 19 and 20 have special significance and are preset at the factory Refer to Sag and Swell in Chapter 8 When a setpoint activates it tak
215. f peak day 0 127 65 6 42207 Mid peak a m 0 4095 1792 7 42208 Mid peak p m 120 8 42209 Peak a m 2048 9 42210 Peak p m 7 262 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Time of Use Records Real Energy and Demand Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables CSP File No F56 Remote l 0 BT 51 CIP Assy Inst 72 No of Elements 12 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Time of Use Records Real Energy and Demand Appendix A Element Modbus Element Name Range Units Comment No Address 0 32401 02 Off peak real energy 999 999 0 MWh Refer to Reading Time of use Log Data on 999 999 0 page 158 1 32403 04 Off peak real energy 999 999 999 kWh 999 999 999 2 32405 06 Off peak demand 0 0 999 9 x 102 Watts 3 32407 08 Mid peak real energy 999 999 0 MWh 999 999 0 4 32409 10 Mid peak real energy 999 999 999 kWh 999 999 999 5 32411 12 Mid peak demand 0 0 999 9 x 10 Watts 6 32413 14 Peak real energy 999 999 0 MWh 999 999 0 7 32415 16 Peak real energy 999 999 999 kWh 999 999 999 8 32417 18 Peak demand 0 0 999 9 x 102 Watts 9 33419 20 Record number 0 12 10 32421 22 Start date 000101 991231 YYMMDD Start month day for data stored in this record inclusive 11 32423 24 End date 000101 991231 YYMMDD End month day for data stored in this record inclusive
216. f recurrences of a periodic phenomenon in a unit of time In electrical terms frequency is specified as so many Hertz Hz where one Hz equals one cycle per second function code Function byte second byte of any Modbus Command packet holding register This is a Modbus mapped location used for reading the writing word length data For a power monitor slave device the locations are defined by the Modbus Memory Map horsepower hp A unit of power or the capacity of a mechanism to do work It is equivalent to raising 33 000 pounds one foot in one minute One horsepower equals 746 watts impedance The total opposition that is resistance and reactance a circuit offers to the flow of alternating current at a given frequency It is measured in ohms induction motor An alternating current motor in which the primary winding usually the stator is connected to the power source and induces a current into a secondary usually the rotor inductor A device consisting of one or more windings with or without a magnetic core Motors are largely inductive 345 Glossary 346 initiator pulses Electrical impulses generated by pulse initiator mechanisms installed in utility revenue meters Each pulse indicates the consumption of a specific number of watts These pulses can be used to measure energy consumption and demand input register This is a Modbus mapped location used for reading word length data For a power monitor slave
217. f use log 158 reading transient analysis 181 reading transient capture 182 relay and KYZ output operation 137 communication loss behavior 140 descrete 1 0 control 139 forced operation 139 no control operation 140 pulsed control 138 setpoint control 139 Remote l 0 70 performance features 18 status indicators 23 RS 232 65 performance features 18 status indicators 23 RS 485 64 performance features 17 status indicators 23 RSNetWorx for DeviceNet 73 f f f S safety considerations 11 sag and swell 174 sample applications 281 353 Index 354 scrolling 43 serial communication 91 auto sense protocol 95 DF1 protocol 91 Modbus RTU slave protocol 92 setpoint control 139 setpoint inputs 141 setpoint programming and operation 123 equal 127 not equal 128 over forward 124 over reverse 125 under forward 126 under reverse 127 setting default screen 44 simple reads of data tables 97 specifications 335 337 control relay 338 general input output and environmental ratings 338 input and output ratings 338 measurement accuracy resolution and range 337 relay life 338 status indicators 22 status input operations 141 counters 141 demand period synchronization 141 event logging of status inputs 142 setpoint inputs 141 symmetrical component analysis 31 system clock sample applications 282 date and time summary 304 EtherNet IP and ControlLogix 287 MicroLogix controller and EtherNet IP communication networks 296
218. flag 5 e e fe 27 Clear setpoint 5 time e e je 6 Set alarm flag 6 e e je 28 Clear setpoint 6 time e e je 7 Set alarm flag 7 e je 29 Clear setpoint 7 time e e je 8 Set alarm flag 8 e je 30 Clear setpoint 8 time e o 9 Set alarm flag 9 e e je 3 Clear setpoint 9 time e e je 10 Set alarm flag 10 e e 23 Clear setpoint 10 time e o 11 Set alarm flag 11 e jo 33 Clear setpoint 11 time e o 12 Set alarm flag 12 e je 34 Clear setpoint 12 time e o 13 Set alarm flag 13 e fe 35 Clear setpoint 13 time e je 14 Set alarm flag 14 e e je 36 Clear setpoint 14 time e je 15 Set alarm flag 15 e je 37 Clear setpoint 15 time e je 16 Set alarm flag 16 e je 38 Clear setpoint 16 time e o 17 Save a trend log record e e 39 Clear setpoint 17 time e je 18 Clear kWh result e je 40 Clear setpoint 18 time e je 19 Clear kVARh result e je 4 Clear setpoint 19 time e je 20 Clear kVAh result e je 42 Clear setpoint 20 time e je 21 Clear Ah result e je 43 Capture oscillograph e je Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Examples of Setpoint Operation Let us look again at the setpoint applications mentioned at the beginning of this chapter 131 Chapter 5 132 Setpoint Programming and Operation references Carefully consider all control operational and safety issues when designing and implementing setpoint operations These examples are intended to dem
219. freeze holds the output in its last state during a communication loss and freezes the output in this state when communication recovers You may clear the freeze by placing the logic controller into Program mode changing the behavior to last state resume or cycling power to the power monitor e De energize resume de energizes the output during communication loss and resume output control when communication recovers e De energize freeze de energizes the output during communication loss and freezes the output de energized when communication recovers You may clear the freeze by placing the logic controller into Program mode changing the behavior to last state resume or cycling power to the power monitor Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 1 0 Operations Chapter 6 Status Input Operations Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 The power monitor s two self powered status inputs provide a number of flexible configuration options that help customize the power monitor operation to meet the requirements of your specific application Counters You may use the power monitor to monitor discrete events such as circuit breaker status or kWh pulses from a legacy electrical energy steam gas or other type of meter Each status input has associated with it an independent counter which increments with every false to true transition of its input The counter rolls over to 0 when it reaches its maximum value of 29 99
220. ge of state e You may choose to log or ignore log is default changes to the date and time setting These choices provide you with the flexibility to ignore routine occurrences thereby increasing the time that important events are stored For example a status input may count pulses from a water or gas meter Or the unit may be connected to an energy logging system such as RSEnergyMetrix software that synchronizes the time every night at midnight In either case important events would likely be overwritten by routine nuisance events Viewing the Event Log by Using the Display Module The event number shows up in the top line and in the bottom line an event description followed by the event time stamp scrolls across the display The Event Codes table lists the event codes as shown on the display module Event Type Name Event Type Event Type Event Command Code Shown by DM Number No Event No Evnt 0 0 Setpoint Activated SetzzA 1 Setpoint Number 1 10 Setpoint Deactivated Setz4p 2 Setpoint Number 1 10 Relay Forced Energized Riy F1 3 Relay Number 1 2 Relay Forced De energized Riy Fol 4 Relay Number 1 2 Relay No Force Option Riy NFU 5 Relay Number 1 2 Status Input Set S4 Onl 6 Status Input Number 1 2 Status Input Cleared S ort 7 Status Input Number 1 2 kWh Counter Set Wh Set 8 1 kVARh Counter Set Varh Set 8 2 kVAh Counter Set kVAh Set 8 3 Ah Counter Set
221. h Data Point 49 58 Oscillograph Data Point 50 246 Comment DeviceNet supports only 20 data points per read Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Load Factor Log Configuration Read back Select Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A CSP File No N41 Remote 1 0 BT 16 CIP Assy Inst 49 Write 50 Read No of Elements 6 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Applies to Load Factor Log Results Parameters on page 248 Load Factor Log Configuration Read back Select Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration or command 1 for readback select returns 1 1 Record to read back 0 12 0 Refer to Reading the Load Factor Log on 2 Read back mode 0 1 1 page H5 3 Clear peak reset average command 0 1 0 4 Auto clear reset day 0 31 31 5 Reserved 0 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 247 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Load Factor Log Results Parameters CSP File No F42 Remote 1 0 BT 43 CIP Assy Inst 51 No of Elements 1 User Configurable No Data Type Hoating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Load Factor Log Results Comment Refer to Reading the Load Factor Log on page 178
222. h may operate at the same time You must configure the DeviceNet communication parameters before you connect the power monitor to a DeviceNet network The DeviceNet configuration parameters include node address or MAC ID baud rate and bus off interrupt response e Node address Range 0 64 default 63 Communication Rate Range 125 250 or 500 Kbps fixed rate AutoBaud or Program Baud Default 125 Kbps fixed rate e Bus off Interrupt Specifies the response to a CAN bus off interrupt Remotely settable node addressing node address 64 enables RSNetworx for DeviceNet to configure the node address of the power monitor In addition this allows client devices that support the DeviceNet Offline Connection Set to identify nodes with duplicate addresses and automatically reassign the addresses of the offending nodes AutoBaud allows the power monitor to automatically adjust to the prevailing baud rate of the DeviceNet network Program Baud enables remote baud rate selection With this option selected you may use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to set the power monitor communication rate Any change in communication rate takes place after power is cycled to the power monitor Bus off Interrupt specifies the response of the power monitor to a CAN bus off interrupt The two options are Hold In Reset which stops communication until power is cycled to the power monitor and Reset and Continue which resets communication and attempts to re establ
223. hanged the element 4 range in the RS 232 table to 0 6 N INO N Se Summary of Changes Topic Page Added Single Password Write data tables 266 Added Single Parameter Read data tables 267 Added sample applications Appendix C e Read and write power monitor tables by using an SLC 500 controller and a 1747 SCNR ControlNet scanner e Read and write power monitor tables by using a MicroLogix controller over EtherNet IP and Modbus RTU communication networks e Read and write power monitor tables by using a Component HMI over an EtherNet IP communication network Additioanl minor changes have been made throughout the document Change bars mark all changes 4 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Safety Product Description Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Communication Setpoint Programming and Operation 1 0 Operations Data Logging Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Table of Contents Preface Using This User Manual v 24 aeter ket eed 7 Additional Resources d ye ak any Een W e OEE NMERPAYROERA 9 Terms and Conventions sx pn E oq Fere Ie eo weg ls 9 Chapter 1 Safety Consid ranse 3 999 was eL Qr s see IR 11 Other PIOOXU os oov scala asd d Ge C ee Eod etait 4 12 Chapter 2 Master Module ka wo abe qd 204 eat otha REA och eae e ES 14 Display MOGUIG ie ep dtt bn Ae oh SG PEs pedet d 15 Performance Features y a oov bole Gb ay Ao Cod 16 Communication Options ll
224. hase Displacement PF 100 100 8 30517 18 L1 Distortion Power Factor 0 100 The ratio between the magnitude of the fundamental 9 30519 20 L2 Distortion Power Factor 0 100 M E gthiemagniteides forallof the rumen 10 30521 22 L3 Distortion Power Factor 0 100 11 30523 24 Three phase Distortion PF 0 100 12 30525 26 Metering iteration 0 32 767 Increments by 1 32 767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 209 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results Parameters CSP File No N20 Remote 1 0 BT 29 CIP Assy Inst 19 Write 20 Read No of Elements 23 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results Element Modbus Element Name Range Units No Address 0 40501 Password 0 9999 1 40502 Parameter select 0 to 7 bitfield 2 40503 kWh forward x 109 999 999 kWh 3 40504 dH x 108 3 isos x 10 THE x 10 6 40507 7 40508 kWh reverse x109 999 999 8 40509 dH x 108 3 mm x 10 4 x 103 11 40512 12 40513 KWh net 4M y 109 999 999 13 40514 x 108 3 T mT dH x 10 THE x 10 16 40517 17 40518 WAh 44199 999 999 KVAh 18 40519 x 108 3 20 40521 PRECIO dH x 10 3 21 40522 22 40523 Metering iteration 0 32
225. hat this example uses block transfer instructions rather than message instructions and the block transfer length determines which data table is selected 285 Appendix C Sample Applications The source and destination data tables in the PLC 5 must contain at least as many words as the block transfer length The Read Clock from PM3K and Set Clock from PLC bits are used to initiate the messages and are reset when the message instruction either completes successfully or an error occurs In your application code if the message rungs are controlled programmatically ensure that only one message is enabled at a time and add sufficient time delays between block transfers to avoid overloading the channel Ladder Diagram 286 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C EtherNet IP and ControlLogix Networks The third example reads and writes the power monitor date and time data table by using a ControlLogix controller and an EtherNet IP communication network Tags The example uses two ControlLogix tags PM3K_Date_Time and Set_date_time Both are arrays of 8 INT elements The program also uses two standard MESSAGE tags Read_time and Set_time The following figure shows the Set_date_time to set the power monitor clock to January 1 2003 at midnight The tag PM3K_Date_Time shows the results of a read 7 13 seconds after the write Set Date Time
226. he last automatic or manual clear reset operation e Ending date for this load factor record Range 0 123199 mmddyy 0 if the selected record is blank Transient detection functionality available only in the M8 model continuously monitors your choice of voltage or current inputs for the occurrence of a transient Transients such as voltage spikes and momentary dropouts can disrupt equipment connected to the power source but can be difficult to detect Use communication to configure transient capture parameters and retrieve the data for display and or processing The display module does not support an interface for transient detection Transient detection includes the following Continuously monitors all six voltage or six current channels e Identifies transients at least 200 microseconds in duration e Triggers a transient oscillogram capture when it detects a transient e Records captures each containing 12 cycles 6 cycles preceding and 6 cycles following the transient e Stores up to six transient captures of all seven voltage and current channels in non volatile memory e Calculates RMS voltage and current values for each cycle in each capture e Stores each data point in the capture with 13 bit plus sign resolution Monitors for transients on your choice of voltage channels or current channels e Automatically or manually adjusts transient detection thresholds You may configure a detected transient to trigger a setpoint whi
227. hen receiving integer information from the power monitor the data will be readable from file number N10 INT_DATA The length is the number of elements in the assembly instance being read Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Writing Information through the SCNR Scanner Observe the sample of the CIP SETUP file for the writing the configuration of the basic configuration table Instance 4 of the power monitor CIP Setup File Data File N9 dec CIP_SETUP 4 2048 o o o a Hg N3 11 Radix Decimal hd Smb Cd Columns 10 Desc Properties TIP The write procedure differs slightly from the read process N9 4 service has been changed to 0x10 or 16 decimal Set Single Attribute N9 6 is the write instance assembly number of the power monitor basic configuration table N9 9 is the size of the table in words for a 1404 M805A CNT A The size for float tables is two times the number of elements Integer tables are one times the size of the table elements When a 1 is written to location N9 11 the contents of file F13 WR_TRANSFR are sent to the power monitor In this case starting with float F13 0 through F13 8 The writing of an integer file sends the contents of N14 WR TRANSFR For further reading on the functionality of the 1747 SCNR scanner refer to the user manual publication 1747 RM623 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 323 Appendix C Sample Applicati
228. hoice TIP Reading Files From the Power Monitor Both integer and float files can be read from the power monitor This example reads the Date and Time table Floats can be read by using this same process but destination file should be of type float 1 Select a PLC 5 controller for your Target Device Local Network and Control Block Date and Time Message Read Read Write Message Type Peer To Peer Read Write Local Remote Control Block Control Block Length Setup Screen 115 Chapter 4 116 Communication 2 Fill out the Setup dialog as shown F MSG N7 0 14 Elements Notice that under target device that power monitor data table N11 Date and Time was selected The Local Node Address is the address of the power monitor Controlnet Node Address 4 Writing Files to the Power Monitor Writing data to the power monitor is done with the same method It is recommended that 1 integer file and 1 float file be set aside in the SLC controller for use when writing to the power monitor Data to be written to the power monitor is loaded in one of these files according to data type before the transaction is started The following example writes data to the power monitor 1 Select PLC5 for your Target Device Local Network and Control Block MSG Read Write Message Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write Target Device PLCS Local Remote Local Control Block N7 42 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen
229. iceNet power monitor eds files to view parameters Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 71 Chapter 4 78 Communication Optional Ethernet Communication Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in ENT are equipped with an optional Ethernet 10 100BaseT communication port and a native RS 485 port in a dual port configuration that allows simultaneous operation of the ports You must configure the communication parameters before you connect your power monitor to an Ethernet network See your network administrator for assistance in setting the communication options Configuration parameters include the following e P Internet Protocol address e Subnet Mask e Gateway IP address The IP Address uniquely identifies your Powermonitor 3000 unit on the network You configure the unit s IP address the way it is most commonly expressed as four decimal numbers connected by decimal points aaa bbb ccc ddd You may set each number also called byte or octet within the range of 0 255 decimal The default IP address is 192 168 254x where x is the factory assigned Unit ID number An IP address of 255 255 255 255 is not permitted IMPORTANT The IP address for your power monitor must not conflict with the IP address of any other device on the network Contact your network administrator to obtain a unique IP address for your unit The IP address is a 32 bit binary number which consists of the network address NetID
230. iguring instance 1 0 all integer or data type 1 float data type e Word 3 between 1 and 295 incl Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 315 Appendix C 316 Sample Applications Ladder Diagram Sample logic program that shows a way to configure a Powermonitor 3000 User Configurable Data Table See the accompanying text for a list of tags to be created in the ControlLogix controller The first rung allows a selection of tables to write to the PM3000 Enter a 0 1 or 2 into the tag Select to select between the default table a custom table or an Undo of the last write The selected from a ControlLogix controller via the 1404 NENET communications option card using EtherNet IP table is copied into the Download table The rung logic also copies the PM3000 password into the Download table If the password is changed from the default 0 the new password must be entered into the tag pwd Start Oneshot_1 Toggle the Start tag to begin Ju LONS EQU Equal Source A Select 2 Source B 0 EQU Equal Source A Select 2 Source B 1 EQU Equal Source A Select 2 Source B 2 COP Copy File Source Pwd Dest Download 0 Length 1 COP Copy File Source Default 0 Dest Download 0 Length 26 COP Copy File Source Custom 0 Dest Download 0 Length 26 COP Copy File Source Old 0 Dest Download 0
231. ilo Watt Hours Forward Description Range Units The total real power consumed 0 1 0x10 2 kWh Kilo Watt Hours Reverse Kilo Watt Hours Net The total real power produced The sum of forward and reverse power Kilo VAR Hours Forward The total reactive power consumed 0 1 0x10 2 kVARh Kilo VAR Hours Reverse The total reactive power produced Kilo VAR Hours Net The sum of forward and reverse reactive power Kilo VA Hours Net The total apparent power consumed 0 1 0x10 2 kVAh Amp Hours Net Accumulated amp hours consumed 0 1 0x10 2 Ah Demand Current The calculated demand for average current 0 999 9x102 Amps Max Demand Current The maximum peak demand for current included in Min Max Log Demand Kilo Watts The calculated demand for real power 0 999 9x102 W Max Demand Kilo Watts The maximum peak demand for real power included in Min Max Log included in Min Max Log Demand Kilo VARs The calculated demand for reactive power 0 999 9x102 VAR Max Demand Kilo VARs The maximum peak demand for reactive power included in Min Max Log Demand Kilo VA The calculated demand for apparent power 0 999 9x102 VA Max Demand Kilo VA The maximum peak demand for apparent power Projected Current Demand The projected demand for average current 0 999 9x102 Amps Projected Kilo Watt Demand The projected demand for real
232. in volt amperes rather than watts The average VA during a predefined interval The highest average for example Peak VA demand is sometimes used for billing voltage V The force which causes current to flow through a conductor One volt equals the force required to produce a current flow of one ampere through a resistance of one ohm watt W A measure of real power The unit of electrical power required to do work at the rate of one joule per second It is the power expended when one ampere of direct current flows through a resistance of one ohm Equal to apparent power VA times the power factor 349 Glossary 350 watt demand Power during a predetermined interval The highest average for example Peak demand is commonly used for billing watt hour Whr The number of watts used in one hour Since the power usage varies it is necessary to integrate this parameter over time Power flow can be either forward or reverse wattmeter An instrument for measuring the real power in an electric circuit Its scale is usually graduated in watts kilowatts or megawatts volt ampere reactive hours VARH The number of VARs used in one hour Since the value of this parameter varies it is necessary to integrate it over time VARs can be either forward or reverse Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 A advanced device configuration 50 date and time 55 daylight saving time 58 demand setup 52 display scroll
233. ing Update Rate Communication Configuring Communication Data Messaging Overview Data Messaging application Considerations Setpoint Programming and Operation Theory of Setpoint Operation Configuring Setpoints 1 0 Operations Relay and KYZ Output Operations Status Input Operations Data Logging Event Log Configurable Trend Log Min Max Log Preface Preface For information about Refer to Chapter Advanced Features 8 Oscillography Harmonic Analysis Sag and Swell Load Factor Transient Detection Metering and Capture Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A Catalog Number Explanation B Sample Applications C Technical Specifications D Frequently Asked Questions E Glossary Glossary Index Index What This User Manual Does Not Contain Topics related to installation and wiring are not covered in this manual Refer to the Powermonitor 3000 Installation Instructions publication 1404 INOO7 for the following information e Selecting an enclosure for the Powermonitor 3000 unit and associated equipment e Mounting and wiring of the master module e Mounting and connection of the display module refer to publication 1404 IN005 e Selection and connection of current transformers CTs and potential transformers PTs e Wiring to native and optional communication ports This manual does not provide information on functionality f
234. ion Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Configurable Energy Counter Rollover You may configure the number of digits at which energy values roll over to zero The parameter range is 4 15 digits Configure this setting in Advanced Device Configuration by using the display module or by writing to the Advanced Device Configuration table on page 196 This setting lets you optimize the energy counter rollover for use with applications that support a limited number of significant digits For instance the display module supports a resolution of five significant digits The Trend Log which is used for automatic data re population in some energy logging applications such as RSEnergyMetrix supports twelve significant digits with eight digits of precision Demand Calculation A typical industrial utility bill includes not only an energy or kWh charge but also a Demand charge Demand is equal to the average power level during a predefined time interval Some power providers may base demand on current VA or VARs instead of kW This interval continuously repeats and is typically between five and 30 minutes in length The formula for kW demand is shown below t T Demand T J P t dt T Demand interval duration t t Time at beginning of interval P t Power as a function of time Usually a utility rate tariff includes a peak dem
235. ion CRC failure bit 4 no calibration data bit 5 wrong application firmware loaded 11 30612 RAM status 0 0K bit 0 read write test failure 12 30613 Application FRN 0 9999 100 indicates version 1 00 103 indicates version 1 03 13 30614 Boot code FRN 0 9999 100 indicates version 1 00 101 indicates version 1 01 212 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Selftest Diagnostic Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Element Modbus Element name Range Comment No Address 14 30615 ASIC build 0 9999 Revision number of the code that was used to fabricate the ASIC 15 30616 Option communication FRN 0 9999 100 indicates version 1 00 103 indicates version 1 03 0 none catalog numbers ending in 000 232 16 30617 Display module FRN 0 9999 104 indicates version 1 04 105 indicates version 1 05 Returns 0 if no DM connected 17 30618 Reserved 0 Returns 0 18 30619 Digital board revision 0 7 0 02A 1 03A 19 30620 Analog board revision 0 7 0 02A 1 03A 20 30621 Reserved 0 Returns 0 21 30622 Reserved 0 Returns 0 22 30623 MM Device ID 0 255 Sequentially assigned at time of manufacture May not be changed 23 30624 Master module type current 4 5 6 0r 8 4 M4 5 M5 6 MB 8 MB reflects any upgrades 24 30625 Display module type 0 1 0 No display module connected 1 1404 DM connected to master module 25 30626 Option com
236. ish the communication link Default is Hold in Reset You must configure each device on a DeviceNet network with a unique node address Addresses 0 and 64 have special significance 0 is most often used as a scanner address and 64 enables remotely settable node addressing as described above You must also configure each device with the correct baud rate for the network The DeviceNet network must be designed within its recognized design limitations of baud rate trunk line length drop line budget and common mode voltage drop for correct operation n Chapter 4 72 Communication TIP Some legacy power monitor units with optional DeviceNet communication do no support remotely settable node addressing AutoBaud or Program Baud You can check whether your power monitor supports these functions by viewing the Optional Communication Card status by using your display module Communication type 81 does not support these functions type 88 does You may also view this status item by a read of assembly instance 23 element 25 Optional DeviceNet Communication Configuration Summary Parameter Description Range Default User Setting Node DeviceNet node 0 64 decimal 63 Address number MAC ID Baud Rate DeviceNet 0 125 Kbps 0 125 Kbps Communication 1 250 Kbps Rate 2 500 Kbps 3 Autobaud 4 Program Baud Bus off Specifies response 0 Hold CAN 0 Hold in Reset Interrupt to a CAN bus off chip in reset interrupt 1 Res
237. ize is 8 elements for the M4 and M5 and 9 elements for the M6 and M8 3 Table size increased in revision 3 1x of the master module firmware 10 The size of the Trend log results table is 28 elements for the DeviceNet network and 44 elements for all other communication protocols 11 The size of the Event log results table is 14 elements for M4 M5 17 elements for M6 and 18 elements for the M8 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 189 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables 12 The User configured table results table is populated from the bottom up with the number of parameters you configured The DeviceNet table must contain 14 elements or less to remain PLC SLC controllers compatible 13 Harmonic results THD crest factor and more data table size is 18 elements for the M4 and M5 and 20 elements for the M6 and M8 4 The Oscillograph results and Transient capture results tables are 29 elements for the DeviceNet network and 59 elements for all other communication protocols 190 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Remote l 0 DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet I O Messaging Parameters CSP File No N A Remote 1 0 BT N A CIP Assy Inst 1 Read 2 Write No of Elements 2 Default User Configurable Yes DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet Data Type Integer Selectable as Floating Point with DeviceNet EtherNet IP
238. le 17 Status Indicators cob ug V eta be hte X A PEST Pss 22 Chapter 3 Metering Functionality suain m Frid e eth 27 Display Module Functionality sd au Rum 38 Configuration by Using the Display Module 47 Metering Update Rate 2 25073 os 93 pep pU e qose ok 60 Chapter 4 Configuring Communication vas dos oa ed eK AE ae 63 Data Messaging Overview llle 80 Data Messaging application Considerations 90 Chapter 5 Theory of Setpoint Operation lille 123 Configuring Setpoints 4575s Bote rp CE CREE A 128 Chapter 6 Relay and KYZ Output Operations 137 Status Input Operations s quse hed Taper ERE 141 Chapter 7 Event LOS cascos Gn vto a ctv ca ee 143 Configurable Trend Log c 1v edu eed Y em X Pee ores 148 Min Max LOZ s eap tn sd edd o eder ea e Rod 153 Time of PT 156 Table of Contents Advanced Features Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Catalog Number Explanation Sample Applications Technical Specifications Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 8 OsGillosraphy atyn I dad be ab Rb D Ok Nx 159 Harmonic Analysis ue ct ro Pan ahd Pee bns 166 Sae and Sell sarei qi De ode Sae Aud ee en 174 Load Factor p eode aprendo eet cR otn E Oboe bg 177 Transient Detection Metering and Capture 179 Appendix A spine a oleic Sy ae ve oat aside uate ate Segoe with che Me ualan E Er 187 Appendix B Master MOGQOUIG a ions die ro oboe e eb ree Roe t dea a 279 Display Mod
239. lear trigger command clears one or all captures or triggers a new capture Always returns 0 In the M8 model values of 3 8 have same meaning as 0 These are the options 0 no action 1 clear capture 1 2 clear capture 2 3 clear capture 3 M6 only 4 clear capture 4 M6 only 5 clear capture 5 M6 only 6 clear capture 6 M6 only 7 clear capture 7 M6 only 8 clear capture 8 M6 only 9 clear all captures 10 initiate a new capture Capture type selects sample rate and data resolution or indicates selected sample rate and resolution Range 1 5 default 0 1 disables oscillography See the Capture Type Properties table on page 161 Pre trigger specifies how much of the captured waveform occurred before the triggering event Range 0 100 per cent default 90 Reserved must be zero 0 on a write returns 0 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Capture Type Properties Advanced Features Chapter 8 e Capture clear status Read only bitfield that indicates which capture numbers are clear Bit 0 LSB corresponds to capture 1 bit 1 to capture 2 and so on For each bit 1 indicates clear 0 indicates not clear e Capture ready status read only bitfield that indicates which capture numbers contain captures that are ready to read Same bit correspondence as above For each bit 1 indicates the capture is ready 0 indicates no capture or not yet ready If a client reads a capture that
240. lication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Data Table Attributes Powermonitor 3000 unit data table attributes include their addressing data access number of elements data type and user configurability Address Data tables are addressed in a number of ways depending on the type of communication and the protocol being used e For serial communication native RS 485 and optional RS 232 and optional Ethernet CSP PCCC communication the CSP Client Server Protocol File Number identifies the table and its data type in message instructions topic configuration or communication commands CSP file numbers are based on SLC 5 0x data table addressing IMPORTANT Because SLC 500 data tables 1 8 are assigned specific data types file numbers lower than 9 are not used in the Powermonitor 3000 unit e For remote I O communication a unique Block Transfer Size identifies the data table to read or write using a Block Transfer instruction e For optional DeviceNet and EtherNet IP communication a CIP Control and Information Protocol Assembly Instance identifies the data table Data Access Data tables may be read only or read write Number of Elements the number of unique data values contained in the table The number of words or bytes this represents depends on the data type Data Type Specified as floating point or integer Each floating
241. ll appear in words 2 8 and 2 9 of the data table Remote 1 0 Discrete Data Accepted by Powermonitor Units Master Output Data Element Element name Range No 1 Relay control 2 KYZ control Comment 0 Bit 8 0 De energize 128 Bit 8 1 Energize Must be enabled by Control source parameter DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet 1 0 Data Provided by Powermonitor Units Scanner Input Data Instance 1 Element No 0 1 Element name Relay output status Solid state KYZ output status Comment 0 De energized amp not forced Energized amp not forced 2 Forced de energized 3 Forced energized Alarm output word 0 FFFF Bitfield indicates state of 16 alarm output flags 0 released 1 asserted Bit 0 relay setpoint output flag 1 Bit 1 KYZ setpoint output flag 2 Bit 2 setpoint output flag 3 Bit 15 setpoint output flag 16 Status inputs state Bit 0 status input 1 0 open 1 contact closure detected Bit 1 status input 2 0 open 1 contact closure detected Bit 2 demand sync timeout 1 the demand delay expired before the next expected external demand sync This bit clears when the next external demand sync occurs Refer to Advanced Device Configuration Parameters element 23 Bits 3 15 unused always 0 Status input 1 counter Status input 2 counter 29 999 TIP Counts to 29 999 rolls over to 0 Size and content
242. llowing example and ladder listing use these settings e IP Address 130 151 70 173 e Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 e Message type PLC 5 Typed Read Sample Program Operation The ladder program is executed within a continuous task This sample logic reads and saves the existing User Configured Data Table setup file from the power monitor to permit an Undo operation You must create tags listed in the ControlLogix Tags Used table on page 315 and enter data correctly to configure the power monitor User Configurable Data Table successfully The Start flag begins the logic execution The Select tag s value determines which configuration is written to the power monitor 0 Default table setup e 1 Custom table setup e 2 Undo the last write First the logic reads the existing setup table from the power monitor and saves it in the Old tag After a brief delay it writes the selected setup table If the number of parameters in the User Configured Data Table changes the power monitor resets After another delay the write status table is read and if it indicates a successful write the Success flag is set The message configuration for writing the new configuration table to the power monitor is shown below Note the instance name is the lower of the two values given in the Summary of Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables for all Communication Options table on page 188 Service code 10 hex is for a write Set attribute single Publication 1404 UM
243. lue 14 40215 Restore factory default 0 1 0 0 No action 1 Restore factory default settings config 15 40216 Clear status input counters 0 3 0 0 No action 2 Clear counter 2 1 Clear counter 1 3 Clear both 16 40217 Wdog action 0 1 1 0 Restart log an event and halt operation 1 Restart log an event and resume Refer to Watchdog Timeout Action on page 55 17 40218 Force relay output 0 3 0 0 No change 2 3 1 Force energize the relay 8 40219 Force solid state KYZ output 0 3 0 2 Force de energize the relay 3 Release force of relay output Overrides setpoint or pulse output control 19 40220 Default relay state in event 0 3 0 0 Last state resume of communication loss 1 Last state freeze 2 De energize resume 20 40221 os KYZ se A event 3 De energize freeze Sl E Refer to Communication Loss Behavior on page 140 21 40222 DM text scroll rate 0 1 1 0 Slow 1 Fast 22 40223 Energy counter rollover 4 15 Digits 15 Refer to Configurable Energy Counter Rollover on page 35 23 40224 Forced demand sync delay 0 900 s 10 0 Disable 1 900 number of seconds delay 24 40225 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 25 40226 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 197 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Native Communication Configuration Parameters CSP File No N13 Remote 1 0 BT
244. master to communicate with a maximum of 247 slave devices however no more than the physical limitations of the RS 485 or RS 232 ports permit The master device on a Modbus network is not assigned an address Modbus messages are always initiated by the master The slave nodes never transmit data without receiving a request from the master node The slave nodes never communicate with each other The master node initiates only one Modbus transaction at a time The power monitor supports Modbus RTU the version of Modbus applied to serial communication in which each byte of data consists of two hexadecimal values Modbus ASCII Modbus Plus and Modbus TCP are not supported Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 The power monitor does not initiate Modbus commands but responds to commands sent by the Modbus master The following Modbus function codes are supported e 03 Read Holding Registers e 04 Read Input Registers e 16 Write Multiple Holding Registers e 08 Diagnostics 00 Echo Command Data 02 Return Diagnostic Counters 10 Clear Diagnostic Counters e 06 Write Single Holding Register Function 06 16 and the sub function 10 of function 08 support Broadcast packets Refer to Appendix A for Modbus addresses of the power monitor data tables The power monitor supports zero based addressing The address ranges are arranged as follows note that n
245. matically be sure that only one message is enabled at a time Ladder Program Reading N11 table itin N11 READ DATETIMEREN MG100 1 Read Write Message MSG File MG10U 1 Write N11 table Source is N211 MG100 2 Read Write Message MSG File MG100 2 Setup Screen 298 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Message Configuration Read MSG MG100 1 1 Elements General MutiHep This Controller Control Bits Chanret nese eves tT Communication Command rem Comecon AE Size in Elements Ener ER Target Device Message done DN o Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST Data Table Address Message Enabled EN Local Remote MultiHop res Routing Information File RI ume Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors MSG MG100 1 1 Elements Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To Address Typ To Address This MicroLogie Channel 1 EtheiNet IP Device str 10 90 172 91 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 299 Appendix C Sample Applications Message Configuration Write MSG MG100 2 1 Flements General MultiHop This Controller Control Bits L Channel eet E Communication Command pme Dres nection 05710 Data Table Address Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements Enor ER E Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST
246. may be based on current month peak demand or on historical peak demand depending on relative magnitude Usually the historical period is the past eleven months although it can be for the life of the contract Billing demand is either the current month peak demand or some percentage 7596 is typical of the highest historical peak demand depending on which is largest It is designed to compensate the electric utility for maintaining equipment not fully utilized reactance The opposition to the flow of alternating current Capacitive reactance is the opposition offered by capacitors and inductive reactance is the opposition offered by an inductive load Both reactances are measured in ohms real power The component of apparent power that represents real work in an alternating current circuit It is expressed in watts and is equal to the apparent power times the power factor resistance The property of a substance which impedes current flow and results in the dissipation of power in the form of heat The unit of resistance is the ohm One ohm is the resistance through which a difference of potential of one volt will produce a current of one ampere revenue meter A meter used by a utility to generate billing information Many types of meters fall in this category depending on the rate structure root mean square RMS The effective value of alternating current or voltage The RMS values of voltage and current can be used for the a
247. mote 1 0 BT 22 CIP Assy Inst 24 Write 25 Read No of Elements 16 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status Element Modbus Element name Range Units Default Comment No Address Value 0 40701 Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 40702 Setpoint number 1 10 M4 M5 l Refer to Writing Setpoint Configuration by 1 20 M6 M8 Using Communication on page 134 40703 Read back mode 0 1 0 3 40704 Setpoint type 0 52 eu 4 40705 Evaluation condition 0 5 0 5 40706 High limit 0 9999 Depends Integer on ot setpoint type 6 40707 High limit Exponent 4 21 ol 7 40708 Low limit 0 9999 o Integer 8 40709 Low Limit Exponent 4 21 o 9 40710 Action delay 0 3600 M4 M5 Seconds 0 0 30 000 M4 M5 M6 M8 0 15 M6 M8 10 40711 Release delay 0 3600 M4 M5 Seconds 0 0 30 000 M4 M5 M6 M8 0 15 M6 M8 11 40712 Output action 0 32 M4 M5 l ol 0 43 M6 M8 12 40713 Status 0 1 0 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 215 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status Element Modbus Element name Range Units Default Comment No Address Value 13 40714 Accumulated time 0 9999 Seconds
248. munication type 00 No optional communication native RS 485 only 81 DeviceNet version 1 82 ControlNet 84 Remote 1 0 86 RS 232 88 DeviceNet version 2 89 IEC870 comm card 26 30627 Accuracy Class 0 2 Indicates revenue metering accuracy class as manufactured refer to page 29 0 Class 1 1 Class 0 5 2 Class 0 2 TIP This is not truly a data table but a reply to a PCCC diagnostic status request used by RSWho to display text and an icon for the Powermonitor 3000 unit This data is not accessible using Modbus DF1 PCCC Diagnostic Status Reply Parameters Byte Bits Contents Description 1 0 1 Mode status Unused 2 3 4 7 2 0 7 Type extender EE 3 0 7 Extended interface type 36h DF1 half duplex slave via native RS485 port or RS 232 port 65h Ethernet 4 0 7 Extended processor type 8Ah 1404 Powermonitor 3000 products Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 213 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables DF1 PCCC Diagnostic Status Reply Parameters Byte Bits Contents Description 5 0 4 Series revision Unused 5 7 6 16 All Catalog number in ASCII Catalog number written into the device at time of production or calibration For example 1404 M4 05 A RIO 17 24 All Product Specific Unused 214 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status Parameters CSP File No N23 Re
249. n The DeviceNet scanner needs to know which bytes are scanned from the power monitor Select the Input tab This lets you determine where the information is stored inside the scanner module When finished configuring click Apply E 1747 SDN Scanner Module 3 7 Click Download to Scanner All of the configuration data must be downloaded to the scanner module E 1747 SDN Scanner Module 3 Iv Nod v v v n 8 Download All Records and allow the scanner to reset 76 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Download Scanlist from Scanner 21x C Selected Scanlist Records Select Range Cancel From p 4 Io 3 E Afterwards the DeviceNet scanner displays an 80 followed by a 00 when everything is configured propetly TIP Powermonitor 3000 units Input parameters are Instance 1 and output parameters are Instance 2 DeviceNet Single Instance Parameters Powermonitor 3000 units with DeviceNet communication and master module firmware revision 4 x and later include 23 single instance parameters The data type for the single element parameters is little Endian floating point identical to ControlLogix REAL The configurable floating point data format setting has no effect on the single element parameters Refer to Appendix A for a list of parameters included You may use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to view the parameters and their values You may need to update the Dev
250. n 1 voltage channels only 2 current channels Default 1 e Auto threshold set command 0 do nothing 1 set threshold Default 0 e Auto threshold set duration range 1 3600 seconds default 10 180 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 e Auto threshold set margin range 1 0 100 0 per cent default 20 0 e Voltage trigger threshold range 0 1 1000 0 default 10 0 e Current trigger threshold range 0 1 1000 0 default 10 0 Threshold Configuration The power monitor compares voltage or current transients against a threshold that you may set manually or command to be set automatically You select either voltage channels or current channels with the Detection mode parameter When you issue the Auto threshold set command the power monitor first determines if there is sufficient signal amplitude on the selected voltage or current channels to set the threshold If the signal amplitude is greater than 1096 of full scale the power monitor begins timing the Auto threshold set duration During this time it monitors the selected channels calculates an average transient index and decrements the Auto threshold duration time remaining parameter At the end of this time it combines the average transient index with the Auto threshold set margin and stores the result as the Voltage trigger threshold or Current trigger threshold Threshold settings relate to both magnitude and duration of a t
251. n Default 60 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 SNTP Address 2 The IP address of the primary SNTP server accessed as the 1 4th octet SNTP Address 3 The IP address of a third SNTP server accessed as the 1 A octet Network Demand Time Configuration Summary Parameter Name Range Default User Setting Input mode 0 3 3 Broadcast port number 300 400 300 Time server IP address byte 1 0 255 0 Time server IP address byte 2 0 255 0 Time server IP address byte 3 0 255 0 Time server IP address byte 4 0 255 0 Time zone 12 12 0 Time set update interval 0 32766 60 SNTP IP address 2 octet 1 0 255 0 SNTP IP address 2 octet 2 0 255 0 SNTP IP address 2 octet 3 0 255 0 SNTP IP address 2 octet 4 0 255 0 SNTP IP address 3 octet 1 0 255 0 SNTP IP address 3 octet 2 0 255 0 SNTP IP address 3 octet 3 035 255 0 SNTP IP address 3 octet 4 0 255 0 Controller Command The Controller Command table is a write table consisting of one integer element A 1 written to bit 0 signals the end of a demand period When this occurs the master power monitor resets this bit to 0 and sends the end of demand broadcast to power monitor units configured as Slave broadcast input Bits 1 15 are reserved Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 57 Chapter 3 58 Powermonitor 3000
252. n settings that support the use of modems for point to point and point to multipoint communication You may select Hardware Handshaking CTS RTS and adjust the Delay parameter to match your choice of modem hardware Please refer to Configuring Optional RS 232 Communication for detailed information on these settings The power monitor does not initiate messages nor does it support modem dial out capabilities Allen Bradley DF1 Half duplex Protocol The Allen Bradley DF1 half duplex slave protocol is supported by a number of Rockwell Automation and third party products Please refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual publication 1770 6 5 16 for further information The network master device must be configured as a DF1 polling master All devices on the network must be set to the same baud rate The node addresses of the power monitor must be listed in a permanent or temporary polling list of the master device and the error checking must be set to CRC When communication is established the RS 485 or RS 232 RX and TX status LED indicators flashes alternately at a rapid rate If you are using Rockwell Software RSLinx software as a polling master the power monitor appears in RSWho if it is defined in the polling list For best communication performance using RSLinx software keep the number of concurrent clients to a minimum for example turn off the auto browse function in RSWho To communicate with an Allen Bradley PLC 5
253. n the same network is not permitted or supported When auto sense is selected when a port configured as Modbus detects incoming DF 1 data packets it automatically switches to the applicable DF 1 protocol at the same baud rate and other communication parameters The port may return a communication error to the first non selected packet and then switch protocols The initiator should be set up to retry communication if it receives an error Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 95 Chapter 4 96 Communication DeviceNet Communication Option The Powermonitor 3000 units with optional DeviceNet communication operate as a slave device on a DeviceNet network It serves data to a DeviceNet master station such as a PLC 5 or SLC 500 DeviceNet scanner module a ControlLogix DeviceNet bridge module a PanelView operator terminal and RSLinx direct and pass thru DeviceNet drivers It supports I O implicit Messaging Explicit Server Messaging and the explicit Unconnected Message Manager UCMM as discussed below 1 0 Messaging The power monitor supports polled change of state and cyclic I O messaging by using assembly instances 1 for input data and 2 for output data The default input messaging table size is 6 integer elements and the output table size is 2 integer elements This corresponds to a DeviceNet scanner mapping of 12 Rx and 4 Tx bytes See the Remote I O DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet I O Messaging Parameters table
254. ncel Delete Help 6 Return to the main browsing window of the RSLinx application and browse to the DF1 Driver for the Powermonitor 3000 unit The result is an established communication link between the application and the powermonitor MDLUUUTTTTUUTE ml x File Edit View Communications Station DDE OPC Security Window Help 81 x 2 218 Bll2 xX Browsing node 0 found Workstation USMKETCMARKES1 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 zs Linx Gateways Ethernet aie D 00 Workstation DF1 COM1 li 01 1404 xx DF1 zx AB ETH 1 Ethernet x AB ETHIP 1 Ethernet oo 01 DF1 COM1 1404 xx DF1 haies 0825aM Z For Help press F1 69 Chapter 4 70 Communication Optional Remote 1 0 Communication Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in RIO are equipped with an optional remote I O port in addition to the native port This dual port option allows the use of both ports simultaneously The port emulates a logical quarter rack of I O You must configure the rack address group number communication rate and last rack status Configuration parameters are RIO Rack Address The logical rack address as configured in the remote I O scanner module Range 0 63 decimal default 1 e RIO Group Number Logical group number corresponding to the remote I O port quarter rack Range 0 2 4 or 6 default 0
255. nergy costs promotes manufacturing efficiencies e Distribution System Monitoring Using power parameters to show power flow system topology and distribution equipment status e Emergency Load Shedding Monitoring power usage to preserve system stability in the event of sudden utility outage e Power System Control Managing system voltage harmonic distortion and power factor The power monitor is a sophisticated modern alternative to traditional electromechanical metering devices A single Powermonitor 3000 unit can replace many individual transducers and meters The power monitor is simple to install configure and operate and provides you with accurate information in a compact economical package Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 13 Chapter2 Product Description Master Module The master module contains the main microprocessor based monitoring functions including terminations for power system connections status inputs control outputs a native RS 485 communication port and a port for the display module Configuration Although the power monitor ships from the factory with default settings you need to configure it for your particular requirements You may configure the power monitor by using the optional display module Alternately you may use an external device or application to write configuration operational parameters and commands to the master module through its native or optional communication p
256. neric PLC 5 Typed e Set power monitor node address MAC ID via display module native comm port or ControlNet assembly instance 12 Master Module with Various Communication Options o o f N AD Allen Bradley Powermonitor 3000 Removable Status Input amp E Connector 9 he Terminal Blocks TS e a a eie Status Indicators Sel m Display Module Port EET amp 4 pay amp e Lee ES V J a RS 485 Native Communication Port O E Optional NAP Port PR m TE a Optional ise i Optional Optional Optional REDE EOL Remote 1 0 DeviceNet Ethernet ControlNet Port Port 88 10BaseT Channel A a art Optional ControlNet Channel B Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 21 Chapter2 Product Description Status Indicators The power monitor
257. neutral voltages respectively For single phase wiring modes the average line to neutral voltage is the mathematical average of phase 1 to neutral L1 N and phase 2 to neutral L2 N voltages Voltage results return 999 if the line to neutral voltage exceeds 347 volts Current results include individual phase current L1 L2 L3 and average three phase current L4 current returns neutral or zero sequence current refer to symmetrical component analysis discussion below Frequency results include Last cycle frequency and Average Frequency calculated over your selection of either one or the last eight cycles Frequency results return 0 if either the frequency is less than 40 Hz or if the voltage magnitude on all three voltage inputs is too low Frequency results return 999 if the frequency is greater than 75 Hz The power monitor selects one voltage phase input for frequency calculations and automatically switches to another in case of a phase loss Frequency source indicates which phase is used to calculate frequency results Frequency source is accessible only via communication Phase rotation returns a value indicating forward ABC reverse ACB or no rotation RMS Resolution and Averaging There are a number of configuration options in the power monitor that affect metering results e RMS Resolution the high resolution setting provides more accurate RMS results when significant levels of harmonics are present You may also
258. nfigurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read Only PM3000 Type M8 only Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 43 63 Element Modbus Element Name Range No Address 0 Channel returned 1 7 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0 1 43 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 3 45 Harmonic 4 47 Harmonic 5 49 Harmonic 6 515 Harmonic 7 53 Harmonic 8 55 Harmonic 3 57 Harmonic 10 59 Harmonic 11 61t Harmonic 12 63 Harmonic 13 FFT iteration 0 32 767 256 Comment Refer to Reading Individual Harmonic Values on page 173 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 42 62 Parameters Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables CSP File No F49 Remote 1 0 BT 46 CIP Assy Inst 61 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read Only PM3000 Type M8 only Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 42 62 Comment Appendix A Refer to Reading Individual Harmonic Values on page 173 Element Modbus ElementName Rane Comment No Address 0 Channel returned 1 7 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0 1 42 Harmonic 0 0 999 9x107 3 44 Harmonic 4 46 Harmonic 5 48 Harmonic 6 50 Harmonic 7 52 Harmonic 8 54 Harmonic 3 56 Harmonic 10 58 Harmonic 11 60 Harmonic 12 62 Harmonic 13 FFT
259. nfigurable Table Param Parameter Name No 128 Bulletin number 129 Series 130 Overall status 131 ASIC status 132 Data FLASH status 133 Real time clock status 134 RTC NVRAM status 135 Option comm status 136 Display module status 137 Watchdog status 138 VCO lock status 139 Reserved 140 Application FRN 141 Boot code FRN 142 ASIC FRN 143 Option comm FRN 144 Display module FRN 145 Reserved 146 Digital board revision 147 Analog board revision 148 Option comm board revision 149 Reserved 150 MM Device ID 151 MM RAM type 152 Display module type 153 Option comm type 154 Reserved Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Comment Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Referto Selftest Diagnostic Results Parameters Appendix A 273 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name No 155 Setpoint 1 type 156 Setpoint 2 type 157 Setpoint 3 type 158 Setpoint 4 type 159 Setpoint 5 type 160 Setpoint 6 type 161 Setpoint 7 type 162 Setpoint 8 type 163 Setpoint 9 type 164 Setpoint 10 type 165 Setpoint 1 evaluation condition 166 Setpoint 2 evaluation condition 167 Setpoint 3 evaluation condition 168 Setpoint 4 evaluation condition 169 Setpoint 5 evaluation condition 170 Se
260. nitude of the n harmonic THD S s or6 H 1 e H magnitude of fundamental Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 The standard IEC definition of harmonic distortion is the Distortion Index DIN and is computed for each channel as follows Where e H magnitude of the n harmonic n lt 41 or 63 DIN is equivalent to IEC THD Crest Factor This is another quantity that is sometimes used to describe the amount of distortion present in a waveform It can also be used to express the dynamic range of a measurement device Crest Factor is the ratio of the peak to the RMS Crest Factor Peak Value RMS Value A pure sinusoid Crest Factor equals 42 167 Chapter 8 168 Advanced Features TIF Another method of measuring signal distortion is the Telephone Influence Factor sometimes called the Telephone Interference Factor This measurement is used to estimate the effect that the power line harmonics have on nearby analog telephone conductors This method weighs each of the harmonics based on the physiological and audiological characteristics of the human ear The harmonics are additionally weighted to reflect the relationship of harmonic frequency and degree of coupling to the phone lines These weights are called single frequency TIF weights The 1404 M6 uses the most recent TIF weights updated in 1960 The single freq
261. nstance 4 or Instance 52 Allow Write N9 11 EQU JSR 0002 JE Equal Jump To Subroutine 0 Source A N9 6 SBR File Number U 4 8 lt Source B 4 4 lt EQU Equal Source A N9 6 8 lt Source B 52 52 lt Allow the scanner to write to the power monitor Put the new integer configuration data in N14 starting at location 0 Put the configuration if it is of float type in file F13 starting with word 0 Enter the rest of the CIP message information needed for transfer in N9 starting with word 0 The process is similar to the request of information except that the size in words of the data to write is to appear in N7 9 and the service to be performed is changed Allow Write Message Pending N9 11 B3 0 FLL 0003 JE t Fill File 0 0 Source 0 Dest N7 0 Length 65 COP Copy File Source N9 0 Dest N7 0 Length 10 COP Copy File Source N14 0 Dest N7 10 Length 64 COP Copy File Source N7 10 Dest M0 3 1100 Length 65 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Enable Transfer Bit N7 0 CL A 15 COP Copy File Source N7 0 Dest M0 3 1000 Length 10 Message Pending B3 0 lt gt 0 325 Appendix C Sample Applications This rung looks for the done bit with no errors When the done bit is received the return information is tranfered and mainten ance is performed Integer information
262. number and programming the appropriate parameters 133 Chapter 5 134 Setpoint Programming and Operation Viewing Setpoint Data by Using the Display Module You may view setpoint setup parameters and status by navigating through these menus DISP gt CONFIGURATION gt SETPOINT selecting the setpoint number and scrolling through the setpoint setup parameters status and accumulated activated time Writing Setpoint Configuration by Using Communication To configure setpoint operations by using communication the client performs a table write to the Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status table This read write data table of 16 integer elements includes the following Password A valid password is required to enable disable or clear the min max log Write a value of 1 when simply selecting a setpoint Setpoint number Selects a setpoint for configuration or read back or indicates the currently selected setpoint on a read Read back mode 0 selects auto increment 1 selects manual increment only mode supported by DeviceNet and Ethernet units Setpoint type See Setpoint Types on page 129 Evaluation condition 0 Over forward 1 over reverse 2 under forward 3 under reverse 4 equal 5 not equal see above High and low limits Expressed in integer exponent format Action and release delays Expressed in seconds M4 M5 or tenths of a second M6 M8 Output action See Setpoint Action Type on page 131
263. o the Basic Device Configuration Parameters table Wiring Mode Select the wiring mode to match the physical configuration of your power system Your wiring mode choice must match the wiring diagrams found in the Powermonitor 3000 Unit Installation Instructions publication 1404 INOO7 for proper operation and accuracy Your choices include the following e Delta 3 CT e Delta 2 CT e Direct Delta 3 CT e Direct Delta 2 CT e Open Delta 3 CT e Open Delta 2 CT e Wye default e Single Phase e Demo You may choose Demo mode for training or demonstration purposes In Demo mode the power monitor returns internally generated results Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 PT and CT Ratios You may directly connect the voltage inputs of the power monitor to power systems rated at 600V line to line or less Above 600V you need potential transformers PTs to step down the power system voltage to one that is measurable Most commercially available PTs have a secondary rated voltage of 120V 150V full scale Nearly every power monitor installation requires CTS to step down the power system current to a value of 5 A full scale To perform basic configuration set the primary and secondary voltage and current ratings of your PTs Gif used and CTs If your system configuration includes a neutral current CT you need to separately configure the I4 CT ratio e PT primary rang
264. o the Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select table with the desired configuration settings This read write data table contains 26 integer elements including the following e Password Required to configure logging you may use 1 for read back selection DeviceNet unique write identifier e Read back mode See below must be a valid entry even if read back is not being selected at this time e Logging interval Interval in seconds 1 3600 0 disables logging but does not disable setpoint triggered logging 1 synchronizes logging with demand interval e Logging mode 0 selects overwrite mode 1 selects fill and hold Clear log command 0 takes no action 1 clears the trend log e Parameter selections You may select up to 16 parameters from the list in the Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table table to be logged An entry of 0 selects no parameter only parameters preceding the first 0 in the table is logged e Reserved elements Must be 0 e Total records logged These read only elements are ignored during a write 151 Chapter 7 152 Data Logging TIP Although you may configure up to 16 Trend Log parameters on units with optional DeviceNet communication the results table will return only the first 8 The power monitor clears the trend log when you change any parameter or the logging interval You may perform a simple table read of the Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select table to
265. oat 0 0 999 9x102 95 Total VARs Float 0 0 999 9x102 96 Total VA Float 0 0 999 9x102 97 Energy kWh x 1 Integer 0 999 98 Energy kWh x 1 000 Integer 0 999 99 Energy kWh x 1 000 000 Integer 0 999 100 Energy kVARh x 1 Integer 0 999 101 Energy kVARh x 1 000 Integer 0 999 102 Energy kVARh x 1 000 000 Integer 0 999 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 267 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Parameters Applies to Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select Parameters on page 220 Trend Log Results Parameters on page 221 User configured Table Setup Parameters on page 233 User configured Table Results Parameters on page 235 PM3000 Type Ethernet Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name Comment No 0 None No parameter 1 Relay output status Referto Discrete Data Parameters 2 Solid state KYZ output status 3 Alarm output word 4 Status inputs state 5 Status input 1 counter 6 Status input 2 counter 7 Voltage Mode Wiring Configuration Refer to Basic Device Configuration Parameters 8 PT Primary 9 PT Secondary 10 11 12 13 CT Primary 11 11 12 13 CT Secondary 12 14 CT Primary 13 14 CT Secondary 14 Date Year Referto Date and Time Parameters 15 Date Month 16 Date Day 17 Time Hour 18 Time Minute 19 Time S
266. of Instance 1 may vary depending on user configuration Refer to User configured Data Table on page 121 for more information DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet 1 0 Data Accepted by Powermonitor Units Scanner Output Data Instance 2 Element Element name Range No 0 Relay output 0 1 1 Solid state KYZ output 0 1 192 Default Comment Value 0 Bit 8 0 De energize 256 Bit 8 1 Energize Must be enabled by Control source parameter Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Discrete Data Parameters CSP File No N9 Remote 1 0 BT 10 CIP Assy Inst 3 No of Elements o User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Only PM3000 Type All Discrete Data Element Modbus Element name Range Comment No Address 0 30001 Relay output status 0 3 0 De energized and not forced 1 Energized and not forced 1 30002 d KYZ output 2 Force De energized SLAS 3 Force Energized 2 30003 Alarm output word 0 FFFF_ Bitfield indicating state of the 16 alarm output flags 0 released 1 asserted Bit 0 relay setpoint output flag 1 Bit 1 KYZ setpoint output flag 2 Bit 2 setpoint output flag 3 Bit 15 setpoint output flag 16 3 30004 Status inputs state 0 7 Bit 0 status input 1 0 open 1 contact closure detected Bit 1 status input 2 0 open 1 contact clo
267. og contains ENT CNT or DNT e o e Add5ms If the Min Max log is enabled see the Min Max e e e e Add5ms Log Configuration Read back Select table If more than 5 setpoints are configured e o e Add 5 ms If Oscillography is enabled see the Oscillograph e e Add5ms Configuration Read back Data Select table If Transient detection is enabled see the e Add15ms Transient Analysis Configuration Read back Select table If Meter Result Set is set to Tranducer mode or e Subtract 5 ms Emergy Meter Mode see the Advanced Metering Configuration table This table lists the minimum and maximum possible metering update rate for each model based on information from the Metering Update Rate Calculation table Min and Max Metering Update Rate for Each Model Model Min and Max Metering Update Rate M4 60 85 ms M5 50 75 ms M6 50 80 ms M8 45 95 ms Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Out of the box metering update rates are based on factory default configuration data and are listed in the Meter Update Rate with Factory Default Configuration table for all power monitor models and communication options Factory default settings for configuration parameters can be found in Appendix A Meter Update Rate with Factory Default Configuration Option 000 232 ENT RIO CNT DNT M4 60 ms 65 ms M5 60 ms
268. on applications that apply different rates to energy and demand used at different times Time of use Hours Selection Off peak hours are those which occur on off peak days or during hours not selected as either mid peak or on peak Hours selected as both mid peak and on peak will be evaluated as on peak hours RSEnergyMetrix software selects the appropriate time of use logs to store energy and demand values based on the time of use hours selection and the off peak day selection Time of use selection elements are bit mapped parameters The bits are mapped as shown in the table below which depicts the default values as an example The default time of use periods include the following e Mid peak AM 8 00 10 59 e Mid peak PM 3 00 6 59 e Peak AM 10 00 11 59 e Peak PM 12 00 noon 2 59 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 TOU Period AM 12 00 12 59 1 00 1 59 Data Logging Chapter 7 PM 12 00 12 59 10 00 10 59 11 00 11 59 10 00 10 59 1 00 1 59 c Peak c 8 00 8 59 c 9 00 9 59 2 00 2 59 3 00 3 59 c H400 4 59 5 00 5 59 6 00 6 59 c c c Mid peak 0 f x Don t care c S 2 00 2 59 gt 3 00 3 59 gt 4 00 4 59 S gt 5 00 5 59 gt 6 00 6 59 7 00 7 59 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 2 7 00 7 59
269. ondition Off No power or Channel disabled Steady Red Faulted unit Alternating Self test red green Alternating red off Steady green Incorrect node configuration Normal operation Flashing green off Temporary errors or node is not configured to go online Hashing red off Media fault or no other nodes present on network Flashing red green Incorrect network configuration Steady Green Normal operation Flashing green red Communication card power up self test 25 Chapter 2 26 Product Description Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Chapter J Metering Functionality Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations The Powermonitor 3000 unit is a microprocessor based electrical power and energy measuring device It connects to your three phase or single phase ac power system directly or through instrument transformers PTs and CTs It converts instantaneous voltage and current values to digital values and uses the resulting digital values in calculations of things such as voltage current power and energy You may access the resulting metering values manually by using the display module or automatically by using communication with an external device or application The basic operations of the Powermonitor 3000 unit include the following Metering functionality e Operational and status indication e Operation of the display module
270. onfiguration for a CIP Generic message type A CIP Generic message can read or write data depending on the Service Type you specify Refer to DeviceNet Class Services on page 102 In this example the ControlLogix reads the User configured Data Table into tag dataPM3K User 0 configured as an array of 23 elements of Real type ControlLogix Controller CIP Generic Messaging Example Message Configuration msgPM3K_User CIP Generic This example uses the following message parameter values e Service Type Get Attribute Single service code oe hex e Object class 4 hex Assembly e Instance 37 decimal User configured table results e Attribute 3 hex Data Publication 1404 UMO001F EN P November 2009 109 Chapter4 Communication Set EtherNet IP I O Connection Ethernet Powermonitor 3000 units support a Class 1 connection to Instance 1 and 2 1 To utilize this scheduled connection to a ControlLogix controller open the controller program offline in RSLogix 5000 software 2 Select the 1756 ENET B or 1756 ENBT A module in the I O configuration 3 Add the power monitor as a Generic Ethernet Module I O Connection Setup shows a typical configuration TIP If you wish to establish a Class 1 connection with more than one controller to the same power monitor use instance 1 and 2 for the first controller and use instance 1 and 255 for all remaining controllers instance 255 is a placeholder instance sin
271. ons Power Monitor Ladder Example for SLC Scanner Module through SCNR Power Monitor with SLC Scanner Module While message is pending bring back the CIP message control status Message Pending B3 0 COP 0000 J E Copy File 0 Source M0 3 1000 Dest N7 0 Length 10 After setting up N9 CIP_SETUP file turn on bit N9 11 1 to start the read transfer from the power monitor This process clears out the first 9 words of N7 0 CIP message file Copies the request from the CIP SETUP file to N7 first 9 words Moves a 0 to MO scanner location M0 3 1009 This loacation needs to be set to 0 when requesting information Enable the transfer by turning bit N7 0 15 EN to 1 Copy the request information into the request area of the MO file offset 1000 9 Set the bit for Message Pending Perform Read Message Pending N9 11 B3 0 FLL 0001 J F t Fill File 1 0 Source 0 Dest N7 0 Length 9 COP Copy File Source N9 0 Dest N7 0 Length 9 MOV Move Source 0 0 lt Dest M0 3 1009 Enable Transfer Bit N7 0 CL el 15 COP Copy File Source N7 0 Dest M0 3 1000 Length 9 Message Pending B3 0 CLD 0 324 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C When a write of a float file is being performed it is necessary to swap the words in teh float file before sending the write request This is only necessary for I
272. onstrate setpoint configuration ATTENTION E i only They should not be used as sample application programming Example 1 Simple demand management To configure setpoint 1 to energize output relay 1 when projected demand exceeds 100 kW for more than one second and de energize relay 1 when projected demand falls below 90 kW for more than two seconds you could use the following settings Simple Demand Management Settings Parameter Value Setpoint number Setpoint type 17 Projected Watt Demand Setpoint evaluation condition 0 Over forward Setpoint high limit 100 000 watts Setpoint low limit 90 000 watts Setpoint action delay 1 second M4 M5 10 tenths of a second M6 M8 Setpoint release delay 2 seconds M4 M5 20 tenths of a second M6 M8 Setpoint action type 1 Energize relay 1 and set alarm flag 1 Example 2 Phase reversal relay To use setpoint 2 to energize the output relay as a permissive for starting a three phase motor you could use the following settings Phase Reversal Relay Settings Parameter Value Setpoint number 2 Setpoint type 21 Phase rotation Setpoint evaluation condition 4 Equal Setpoint high limit 1 ABC Setpoint low limit Not used Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Chapter 5 Setpoint Programming and Operation Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Phase Reversal Relay Settings Value 0 second M4 M5 0 tenths
273. ontrolled CT s step down high currents to lower values which can be used by measuring instruments current transformer ratio The ratio of primary amperes divided by secondary amperes data table Power monitor data is organized in data tables similar to those found in an SLC 5 03 Programmable Controller The detailed data table definitions are covered in Appendix A of the Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 User Manual demand hours The equivalent number of hours in a month during which the peak demand is fully utilized In other words if energy consumption for the current month is X kwhr and the peak demand is Y kW then the demand hours is equal to X Y hours The higher the number of demand hours the better the demand leveling situation and the more effectively demand is being used demand interval Demand charges are based on peak demand over a utility specified time interval not on the instantaneous demand or connected load at any given moment Typical demand intervals are 15 20 and 30 minutes Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Glossary Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 discrete input This is a Modbus mapped location used for reading bit length data These bits typically reflect the value of the discrete inputs Powermonitor 3000 units do not support this data type exception reply This is the Reply Packet for a Modbus Command that was unsuccessful in operation frequency The number o
274. ormer DM Display module EMI Electromagnetic Interference HTML Hyper text Markup Language ID Identification 1 0 Inputs and Outputs IEC International Electrotechnical Commission LED Light Emitting Diode NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NAP Network Access Port NVS Nonvolatile Storage EtherNet IP Open Device Vendor s Association s Ethernet Industrial Protocol PT Potential Transformer Also known as VT in some countries PM 3000 Powermonitor 3000 master module PLC Programmable Logic Controller RFI Radio Frequency Interference Preface Preface Abbreviation Term RAM Random Access Memory RTOS Real Time Operating System RI O Remote Input Output PCCC Rockwell Automation s proprietary Programmable Controller Communication Commands protocol RMS Root mean square SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SPDT Single Pole Double Throw SLC Small Logic Controller UL Underwriters Laboratories VA Voltampere VAR Voltampere Reactive 10 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Chapter 1 Safety Considerations Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Safety Before installing and using this product please read and understand the following precautions ATTENTION l Only qualified personnel following accepted safety procedures should install wire and service the Powermonitor 3000 unit and its associated components Before beginning any work disconnect all so
275. ort Optional external applications that you may use for power monitor configuration include RSPower RSPowerPlus and RSEnergyMetrix software operating on a computer with a Microsoft Windows operating system Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or distributor or visit http www software rockwell com for more information on available software packages Communication Every power monitor comes with a native RS 485 communication port that supports the Allen Bradley DF1 half or full duplex slave and Modbus RTU slave protocols The native port is suitable for communicating to devices including the following PLC 5 SLC 500 and ControlLogix processors e RSLinx software with DDE OPC server functionality Modbus RTU masters Other third party devices e Software that you develop You may also specify power monitors with optional communication ports including the following e Serial RS 232 DF1 half or full duplex or Modbus RTU slave e Remote I O e DeviceNet e EtherNet IP CIP and or CSP Modbus TCP e ControlNet Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Display Module Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Product Description Chapter 2 You may integrate a power monitor into a programmable controller based control and monitoring system by using your choice of the native or optional communication methods The Bulletin 1404 display module is an optional user interface device The displ
276. ot all addresses in the range are used e 30 001 40 000 Modbus Input Register Analog Input Address Space e 40 001 50 000 Modbus Holding Register Analog Output Address Space The Modbus protocol supports four types of data Discrete Input Coil Input Register and Holding Register The power monitor supports Input Registers read only and Holding Registers read write or write only Input Registers and Holding Registers are 16 bits long Floating point values in the data tables are represented as big Endian two register arrays in IEEE 754 floating point format The Modbus client application must be able to reassemble the two word array into a valid floating point value The power monitor returns the Modbus error codes shown in the table below when appropriate In the event of an exception reply not only is the exception code sent to the master device but also the power monitor slave s diagnostic counter records the error code to further explain the error reason 93 Chapter 4 94 Communication The data table number of error request and element offset of error request in the Write Error Status table is updated with the first Modbus address of the table and element offset that the incoming request packet attempts to write to Modbus Error Codes Error Description Meaning Response Code Exception Code 0 No error None 1 Function Code The function does not support Broadcast Nothing cannot Bro
277. ound in the Powermonitor 3000 master module firmware revision 3 0 or earlier Ethernet series A modules all firmware revisions or Ethernet series B modules firmware revision 2 0 or earlier For this information please refer to publications 1404 INO07D EN E and 1404 UMOO1D EN E available as downloads from http www rockwellautomation com literature Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Additional Resources Terms and Conventions Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Preface Preface Refer to these power and energy management documents for more information For this information Refer to Publication Powermonitor 3000 Installation Instructions all communication options 1404 IN007 Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 Display Module Installation Instructions 1404 INO05 Bulletin 1404 Series B Ethernet Communication Release Note 1404 RN008 You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative In this manual the following terms and conventions are used Abbreviation Term AWG American Wire Gage BIR Block Transfer Read BIW Block Transfer Write CSA Canadian Standards Association CIP Control and Information Protocol CNET ControlNet Industrial Control Network CT Current Transf
278. output forcing clearing the Min Max Log clearing energy and amp hour counters status input counters and setpoint counters and restoring the factory defaults To issue a command you must enter Program Mode and enter the correct unit Password Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 connected to outputs cannot operate in an unsafe or undesired manner Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or death property damage or economic loss The relay and KYZ outputs may be connected to field devices Before ATTENTION i issuing a command to force an output ensure that any devices 1 Using the four display module keys move into Program mode and display the command to be issued Notice the flashing phase indicators on the right hand side Program Mode 2 Set the display module into Edit mode by pressing the Enter key Notice that the phase indicators on the right hand side are now solid and the command option prompt is now flashing Edit Mode 45 Chapter3 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations 3 Choose the option of the command by pressing the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys until the desired option is displayed Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side remain solid and the command option being selected is still flashing Command Option After the desired command option
279. ower L3 Real Power and Total Real Power L1 Reactive Power L2 Reactive Power L3 Reactive Power and Total Reactive Power similarly return that portion of the power used in capacitive or inductive reactance in the power system and doing no work L1 Apparent Power L2 Apparent Power L3 Apparent Power and Total Apparent Power return the apparent power which is the simple mathematical product of the system voltage and system current For single phase wiring mode all L3 power values remain at zero and are not included in the total power calculation Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Power and Power Factor Results Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Power Factor Results The power monitor calculates true displacement and distortion power factor each on a per phase and total three phase basis True power factor is the ratio between the total true power and total apparent power in percent and takes into account the effect of phase shift between the voltage and current as well as any harmonics present Displacement power factor is the cosine of the difference between the phase angle of the fundamental voltage and current in percent and reflects the value a typical analog power factor meter would measure The true power factor and displacement power factor are equal only if there are no harmonics present in either the voltage or current These values are signed to show lead or lag C Distortion power f
280. page 252 184 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 For example consider the following capture e PT primary 13 8 kV e PT secondary 120V e CT primary 100 A e CT secondary 5 A Delta voltage mode line to line You would multiply each data point by the following factor to correctly display the waveform Factor 691 1 1 414 8192 e 13800 120 13 7 Capture Statistics The Capture timestamp and Capture identifier are important statistics that identify the capture A data client may use the Capture identifier to associate the transient capture with corresponding metering data and event log data Clear Command Issue the Clear command parameter to clear transient captures from non volatile memory and provide space for new captures Write the correct Password for the power monitor to accept the command The command parameter options include the following 1 Clear all transient captures 0 No action 1 Clear capture 1 2 Clear capture 2 3 Clear capture 3 4 Clear capture 4 5 Clear capture 5 6 Clear capture 6 At least one capture location must be clear for a transient detect event to be processed If no captures are clear the power monitor ignores any new transient detection events Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 185 Chapter8 Advanced Features 186 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Appendix A Publication 1404
281. parameter 3 47 Comm parameter 4 48 Comm parameter 5 49 Comm parameter 6 50 Comm parameter 7 51 Comm parameter 8 52 Comm parameter 9 53 Comm parameter 10 54 Comm parameter 11 55 Comm parameter 12 56 Comm parameter 13 57 Comm parameter 14 58 Comm parameter 15 59 Comm parameter 16 60 Comm parameter 17 61 Comm parameter 18 62 Comm parameter 19 63 L1 Current Refer to Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result Parameters 64 L2 Current 65 L3 Current 66 Avg Current 67 L1 N Voltage 68 L2 N Voltage 69 L3 N Voltage 70 Avg L N Voltage 71 L1 L2 Voltage 72 L2 L3 Voltage 73 L3 L1 Voltage 74 Avg L L Voltage 75 Frequency last cycle 76 Metering iteration 270 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name No TI L4 Current 78 Positive Sequence Current 79 Negative Sequence Current 80 Current unbalance 81 Positive Sequence Voltage 82 Negative Sequence Voltage 83 Voltage unbalance 84 Phase rotation 85 Average frequency 86 Frequency source 87 L1 Real Power 88 L2 Real Power 89 L3 Real Power 90 Total Real Power 91 L1 Reactive Power 92 L2 Reactive Power 93 L3 Reactive Power 94 Total Reactive Power 95 L1 Apparent Power 96 L2 Apparent Power 97 L3 Apparent Power 98 Total Apparent Power
282. password returns 1 2 40203 Demand period length 99 Min 15 Zero or negative demand period length enables 99 external demand synch Refer to Demand 3 40204 Number of demand periods 1 15 1 Calculation on page 35 4 40205 Predicted demand type 0 2 0 0 instantaneous 1 1st order 2 2nd order 5 40206 KYZ control source 0 8 7 0 None forcing 5 Vah only 6 Ah 1 Wh Forward 7 Setpoints 2 Wh Reverse 8 Discrete control RIO 3 VARh Forward DeviceNet 4 VARh Reverse 6 40207 KYZ pulse output scale Le 10 Refer to Relay and KYZ Output Operations on 30 000 page 137 7 40208 KYZ pulse output width 0 40 ms 0 0 KYZ style transition 2000 40 2000 pulse duration 8 40209 Relay control source 0 8 7 Same choices as KYZ control source 9 40210 Relay pulse output scale 1 10 Refer to Relay and KYZ Output Operations on 30 000 page 137 0 40211 Relay pulse output width 0 ms 100 0 KYZ style transition 40 40 2000 pulse duration 2000 1 40212 RMS resolution 0 1 0 M4 0 Nominal 1 M5 6 or 8 1 High 2 40213 RMS result averaging 0 1 0 M4 0 No averaging 1 M5 6 or 8 1 Average of the last 8 results 3 40214 Frequency averaging Oi 1 0 none 1 last 8 cycles 196 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Device Configuration Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A Element Modbus Element name Range Units Default Comment No Address Va
283. points Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 127 Chapter5b Setpoint Programming and Operation Configuring Setpoints Setpoint Configuration Not Equal Setpoint A not equal setpoint is the opposite of an equal setpoint activating when monitored parameter does not equal the Setpoint High Limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay It releases when the monitored parameter equals the Setpoint High Limit for a period of time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay Setpoint Output Action Logic When more than one setpoint is configured to control a single setpoint output action the following logic applies Setpoint output action Setpoint 1 output action OR Setpoint 2 output action OR Setpoint n output action You may configure setpoints by using the display module or by writing the setpoint configuration table through communication The following tables describe setpoint configuration parameters Parameter Name Parameter Description Range Units Default Setpoint Number The number of the setpoint being configured 1 10 M4 M5 N A 1 20 M6 M8 Setpoint Type The parameter value to be evaluated by the 0 52 Refer to List of 0 setpoint Setpoint Types on page 216 Setpoint Evaluation The operator used to evaluate the parameter 0 Over forward 0 Condition value 1 Over reverse 2 Under forward 3 Under reverse 4 Equal 5 Not equal lt gt Setpoint High Limit
284. power 0 999 9x102 kW Projected Kilo VAR Demand The projected demand for reactive power 0 999 9x102 kVARs Projected Kilo VA Demand The projected demand for apparent power 0 999 9x102 kVA Values returned depend on user selection of projected demand type in Advanced Configuration Display Module Functionality 38 The display module is a simple terminal that allows you to easily view metering parameters or change configuration items The display module uses three modes of operation Display mode allows you to view power monitor parameters including metering setpoint min max log event log and self test information You may also select a default screen to be displayed at power up or after 30 minutes without key activity e Program mode allows you to change configuration parameters with security against unauthorized configuration changes Each power monitor is password protected In Program mode the display module phase indicators L1 L2 L3 N flash e Edit mode allows you to modify the selected parameters In Edit mode the parameter being modified flashes and the phase indicators L1 L2 L3 N remain solid Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Key Functions The display module has four keys located on its front bezel an Escape key Up Arrow key Down Arrow key and an Enter key These keys differ slightly in how they function in each mode See M
285. power monitor stores peak average and load factor values for real power watts reactive power VARs apparent power VA and average current amps Peak values are the largest such value that has occurred since the last automatic or manual clear reset occurrence The in process record record 0 is updated at the end of each demand interval If no demand interval has expired since the last unit power up the record will return all zeroes Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 177 Chapter8 Advanced Features Reading the Load Factor Log To select the Read back mode or record an auto reset store day of the month or issuing a manual reset store command perform a table write to the Load Factor Log Configuration Read back Select table Load factor log data is not available via Modbus communication This read write table contains six integer elements as follow e Password required for changing the auto clear reset day or manual clear reset command Use 1 if only selecting read back mode or record Range 0000 9999 default 0000 Returns 1 e Record select selects the next read back record e Read back mode 0 auto increment record number after each read 1 manual increment Auto increment not supported in DeviceNet and Ethernet optional communication e Manual clear reset command 0 do nothing 1 manual clear reset command see above e Auto clear reset day Selects the day of month for automatically storing and
286. r 63 12 IEC thd DIN 27 L3 Reactive Power 64 V3 IEC thd DIN 28 Total Reactive Power 65 13 IEC thd DIN 29 L1 Apparent Power 66 14 IEC thd DIN 30 L2 Apparent Power 67 V1 Crest Factor 31 L3 Apparent Power 68 11 Crest Factor 32 Total Apparent Power 69 V2 Crest Factor 33 Demand Current 70 2 Crest Factor 34 Demand Power 71 V3 Crest Factor 35 Demand Reactive Power 72 3 Crest Factor 36 Demand Apparent Power 73 14 Crest Factor Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 155 Chapter 7 Data Logging The Min Max Log Results table is a read only data table consisting of 11 floating point elements containing the following information e Parameter See the Min Max Log Parameter Listing table above e Min and max values e Timestamps for Min and Max values in four element timestamp format Time of use The power monitor provides a Time of Use Log Also called the TOU 156 log it provides a one year time of use history of energy usage and demand The time of use log provides the following User selectable on peak mid peak and off peak hours User selectable off peak days of the week Real reactive and apparent energy usage records e Real reactive and apparent power demand records Month to date record for the current month Monthly history for the past year User selectable day of month to begin time of use logs The time of use log is designed to support simple billing and cost allocati
287. r access to all data e Twenty three single instance parameters e Two I O assembly instances e May be reset remotely through Identity Object e Support for up to four concurrent clients e Supports DeviceNet heartbeat facility Ethernet Optional Communication A catalog number ending in ENT specifies a power monitor with one active 10 100BaseT Ethernet communication port in addition to the native RS 485 port The Ethernet port has the following performance features e Connect to PLC 5E SLC 5 05 ControlLogix Ethernet Bridge controllers and the 1761 NET ENI module products e Built in Internet Web page support e Compatible with RSPower RSPowerPlus RSEnergyMetrix and RSView32 software e Ethernet communication rate 10 100 Mbps 19 Chapter 2 20 Product Description e Compatible with commercially available network bridges routers hubs and switches e Fully software configurable e Supports RSLinx software e Supports Allen Bradley Client Server Protocol CSP e Supports EtherNet IP CIP protocol e Configurable I O channel assembly instance six parameters default twenty three maximum Configurable explicit assembly instance seventeen parameters default twenty three parameters maximum e Explicit assembly instances for access to all data e Two I O assembly instances e Remotely resettable through Identity Object e Supports up to 64 CIP HTTP concurrent connections e Data read latency less than 10 ms e Upd
288. r cleared 2 8 e e e kVAh counter set or cleared 3 8 e e e Ahcounter set or cleared 4 8 e e e All energy counters cleared 5 8 e e e Trend log cleared 6 8 e e e Min max log cleared 7 8 e e Factory defaults restored 8 8 e je e Status input 1 counter cleared 9 8 e e e Status input 2 counter cleared 10 8 e e e Reserved 11 8 e e e Single setpoint timer cleared 12 8 e e e All setpoint timers cleared 13 9 e e e Power up 0 Control power was applied 10 e e e Power down 0 Control power was lost or internal reset occurred 11 e e Selftest failure Status Error Code Refer to Status Error Codes bitfield 12 e e e Date time set 0 The date and or time was set or altered 13 e e e Change of non setpoint config data 0 14 e e e Change of setpoint config data 0 15 e je je NVRAM Clr 0 NVRAM has been cleared due to an extended loss of control power or internal error 16 e Transient detected Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 231 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables List of Event Types Event M4 M M Event Type Event Command Comment Code M5 6 8 Code 17 e Reserved Reserved 18 e e e External Demand Sync Timeout The demand delay expired before the next expected external demand sync 19 e e e Comm Card Reset An unexpected comm card condition has been detected and the master module has reset the comm card in an a
289. r for this example is assembled in integer file N10 0 The header contains the information for all aspects of the transmission request Each different node or instance requires assembling another file Each file has to be moved in turn to the output MO file starting at word 224 Refer to Devicenet Scanner Module Installation Instructions publication 1747 IN058 for a detailed description of all coding Explicit Message Transfer Block TXID cmd status Port Size Service MAC ID Class Instance Attributes Word M0 1 224 A unique TXID Transmit Identifier and Command byte is needed for this word These are the valid command codes e 1 Execute transaction block e 4 Delete transaction from response queue 305 Appendix C 306 Sample Applications A command byte of 1 is used first to start the explicit message After a response has been received from the scanner a command byte of 4 is used to remove this transaction from the scanner If the command byte of 4 is not written to the SLC 500 DeviceNet Scanner then it does not process further transactions Word M0 1 224 TXID Cmd TXIDx 256 Cmd 20 x 256 1 5121 Word M0 1 225 A port number and transaction body size is needed for this word The port number is the DeviceNet scanner port that handles this transaction an SLC 500 controller uses port 0 and the PLC 5 controller uses port 0 or 1 The size is the number of bytes 2 bytes 1 word in the
290. r software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures os A ELLE EX AN A A Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley TechConnect PLC 5 SLC SLC 500 SLC 5 03 PanelView Powermonitor 3000 ControlLogix Rockwell Software RSNetworx for DeviceNet RSNetworx for ControlNet RSLogix 5000 RSEnergyMetrix RSPower RSPowerPlus and RSLin are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not b
291. ransient so they are representative of the energy contained in a transient In most cases use the automatic threshold calculation as a starting point by issuing an Auto threshold set command Then manually adjust the selected threshold if you want to increase or decrease the sensitivity The power monitor does not monitor for or capture transient data until a threshold setting has been configured Reading Transient Analysis Metering Data The Powermonitor 3000 M8 model presents 12 cycles of transient metering results for each of up to 6 transient captures in the Transient Analysis Metering Results Parameters table Transient analysis metering data is not available via Modbus communication This read only table of 14 floating point elements contains the following metering results and capture statistics e Capture number transient capture number associated with the metering results Range 1 6 Cycle number which cycle in the capture is returned in this read Range 1 12 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 181 Chapter 8 182 Advanced Features Voltage three RMS voltage results that express line to line delta wiring modes or line to neutral all other wiring modes for the current Cycle number Range 0 0 999 0 10 e Current four RMS current results L1 L2 L3 L for the current Cycle number Range 0 0 999 0 10 e Trigger channel indicates which channel caused the transient capture 1 V1 2 I1
292. re may contain additional information prior to and during the sag or swell event The sag or swell duration reported in the event log has a tolerance of 2x the metering update rate Refer to Metering Update Rate on page 60 for more information For sag and swell durations less than 500 milliseconds examining the oscillograph data can result in a more accurate determination of sag or swell duration References IEEE Std 1159 1995 IEEE Recommended Practice for Monitoring Electric Power Quality page 5 6 12 The Institute of Electrical amp Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47 Street New York NY 10017 2394 ISBN 1 55937 549 3 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 Load Factor The Powermonitor 3000 M6 and M8 models provide a Load Factor Log which calculates and stores a group of plant demand metrics that indicates how stable or conversely how dynamic a load is over a period of time usually one month Use communication to configure load factor operation and read the results The display module does not support an interface to the load factor log Load factor is the average demand divided by the peak demand for the month If the load is constant load factor is 10096 The power monitor calculates load factor for real reactive and apparent power and current and stores the last 12 results in the Load Factor Log in non volatile memory You may configure the power monitor to
293. rmer inputs Besides the need for special current transformer switches confusion over logged data and setpoint activation would also have to be considered 341 Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions Q Can I change communication networks A Unlike the other Allen Bradley power monitors the Powermonitor 3000 unit ships with a non interchangeable communication network card 342 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Glossary Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 ampere A unit of electrical current or rate of flow of electrons One volt across one ohm of resistance causes a current flow of one ampere A flow of one coulomb per second equals one amp apparent power The product of voltage magnitude and current magnitude in a circuit Units are VA or some multiple thereof balanced load An alternating current power system consisting of more than two current carrying conductors in which these current carrying conductors all carry the same current billing demand The demand level that a utility uses to calculate the demand charges on the current month s bill Various methods may be used to determine the value such as minimum demand peak demand or a ratchet clause It can be based on Watt Demand VA Demand VAR Demand or some combination of these A rate at which a transmission occurs where one baud equals one bit per second broadcast Broadcast address is a value used for performing commands on
294. rray of five integer values each scaled by a different power of ten 109 106 10 10 10 Refer to Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results Parameters on page 210 for additional detail Integer exponent format is used for some specific table entries such as IEEE 519 short circuit current The integer element is in the range of 0 999 or 9999 and a typical exponent element ranges from 4 21 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Timestamp format The power monitor expresses timestamps in an array of four data table elements Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Hundredth of a second Each timestamp parameter except the Year is a combination of its first and second element For instance the Month is the parameter value divided by 100 and the remainder is the Day Example 1230 December 30th The timestamp data type may be integer or floating point and depends on the data table Other Common Data Table Elements The power monitor uses several common data table elements in a number of data tables These include e Password A valid password must be written to change configuration settings or issue commands For selecting records to read back you may write either a valid password or a value of 1 Default 0000 range 0000 9999 e Record identifier The power monitor assigns event log records oscillography and transient captures and other items unique identification numbers
295. rst Sunday in November This corresponds to US Daylight Saving Time beginning in 2007 Daylight Saving Time Configuration Summary Parameter Name Range Default User Setting DST Enable 0 1 0 DST Start Month 1 12 3 DST Start Day 0 6 0 DST Start Day Instance 5 2 DST Start Hour 0 23 2 DST End Month 12 11 DST End Day 0 6 0 DST End Day Instance 5 1 DST End Hour 0 23 2 59 Chapter3 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Metering Update Rate 60 The metering update rate is a measure of how often the power monitor calculates new metering results The metering update rate is not significant in most applications but can be important in some control applications The metering update rate affects how quickly a setpoint can respond to an electrical event and affects how often new metering results are available for communication The metering update rate is dependent on the power monitor model and device configuration The table below contains information that can be used to calculate the metering update rate for a specific model containing specific configuration selections Metering Update Rate Calculation Based on Model and Device Configuration Model and Config Options M4 M5 M6 M8 Update Rate Base metering update rate e o e 50ms If device is an M4 Add 10 ms If RMS Resolution High see the Advanced e e e Add10ms Device Configuration table If catal
296. rst zero ends the list of parameters The User configured Table Results table returns 14 elements DeviceNet units or 23 elements all other communication options containing the parameters you specified You may specify more than 14 elements in DeviceNet units but it will return only 14 The results table data is in floating point format The first zero valued element in the configuration write determines how many meaningful elements are returned in a read of the results table Refer to User configured Data Table Setup by Using ControlLogix and EtherNet IP Networks on page 314 for a sample ladder diagram and messages used to configure and read the user configured data table Optionally you may purchase and use RSPower or RSPowerPlus software to configure and view the configuration of the user configured data and input tables Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 121 Chapter 4 122 Communication User configured I O Table You may configure Input Messaging Instance 1 in Powermonitor 3000 units with optional DeviceNet EtherNet IP or ControlNet communication in the same way as the user configured data table above You have one additional option for Instance 1 you may select the data type of Instance 1 as integer 0 or floating point 1 If you change the configuration of Instance 1 an existing Class 1 connection will fault You need to edit the properties of the connection with the parent controller to reflect the n
297. s table will increment through all remaining blocks of the current channel only e Manual increment each write of the Transient Capture Clear Read back Data Select table specifies the channel and block to be read in the next read of the Transient Capture Results table Successive reads of the results table return the same block of data each time if no read back select write is done As with other indexed reads DeviceNet and Ethernet optional communication support only manual increment read back mode so that the client must write a read back select message before each read of the results table For all other communication options auto increment all channels or auto increment current channel read back mode provides the highest communication throughput Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 183 Chapter8 Advanced Features The Transient Capture Results table comprises the transient capture results This read only table comprises these 29 DeviceNet network or 59 all other communication options integer elements e Capture timestamp in three elements using the standard timestamp format except the year is omitted e Capture number in the range 1 6 e Channel number in the range 1 7 1 V1 2 11 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 13 7 14 e Block number block number of the data contained in the table See above e Transient capture identifier range 0 30 000 rolls over to 0 e Transient capture data points see below
298. s complete with no errors the Success flag asserts and the Start flag is cleared Timer2 DN 3 Y MSG Type PLC 5 Typed Read EN Message Control msgGetStatus CDN gt CER 5 msgGetStatus ER CTU J E Count Up CU Counter Counter CDN 5 Preset 2 Accum 0 msgGetStatus DN EQU NEQ JE Equal Not Equal Source A Status 0 Source A Status 1 30 1 Source B 30 Source B 1 Counter1 DN JE q Ie msgWriteNew ER 2 ile HE Failed msgGetStatus DN Failed Success TE J FE L IE Jt Failed Start Counter1 lE U RES Success Sp iE aE End Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 319 Appendix C Sample Applications The message configuration for the GetStatus message is shown below Message Configuration msgGetStatus x Configuration Communication Tag Message Type PLC5 Typed Read X Source Element N32 0 Number Of Elements 2 Destination Tag Status 0 New Tag O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 2 Error Code Timed Out Extended Error Code Cancel 5pply Help Communicating with a The DES vine and B RM o Sa team tested the following example ladder e scan times for execution o SLC 3 05 1747 L552 the ladder are as follows Controller and ControlNet Scanner 1747 SCNR Unscheduled Messaging 320 Operation Scan Time Table reads for Integer and float files 20 ms Table writes of Integer and float files 30 ms All the communica
299. se delay 209 Setpoint 5 release delay 210 Setpoint 6 release delay 211 Setpoint release delay 212 Setpoint 8 release delay 213 Setpoint 9 release delay 214 Setpoint 10 release delay 215 Setpoint 1 action type 216 Setpoint 2 action type 217 Setpoint 3 action type 218 Setpoint 4 action type 219 Setpoint 5 action type 220 Setpoint 6 action type 221 Setpoint 7 action type Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Comment Referto Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status Parameters Appendix A 215 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name No 222 Setpoint 8 action type 223 Setpoint 9 action type 224 Setpoint 10 action type 225 Setpoint 1 status 226 Setpoint 2 status 22 Setpoint 3 status 228 Setpoint 4 status 229 Setpoint 5 status 230 Setpoint 6 status 231 Setpoint 7 status 232 Setpoint 8 status 233 Setpoint 9 status 234 Setpoint 10 status 235 Setpoint 1 accumulated active time 236 Setpoint 2 accumulated active time 237 Setpoint 3 accumulated active time 238 Setpoint 4 accumulated active time 239 Setpoint 5 accumulated active time 240 Setpoint 6 accumulated active time 241 Setpoint 7 accumulated active time 242 Setpoint 8 accumulated active time 243 Setpoint 9 accumulated active time 244 Setpoint 10 accumulated active time
300. selects a read back mode or returns the last mode selected Range 0 2 default 0 See below e Clear command clears one or all captures Always returns 0 See below e Reserved elements must be zero 0 on a write returns 0 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 e Capture clear status Read only bitfield that indicates which capture numbers are clear Bit 0 LSB corresponds to capture 1 bit 1 to capture 2 and so on For each bit 1 indicates clear 0 indicates not clear e Capture ready status read only bitfield that indicates which capture numbers contain captures that are ready to read Same bit correspondence as above For each bit 1 indicates the capture is ready 0 indicates no capture or not yet ready Block Number The block number and the total number of data reads required to read an entire capture depend on the communication option The range is 1 70 for the DeviceNet network and 1 28 for all other communication options Read back Mode The data client uses the indexed read method to read transient capture data The Read back mode options include the following e Auto increment all channels successive reads of Transient Capture Clear Read back Data Select table increment through all remaining blocks of the current channel increment through all remaining channels and wrap back to the original channel e Auto increment current channel successive reads of the result
301. speed 55 energy counter rollover 54 metering options 54 network demand and time configuration 55 relay and KYZ pulse 53 watchdog timeout 55 advanced features 159 auto sense protocol 95 basic device configuration 48 nominal system voltage 49 PT and CT ratios 49 wiring mode 48 C clear command 185 clear or preset energy counters 120 communicating from a PLC5 117 communicating via 1747 KFC15 ControlNet 115 communication 14 63 communication loss behavior 140 communication option DeviceNet 19 communication options 17 ControlNet 20 Ethernet 19 Modbus 17 Remote 0 18 RS 232 18 RS 485 native communication 17 configurable trend log 148 calculating depth 149 modes of operation 148 reading data 152 set up 151 configuration 14 advanced device configuration 50 basic device configuration 48 configuration using the dispaly module 47 configuring communication 63 ControlNet 79 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Index DeviceNet 71 DF1 full duplex 67 Ethernet 78 Modbus 64 Remote 0 70 RS 232 65 RS 485 64 configuring harmonic analysis 171 configuring setpoints 128 examples of setpoint operation 131 reading setpoint status using communication 135 using display module 133 viewing using display module 134 writing configuration using communication 134 configuring time of use log 157 ControlNet 112 communicating from a PLC5 117 communicating from SLC through 1747 KFC15 115 performance features 20 status indi
302. st of products that have passed the conformance test at one of their test labs WcontrolNet 335 Appendix D 336 Technical Specifications UL CUL UL 508 listed File E96956 for Industrial Control Equipment and CUL Certified CE Certification If this product bears the CE marking it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed to meet the following directives EMC Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole documented in a technical construction file e EN 50081 2 Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment e EN 50082 2 Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage by applying the safety requirements of IEC 1010 1 This equipment is classified as open equipment and must be installed mounted in an enclosure during operation as a means of providing safety protection International Standard IEC 529 NEMA UL 508 Degree of Protection The Bulletin 1404 master module is rated as IP10 degree of protection per International Standard IEC 529 It is considered an open device per NEMA and UL 508 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Technical Specifications Technical
303. sure detected Bit 2 demand sync timeout 1 the demand delay expired before the next expected external demand sync This bit clears when the next external demand sync occurs Refer to Advanced Device Configuration Parameters element 23 Bits 3 15 unused always 0 4 30005 Status input 1 counter 0 Counts to 29 999 rolls over to 0 5 30006 Status input 2 counter ed Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 193 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Basic Device Configuration Parameters CSP File No F10 Remote 0 BT 20 CIP Assy Inst 4 Write 5 Read No of Elements 8 M4 M5 9 M6 M8 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type See table Basic Device Configuration Element Modbus Element name M4 M M Range Units Defaul Comment No Address M5 6 8 t Value 0 40001 2 Password e jeje 0 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration Returns 1 1 40003 4 Wiring mode e e e 0 8 6 0 Delta 3 CT Delta 2 CT 2 Direct Delta 3 CT 3 Direct Delta 2 CT 4 Open Delta 3 CT 5 Open Delta 2 CT 6 Wye 7 Single Phase 8 Demo 2 40005 6 Potential transformer PT e e o 10 Volts 480 0 The high side of the PT ratio xxx xxx primary 10 000 000 0 3 40007 8 PT secondary e e 1 0 600 0 Volts 480 0 The low side of the PT r
304. sword 0 You now have 30 minutes to write values to your other writeable parameters Your write session will expire when idle for durations longer than 30 minutes 295 Appendix C 296 Sample Applications If you are using RSLinx Classic software as your OPC software a eee licensed RSLinx OEM or higher version is required n RSI OPC Test Client RSLinx OPC Server y File Server Group tem Log View Window m a PM3O00 Actual Rate 1000 ttem Sub V Sub Quai Sub Update Update Rate 123 0 0 0 0 0 Do a Syne Write For this Item MicroLogix Controller and EtherNet IP Communication Networks This example reads and writes the power monitor date and time table by using a MicroLogix 1400 controller and EtherNet IP communication The power monitor master module firmware must be 4 x or later and IMPORTANT IMPORTANT the Ethernet protocol must be set to CIP or CSP CIP to support communication with a MicroLogix controller MicroLogix Controller Ethernet Port Setup Assign the MicroLogix controller and the power monitor compatible network addresses In this example the power monitor IP address is 10 90 172 91 and the ML1400 IP address is 10 90 172 95 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Channel Configuration General Channel Channel Channel 2 Driver themet v Hardware Address 00 00 68C 38 5E 7D DUM um IP Address 10 30 172
305. t ID listed on the nameplate e Inter character timeout Range 0 6553 ms Default 0 3 5 character times e Error checking CRC default BCC The Delay parameter is the time the power monitor waits before its response to an external request Certain communication equipment requires such a delay for reliable operation With a half duplex protocol selected you may connect your power monitor into a multi drop RS 485 network with up to 32 nodes You must use a device configured as a master to communicate with this port All devices on the RS 485 network must be set at the same data rate With the DF1 full duplex protocol selected the power monitor communicates with another DF1 full duplex initiator device over a point to point link TIP The native communication port does not support Data Highway 485 DH 485 communication Although DH 485 uses the RS 485 physical media its protocol is not compatible with the DF1 protocol Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 Native Communication Configuration Summary Parameter Description Range Default User Setting Protocol DF1 Auto Sense Full duplex DF1 Half duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave Auto Sense Delay Time between receiving 0 75 ms 10 ms a request and transmitting a response Communication RS 485 port 1 2 Kbps 9600 baud Rate communication bitrate 2 4 Kbps 4 8 Kbps 9 6 Kbps 19 2 Kbps
306. t aaa bbb ccc ddd decimal each Bytes 1 4 byte Optional ControlNet Communication Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in CNT are equipped with an optional redundant ControlNet port and a native RS 485 port in a dual port configuration that allows simultaneous operation of the ports You must configure the communication parameters before you connect the power monitor to a ControlNet network The only configuration parameter is the ControlNet node number also called MAC ID The range of this parameter is 1 99 with a default of 99 A node number of 0 is typically used as the address of a ControlNet scanner Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 79 Chapter4 Communication Data Messaging Overview 80 Through communication the power monitor becomes an effective source of power and energy data to enterprise information and automation systems This section of the manual provides an overview of data messaging with the power monitor Following the overview discussions will focus on the details of messaging using specific communication types for example serial remote I O DeviceNet and Ethernet The power monitor is a read write data server It does not initiate data messages but responds to messages from client devices Its data is organized in data tables similar to those found in a SLC 5 03 programmable controller The primary methods to communicate with a power monitor include the following
307. t able to send messages it determines this from a lack of response from the master module the display module displays Check Tv ion Once the display module begins communicating with the master module it displays it on the screen and the Check Rx or Check Tx messages disappear No operator intervention is required to clear these messages Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Scrolling When messages are too large to fit on the display a scrolling mechanism is employed The message scrolls horizontally The default scroll rate was chosen to give you enough time to see the message but not take too much time to show the entire message You may select from two different scroll rates by using the Advanced Configuration Menu on the display module Take care to see the entire message before taking any action as some of the messages are very similar and differ only by a few characters Editing a Parameter Follow these steps to edit a parameter by using the display module 1 Using the display module keys move into Program mode and display the parameter to be modified Notice the flashing phase indicators on the right hand side of the screen Edit Mode 2 Set the display module into Edit mode by pressing the Enter key Notice that the phase indicators on the right side turn on solid and the parameter being modified is now flashing Parameter Change Publication
308. t reads the tables listed below in indexed Read back mode to obtain individual harmonic data In Auto increment mode read the Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More table to index the channel e Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 1 21 Table M6 and M8 e Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 41 Table M6 and M8 e Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 20 Table M6 and M8 e Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 40 Table M6 and M8 e Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 43 63 Table M8 only e Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 42 62 Table M8 only Each of these tables consists of 14 floating point elements containing the following parameters e Channel 1 V1 2 I1 3 V2 4 I2 5 V3 6 I3 7 14 no averages e Type of harmonic data 0 per cent harmonic distortion 1 magnitude e Nth harmonic expressed according to the type parameter Magnitude type is referenced to the primary side of PTs and CTs Range 0 0 999 9 1074 e FFT iteration each new FFT calculation used in the previous four parameters increments by one from 0 32 767 and rolls back to 0 173 Chapter8 Advanced Features Sag and Swell 174 In the Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 41 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 20 and Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 40 tables the first nth harmonic element is reserved and returns a value of 0 The Powermonitor 3000 M6 and M8 models are capable of de
309. tage average Phase 3 L N Voltage 3 Phase Average L N Voltage Phase 1 L L Voltage RMS line to line voltage of individual phase or three phase 0 999 9x1022 Volts Phase 2 L L Voltage average Phase 3 L L Voltage 3 Phase L L Voltage Phase 1 Current RMS line current in individual phase or three phase average 0 999 9x1022 Amps Phase 2 Current Phase 3 Current 3 Phase Average Current Phase 4 Neutral Current RMS current of phase 4 also known as neutral or zero sequence g 9999x1022 Amps current Frequency The frequency of the voltage 40 0 75 0 Hertz Phase Rotation The phase rotation of a three phase system None N A ABC ACB Voltage Positive Sequence Magnitude of positive sequence voltage in a three phase 0 999 9x1022 Volts system Voltage Negative Sequence Magnitude of negative sequence voltage in a three phase 0 999 9x1022 Volts system Current Positive Sequence Magnitude of positive sequence current in a three phase system g 9999x1922 Amps Current Negative Sequence Magnitude of negative sequence current in a three phase system 0 999 9x1022 Amps Voltage Unbalance The ratio between the negative and positive voltage sequence in 0 100 Percent a three phase system Current Unbalance The ratio between the negative and positive current sequence in 0 100 Percent Real power that is the portion of the voltage and current applied to a power system that is doing work is calculated on a per phase L1 Real Power L2 Real P
310. tamp read only these elements ignored on a write Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Min Max Log Parameter Listing Data Logging Chapter 7 Param Parameter Name Param Parameter Name Number Number 0 L1 Current 37 Projected Demand 1 L2 Current 38 Projected Demand W 2 L3 Current 39 Projected Demand VAR 3 Avg Current 40 Projected Demand VA 4 L1 N Voltage 41 L1 True Power Factor 5 L2 N Voltage 42 L2 True Power Factor 6 L3 N Voltage 43 L3 True Power Factor 7 Avg L N Voltage 44 Three phase True PF 8 L1 L2 Voltage 45 L1 Displacement Power Factor 9 L2 L3 Voltage 46 L2 Displacement Power Factor 10 L3 L1 Voltage 47 L3 Displacement Power Factor 11 Avg L L Voltage 48 Three phase Displacement PF 12 Frequency last cycle 49 L1 Distortion Power Factor 13 L4 Current 50 L2 Distortion Power Factor 14 Positive Sequence Current 51 L3 Distortion Power Factor 15 Negative Sequence Current 52 Three phase Distortion PF 16 Current unbalance 53 V1 IEEE THD 17 Positive Sequence Voltage 54 11 IEEE THD 18 Negative Sequence Voltage 55 V2 IEEE THD 19 Voltage unbalance 56 12 IEEE THD 20 Average frequency 57 V3 IEEE THD 21 L1 Real Power 58 13 IEEE THD 22 L2 Real Power 59 14 IEEE THD 23 L3 Real Power 60 V1 IEC thd DIN 24 Total Real Power 61 11 IEC thd DIN 25 L1 Reactive Power 62 V2 IEC thd DIN 26 L2 Reactive Powe
311. tecting voltage sags and swells There are many definitions for sag and swell IEEE 1159 defines sag as a decrease to between 0 1 0 9 pu in rms voltage or current at the power frequency for durations of 0 5 cycle to 1 minute IEEE 1159 defines swell as an increase in rms voltage or current at the power frequency for durations from 0 5 cycles to 1 minute Typical values are 1 1 1 8 pu Sag and Swell Bs Ev EvEN Ho E Center on Trigger Position The pre defined setpoint configuration for the detection of sag and swell is based on the IEEE 1159 standard Although the default setpoint configuration is applicable as is for many sag and swell applications it may be necessary to alter the setpoint configuration to adjust the unit s sensitivity to sags and swells for your particular application Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 Setpoint 19 is setup to detect voltage sag and has the following configuration data e Type Voltage Sag e Evaluation condition Under forward e High Limit 90 Nominal System Voltage e Low Limit 90 Nominal System Voltage e Action delay 0 e Release delay 0 e Output action Capture oscillograph Setpoint 20 is setup to detect voltage swell and has the following configuration data e Type Voltage Swell e Evaluation condition Over forward e High Limit 110 Nominal System Voltage e Low
312. tem clock e The methods used for reading and writing the system clock are applicable to reading and writing every other power monitor data table See Date and Time Parameters on page 195 for details of the Date and Time data table We will look at four methods of reading and writing the system clock SLC 500 Controller and Native RS 485 Communication This example reads and writes the date and time table by using the SLC 500 controller Channel 0 serial port and the native RS 485 communication port on the power monitor You must supply an RS 232 to RS 485 converter such as a 1761 NET AIC or B amp B Electronics 485SD9TB between the SLC 500 controller and the power monitor Serial Port Setup The SLC 500 serial port setup using a 1761 NET AIC adapter is shown The specific settings depend on your selection of RS 485 to RS 232 adapter This example uses the DF1 half duplex protocol Serial Port Setup x General Chan 1 System Chan 0 System Chen 0 User Diver Node Address 0 Idecensi Baud N Parity Stop Bits Protocol Control Control Line No Handihakng ACK Timeout x20 ma 50 Enor Detection CRC Pulling Mode Msg Dont allow Slaves lo Iiis Y 7 Duplicate Packet Delect Message Reties 3 Reply Msg Timeout x20 ma 1 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ma 20 usum goes mex 282 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C Data Ta
313. the energy logging software to poll the Trend Log data allowing for automatic data repopulation of the energy database Calculating Trend Log Depth How long the Trend Log takes to fill may be as little as 90 minutes or as long as 2 years depending on how you configure the log These formulas will help you configure the trend log to obtain the results you want Round off any results to the next lower integer Trend Log Depth Formula This formula returns the number of records in the trend log for the number of parameters logged To determine the length of time this represents multiply the result by the trend log interval Where D Depth of the trend log in records F Fill mode 0 fill and hold 1 overwrite P Parameters per record 1 16 INT x The integer portion of x EXAMPLE For example if P 3 and F 0 we will get this result 65536 _ E 7x s iz INT 1927 53 7x 1927 13489 149 Chapter 7 150 Data Logging Parameters per Record Formula If your application requires a certain number of records or time to preserve logged information this formula returns the number of parameters per record allowed pP INT 16384 55 D CEIL 22 Where CEIL x the smallest integer greater than x For example CEIL 1914 28 1915 Suppose D 13400 and F 0 we will get P mia s INT 3 05 3 CEIL 1914 28 Suppose D 13500 and F 0 we will get 16384 P NT ll CEIL
314. tion 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Product Description Chapter 2 Native RS 485 Communication Only catalog numbers ending in 000 Status Indicator Indicator Color Indicator State and Communication Condition Fi Off Not Used F2 Off Not Used F3 Off Not Used RS 232 Optional Communication catalog numbers ending in 232 Status Indicator Indicator Color Indicator State and Communication Condition F Off Not Used RS 232 RX Off The RS 232 bus is idle no active data is present Flashing Green Power monitor is receiving data RS 232 TX Off The power monitor is not transmitting any Flashing Green data onto the RS 232 bus The power monitor is transmitting data Remote 1 0 Optional Communication catalog numbers ending in RIO Status Indicator Indicator Color Indicator State and Communication Condition F1 off Not Used F2 Off Not Used RI O Off Remote I O communication has not been established Flashing Green Remote I O communication has been established but there are errors Steady Green Remote I O communication has been established 23 Chapter2 Product Description C NETWORK STATUS NETWORK STATUS 24 DeviceNet Optional Communication catalog numbers ending in DNT Status Indicator Indicator Color Indicator State and Communication Condition F1 off Not Used F2 off Not Used Network Status Off
315. tion Chapter 4 Simple Reads of Data Tables The following considerations apply to simple power monitor data table reads e An entire data table or a contiguous portion down to a single element may be read except for remote I O and DeviceNet optional communication which require that an entire table be read e The target data location should match the size and data type of the data requested You may use simple reads to obtain basic metering data configuration data date and time and the contents of the user configured data table Simple Data Table Read Flow Diagram Programmable Controller Powermonitor 3000 Data Client Data Server Source Address oe Starting Element Data Length Target Address Sa re al Source Table Target Location Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 87 Chapter 4 88 Communication Indexed Reads of Large Data Structures Large data structures that require indexed reads are most often read into a computer based application that performs further processing of the data The power monitor parses logs oscillograms harmonic analysis results setpoint status results and other large data structures into individual records to be read by the client and reassembled into the original data structure You may select one of two modes for indexed table reads e Auto Increment the power monitor automatically points to the next record following each read of the specifi
316. tion operations of the ladder are locked out until the read or write bits are set This was done so that other operations performed by the ladder will have minimum overhead from communication The following files are of importance when using the ladder example Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C N7 SCNR FILE The following items are of importance in file N7 0 File N7 0 Bit 4 Importance N7 0 Read Write N7 0 15 EN Written to by the ladder to enable R W communication transaction N7 0 14 Unused N A N7 0 13 DN bit Response received R N7 0 12 ER bit Error bit returned form SCNR R scanner N7 0 11 CO Continuous mode Not used N A N7 0 10 EW Message taken into account by R 1747 SCNR scanner N7 0 9 SUCCESS Used by ladder for notification R of successful communication transfer N7 0 8 TO The message transaction has timed R While other words in the N7 SCNR FILE are important to out communication these values are copied from file N9 CIP SETUP to file N7 N9 CIP_SETUP This file is the CIP message setup file The importance of the following words should be noted N9 CIP ee Description of Function N9 0 Not used by CIP_SETUP N9 1 Target MAC ID Power monitor MAC ID N92 Communication transaction timeout setting in ms 2048 recommended N9 3 Complex IOI size Not used
317. tor supports the following DeviceNet object classes DeviceNet Object Classes Class hex Object 01 Identity 02 Message Router 03 DeviceNet 04 Assembly 05 Connection 2B Acknowledge handler Indexed Data Table Heads by using DeviceNet Communication Powermonitor 3000 units with optional DeviceNet communication support only manual indexed mode for reading large data structures such as oscillograms setpoint status logs and harmonics Refer to the appropriate sections of this manual for detailed information 102 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier The communication interface used in the DeviceNet communication option is programmed to reject duplicate write messages Because of this all writeable data tables in the power monitor include an element called DeviceNet unique write identifier In many cases your client application may ignore this element because the message data is unique However where your client application performs repeated identical writes it should increment the DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier with each new message An example of this would be reading the Event Log or Trend Log Ethernet Communication Option The Powermonitor 3000 units with optional Ethernet communication operates as a slave device on the Ethernet network You can use your web browser and the unit s built in web server to access metering and stats
318. tpoint 6 evaluation condition 171 Setpoint 7 evaluation condition 172 Setpoint 8 evaluation condition 173 Setpoint 9 evaluation condition 174 Setpoint 10 evaluation condition 175 Setpoint 1 high limit 176 Setpoint 2 high limit 177 Setpoint 3 high limit 178 Setpoint 4 high limit 179 Setpoint 5 high limit 180 Setpoint 6 high limit 181 Setpoint 7 high limit 182 Setpoint 8 high limit 183 Setpoint 9 high limit 184 Setpoint 10 high limit 185 Setpoint 1 low limit 186 Setpoint 2 low limit 187 Setpoint 3 low limit 188 Setpoint 4 low limit 274 Comment Refer to Setpoint Setup Read back Select and Status Parameters Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Param Parameter Name No 189 Setpoint 5 low limit 190 Setpoint 6 low limit 191 Setpoint 7 low limit 192 Setpoint 8 low limit 193 Setpoint 9 low limit 194 Setpoint 10 low limit 195 Setpoint 1 action delay 196 Setpoint 2 action delay 197 Setpoint 3 action delay 198 Setpoint 4 action delay 199 Setpoint 5 action delay 200 Setpoint 6 action delay 201 Setpoint 7 action delay 202 Setpoint 8 action delay 203 Setpoint 9 action delay 204 Setpoint 10 action delay 205 Setpoint 1 release delay 206 Setpoint 2 release delay 207 Setpoint 3 release delay 208 Setpoint 4 relea
319. transaction body which is 6 6 bytes 3 words Word M0 1 225 Port Size Port x 256 Size 0 x 256 6 6 Word MO0 1 226 A service code and MAC ID is needed for this word The service code is the DeviceNet network service that can be used on the Class 4 assembly instances these are the valid service codes e 14 Get Attributes Single e 16 Set Attributes Single Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Sample Applications Appendix C The MAC ID is the node number of the device that the DeviceNet scanner is communicating to this example uses node 5 Word M0 1 226 Service x 256 MAC ID 14 x 256 5 3589 Word M0 1 227 The class number is the first word of the transaction body class 4 is used to retrieve the real time data assemblies Word M0 1 227 Class Word M0 1 2278 The instance number is the second word of the transaction body instance 14 is used to retrieve the real time voltage current and frequency metering information Word M0 1 2278 Instance 14 Word MO 1 229 The attribute number is the third word of the transaction body attribute 3 is used to get the metering information Word M0 1 229 Attribute 3 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 307 Appendix C Sample Applications 308 SLC 500 Sequencer Operation This example uses a sequencer instruction and indirect addressing to optimize program operation During initialization of Run mode the sequencer input fil
320. trolLogix Gateway MultiHop Configuration 4 MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop V us dec e Habits Backplane NA 1756 Backplane Slot dec 1756 ENET N A LLP Address str 192 1 88449 You may choose between two types of ControlLogix controller to power monitor messaging PLC 5 Typed read or write that encapsulates a PCCC message within a CIP wrapper e CIP Generic messaging which uses the CIP class instance attribute object model common to DeviceNet network 107 Chapter 4 Communication Set up the Communication tab in the ControlLogix message instruction the same for each messaging type ControlLogix Controller to Powermonitor 3000 Unit Communication Tab Example Message Configuration msgPM3K VI ENET IP Bridge 2 130 151 71 Pragai E JST aU GTI A r SGUTGE Fir Destination IW GO ache lonnecions The first example below reads the Voltage and Current table from a power monitor into the ControlLogix controller tag dataPM3K VICO by using a PLC 5 Typed Read configured as an array of 14 elements of type Real You would configure a CIP Data Table Read the same way except for the message type ControlLogix PLC 5 Controller Typed Read Example Message Configuration msgPM3K VI Communication Tag PLC5 Typed Read Z dataPM3K VI ci 108 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 The next example shows the message c
321. ts L2 Projected Demand W IEEE THD L11 Crest Factor L3 V Amps Pos Seq Displ PF L2 Projected Demand W Volts Ave L N Watts L3 Projected Demand VAR IEEE THD L2 V Crest Factor L3 Amps Neg Seq Displ PF L3 Projected Demand VAR Volts L1 L2 Watts Ave 3Ph Projected Demand VA IEEE THDI21 Crest Factor L4 I Voltage Unbalance Tot Displ PF Projected Demand VA Volts L2 L3 VARS L1 True PF L1 EEE THD L3 V Current Unbalance Dist PF L1 Load Factor Volts L1 L3 VARS L2 True PF L2 EEE THD L31 Dist PFL2 Load Factor W Volts Ave L L VARS L3 True PF L3 EEE THD L4 I Dist PF L3 Load Factor VAR Freq VAR Ave 3 Ph Total True PF EC THD L1 V Tot Dist PF Load Factor VA Amps N VA L1 Disp PF L1 EC THD L1 I Pos Seq Current VA L2 Disp PF L2 EC THD L2 V Neg Seq Current VAL3 Disp PF L3 EC THD L21 0 Voltage THD and Crest Factor Voltage are omitted for neutral channel 2 Parameters displayed depend on the wiring mode 3 Individual phase parameters are omitted in delta wiring modes 4 Load factor parameters are available only on M6 and M8 modules 40 Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Unit Operations Chapter 3 Configuration Menu
322. ttempt to resume normal operation 232 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Appendix A User configured Table Setup Parameters CSP File No N30 Remote 1 0 BT 35 CIP Assy Inst 35 Write 36 Read No of Elements 26 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Applies to User configured Table Results Parameters on page 235 User configured Table Setup Element Modbus Element Name Range Default Comment No Address Value 0 41101 Password 0 9999 0 Required for configuration returns 1 1 41102 DF1 or Ethernet CSP File No 31 31 Refer to User configured Data Table on page 121 RIO BT No 62 62 DeviceNet EtherNet IP or 1 37 37 ControlNet Ass y Inst Modbus 1000 31 2 41103 DeviceNet EtherNet IP or 0 1 0 ControlNet instance 1 data type 3 41104 Selection for parameter 1 0 301 71 L1 L2 V 4 41105 Selection for parameter 2 720243V 5 41106 Selection for parameter 3 73 L3 L1 V 6 41107 Selection for parameter 4 63 I1 7 41108 Selection for parameter 5 64 I2 8 41109 Selection for parameter 6 65 I3 9 41110 Selection for parameter 7 ow 10 41111 Selection for parameter 8 98 VA 11 41112 Selection for parameter 9 94 VAR 12 41113 Selection for parameter 10 111 PF 13 41114 Selection for paramet
323. ublication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 67 68 Chapter 4 Communication To use the auto configure you must first select the device as SLC CHO0 Micro PanelView Configure RS 232 DF1 Devices Device Name AB DF1 1 Comm Port cout Device EmA EEE Baud Rate 19200 x Station Number n Decimal Parity None Error Checking BCC oF Stop Bits fi Protocol Full Duplex Auto Configure Use Modem Dialer Configure Dialer tmd beee Heb Click Auto Configure to start the process The configuration returns with the following message This message can be disregarded Recognition of the device is provided after exiting the auto configuration routine X AutoConfiguration appears to have succeeded however RSLinx has failed to identify the device 5 Click OK and disregard this message x A STA DS TYPE GA TERM 36 PROC 8A Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Communication Chapter 4 The successful configuration of DF1 full duplex should look like this Configure RS 232 DF1 Devices 4 Device Name AB DF1 1 Comm Port cow Device SLC CHO Micro Panelview Baud Rate 3600 Station Number op Decimal Parity None Error Checking cnc Stop Bits i H Protocol FullDuplex v i Configuration Successfull Use Modem Dialer Configure Dialer OK Ca
324. uch as voltages currents power etc Reverse setpoints are typically used to monitor power and energy when on site generation is present Equal and not equal evaluation conditions are for use with discrete conditions such as phase rotation status inputs and transient detection Over Forward Setpoint An over forward setpoint activates when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored defined by the Setpoint Type increases beyond the Setpoint High Limit and remains over the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay The setpoint releases when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored decreases below the Setpoint Low Limit and stays below the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay Over Forward Setpoint Operation lt Setpoint Action Delay 2Setpoint Action Delay Setpoint gt Setpoint Release Delay Release Delay Mi NEN Lar 0 Time s Setpoint Activated Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Setpoint Programming and Operation Chapter 5 Setpoint Low Limit Setpoint High Limit E Maximum Excursion Parameter Value Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Over Reverse Setpoint An over reverse setpoint is the mirror image of an over forward setpoint For reverse setpoints all the magnitudes and limits are negative An over reverse setpoint activates when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored defined by the Setpoint Type
325. uency factors are used to compute the total TIF You multiply the TIF numbers by the RMS magnitude of the power lines voltage or current to obtain an index for estimating the amount of interfering energy that is coupled to the telephone system The formula for total TIF is Where e X single frequency RMS current or voltage at harmonic w single frequency TIF weighting factor at harmonic i Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Advanced Features Chapter 8 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 K Factor K Factor measures additional heating in a power transformer due to the harmonics in the power signal These harmonics cause additional heating due to increased core losses that occur at higher frequencies The increased losses are related to the square of the harmonic frequency Therefore a slight harmonic content can significantly increase the heat rise in a power transformer The additional harmonic heating may cause a transformer to exceed designed temperature limits even though the RMS current is less than the transformer rating The K Factor is used as justification to oversize a power transformer to allow extra margin for harmonic losses or to select an appropriate K Factor rated transformer A K Factor rated transformer is the preferred choice since it has known performance in the presence of harmonics The formula for K Factor is as follows co 2 Where H en n I M k e H magnitude of the
326. urces of power and verify that they are de energized and locked out Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION IMPORTANT Never open a current transformer CT secondary circuit with primary current applied Wiring between the CTs and the Powermonitor 3000 unit should include a shorting terminal block in the CT secondary circuit Shorting the secondary with primary current present allows other connections to be removed if needed An open CT secondary with primary current applied produces a hazardous voltage which can lead to personal injury death property damage or economic loss The Powermonitor 3000 unit is not designed for nor intended for use as a circuit protective device Do not use this equipment in place of a motor overload relay or circuit protective relay IMPORTANT The relay output contacts and solid state KYZ output contacts on the Powermonitor 3000 unit may be used to control other devices through setpoint control or communication You configure the response of these outputs to a communication failure Be sure to evaluate the safety impact of the output configuration on your plant or process 11 Chapter 1 Safety Other Precautions Electrostatic discharge can damage integrated circuits or semiconductors Follow these guidelines when you handle the module e Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential e Wear an
327. view the existing Trend Log configuration When you read this table the password element returns a value of 1 and the reserved and command elements return a value of 0 Elements 7 and 8 return the Total Records Logged 1000 and 1 respectively Reading Data from the Trend Log To read the Trend Log use the indexed read method A write to the Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select table selects which trend log record is read next There are a number of auto increment and manual increment options that may be selected by writing to the Read back Mode element in the Trend Log Configuration Read back Record Select Parameters table You can select from the following options 0 Auto increment start at beginning Start at the oldest log record and index to the next record after each read of the results table 1 Auto increment start at end Start at the newest log record and index to the next record after each read 2 Auto decrement start at end Start at the newest log record and index to the previous record after each read 3 Point to the oldest log record 4 Point to the newest log record 5 Index to the next record after each read of the results table 6 Index to the previous record after each read Publication 1404 UMO01F EN P November 2009 Min Max Log Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Data Logging Chapter 7 Only mode 0 1 and 2 are supported by DF1 and remote I O communic
328. werPlus or RSEnergyMetrix software or create a custom application to configure oscillography and read waveform data RSPower software may be configured to automatically download and save waveforms to a disk file and then clear the oscillography buffers Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 159 Chapter 8 160 Advanced Features Configuring Oscillography You may configure oscillography only via communication The display module does not support an interface to oscillography Configure oscillography by performing a table write to the Oscillograph Configuration Read back Data Select This read write table of 11 integer elements comprises the following configuration and command parameters Password needed to configure the capture type or pre trigger or execute a command to trigger or clear a capture Not needed for read back select use 1 Default 0000 Capture number selects a capture for read back or returns the last capture selected Range 1 8 M6 or 1 2 M8 Default 1 Channel number selects a channel number or returns the last channel number selected Range 1 V1 2 I1 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 I3 7 I4 Default 1 Block number selects a data block for the next read or returns the last block selected Range depends on communication type See below Default 1 Read back mode selects a read back mode or returns the last mode selected Range 0 2 default 0 See below C
329. wo wire shielded Belden 9841 Multi drop capabilities up to 32 nodes half duplex only Update rate 100 ms minimum Read Write data table access to all data e One user configurable data table e Supports DF1 half duplex DF1 full duplex and Modbus RTU communication protocol e Used for field firmware upgrades The serial communication port operates as a responder on a full duplex point to point link You must verify that no more than one message is triggered simultaneously 17 Chapter 2 Product Description RS 232 Optional Communication A catalog number ending in 232 specifies a power monitor with one RS 232 communication port in addition to the native RS 485 communication port You select which of the two ports is active as the two ports may not be used concurrently The RS 232 port supports the same performance features as the RS 485 port with the following exceptions e RS 232 cable length 15 24 m 50 ft maximum e Cable type three wire shielded Belden 9608 e Point to point wiring e The RS 232 port operates as a responder Unlike the RS 485 port the RS 232 port supports overlapping messages Remote 1 0 Optional Communication A catalog number ending in RIO specifies a power monitor with a remote I O communication port in addition to the native RS 485 communication port The remote I O option permits concurrent use of both communication ports The remote I O port has the following performance features
330. y use bit 9 0200h Display module status bit 10 0400h Master module watchdog timer status bit 11 0800h Master module optional communication status bit 12 15 1000h Reserved for factory use 8000h Configuring the Event Log by Using Communication You may configure the Event Log by performing a valid table write to the Event Log Configuration Read back Record Select table This read write data table contains these six integer elements e Password A valid password is required to set configuration options or 1 to select a record for read back e DeviceNet unique write identifier e Read back mode see below e Status input logging 0 disables 1 enables e Number of events logged this read only element is ignored on a write e Time date set logging 0 disables 1 enables 146 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 Data Logging Chapter 7 Reading Data from the Event Log by Using Communication The Event Log uses the indexed read method The Event Log Configuration Read back Record Select table is the Read back Select table and the Event Log Results table is the Results table You may select among a number of read back options for the Event Log 0 Auto increment start at beginning of log 1 Auto increment start at end of log 2 Auto decrement start at end of log 3 Point to the beginning of log 4 7 Point to the end of log 5 Index to the next
331. ze your application to meet your business needs The sample applications include the following Read and write the power monitor system clock by using a variety of controllers applications and communication networks e Read multiple power monitor data tables into an SLC 500 controller by using a DeviceNet communication network e Set up the user configured data table by using a ControlLogix controller and an EtherNet IP communication network Read and write power monitor tables by using an SLC 500 controller and a 1747 SCNR ControlNet scanner Read and write power monitor tables by using a MicroLogix controller over EtherNet IP and Modbus RTU communication networks Read and write power monitor tables by using a Component HMI over an EtherNet IP communication network Proper operation of the application is your responsibility Rockwell ATTENTION j ere Automation makes no warranty express or implied for these sample applications The sample applications are subject to change at any time without notice Publication 1404 UM001F EN P November 2009 281 Appendix C Sample Applications System Clock Sample The power monitor system clock date and time is an ideal sample Applications application for these reasons e It is important to set the system clock so that data log records or oscillograms are recorded with accurate time stamps e It is easy to see if your application has successfully written and read the sys

1404-UM001F-EN-P, Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents